User Guide

Copyright Bureau van Dijk 2022 Last updated March 2022

 Table Of Contents
1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 What information does Amadeus contain? ....................................................................................... 1
1.2 HOW IT HELPS YOU......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 COVERAGE ................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................................... 2
1.5 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................................................. 2
1.5.1 Hardware ........................................................................................................................................... 2
1.5.2 Software ............................................................................................................................................ 2
1.6 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS ........................................................................................................................ 2
2 GETTING STARTED ..................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 HOME PAGE.................................................................................................................................................. 5
2.1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 5
2.1.2 Advanced search toolbox ................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.3 Search side menu ............................................................................................................................... 6
2.1.4 Search strategy toolbox ..................................................................................................................... 7
2.2 PRODUCT TOOLBAR ........................................................................................................................................ 8
2.3 DEFINING YOUR DEFAULT HOME PAGE................................................................................................................ 8
2.4 NAVIGATING ................................................................................................................................................. 8
3 DEFINE YOUR SETTINGS ............................................................................................................................. 9
3.1 MANAGING THE APPLICATION SETTINGS ............................................................................................................. 9
3.2 ACCOUNT SETTINGS........................................................................................................................................ 9
3.2.1 Managing your account settings ....................................................................................................... 9
3.2.2 Account information .......................................................................................................................... 9
3.2.3 My username & password ............................................................................................................... 10
3.3 GENERAL OPTIONS ....................................................................................................................................... 11
3.3.1 Select the default language ............................................................................................................. 11
3.3.2 User preferences .............................................................................................................................. 12
3.3.3 Regional settings ............................................................................................................................. 13
3.3.4 Printer settings................................................................................................................................. 14
3.3.5 Send settings .................................................................................................................................... 15
3.3.6 Time consistency settings ................................................................................................................ 15
3.4 EXPORT SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................................ 17
3.4.1 Managing your exports.................................................................................................................... 17
3.4.2 My exports ....................................................................................................................................... 17
3.4.3 Export settings ................................................................................................................................. 17
3.5 SEARCH SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................................ 18
3.5.1 Managing your search settings ....................................................................................................... 18
3.5.2 Working with your saved searches .................................................................................................. 18
3.5.3 Search settings ................................................................................................................................. 19
3.6 LIST SETTINGS.............................................................................................................................................. 21
3.6.1 Managing list formats and list settings ........................................................................................... 21
3.6.2 My lists ............................................................................................................................................. 21
3.6.3 List settings ...................................................................................................................................... 22
3.7 REPORT SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................................ 22
3.7.1 Managing report formats and report settings................................................................................. 22
3.7.2 My reports ....................................................................................................................................... 22
3.7.3 Report settings ................................................................................................................................. 23
3.8 MANAGING OWNERSHIP SETTINGS .................................................................................................................. 24
3.9 ANALYSIS SETTINGS ...................................................................................................................................... 24
3.10 MY OWN PEER GROUPS ............................................................................................................................. 24
3.10.1 View/change the companies associated to a peer group ............................................................ 25

iii
Amadeus - User Guide

3.10.2 Delete a peer group...................................................................................................................... 25

3.11 CUSTOMISED SECTIONS SETTINGS ................................................................................................................ 25
3.11.1 Managing customised sections settings ...................................................................................... 25
3.11.2 My customised sections ............................................................................................................... 26
3.11.3 Customised sections settings ....................................................................................................... 26
3.12 USER DEFINED VARIABLES SETTINGS ............................................................................................................. 27
3.12.1 Managing user defined variables settings ................................................................................... 27
3.12.2 My user defined variable .............................................................................................................. 27
3.12.3 User defined variable settings ...................................................................................................... 28
3.13 USER EDITED DATA ................................................................................................................................... 28
3.13.1 Managing user edited data .......................................................................................................... 28
3.13.2 Companies with user edited data................................................................................................. 28
3.13.3 User edited data settings ............................................................................................................. 30
3.14 USER IMPORTED FIELDS ............................................................................................................................. 30
3.14.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 30
3.14.2 My imported fields ....................................................................................................................... 32
3.14.3 User imported fields properties .................................................................................................... 34
3.14.4 Prepare the file containing the values of imported fields ............................................................ 35
3.15 OWN CLASSIFICATIONS .............................................................................................................................. 40
3.15.1 My own classifications ................................................................................................................. 41
3.15.2 Create a new own classification ................................................................................................... 41
3.16 MY OWN EXCHANGE RATES ........................................................................................................................ 44
3.16.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 44
3.16.2 Viewing official exchange rates ................................................................................................... 45
3.16.3 Creating a new exchange rate ..................................................................................................... 45
3.16.4 Changing the exchange rate at a specific date ............................................................................ 45
3.16.5 Applying a fixed exchange rate for all periods ............................................................................. 46
4 SEARCH ................................................................................................................................................... 47
4.1 QUICK SEARCH ............................................................................................................................................ 47
4.2 WORKING WITH THE GROUPED VIEW OF SEARCH CRITERIA.................................................................................... 47
4.3 WORKING WITH THE ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SEARCH CRITERIA ............................................................................... 48
4.4 WORKING WITH YOUR SAVED SEARCHES ........................................................................................................... 48
4.4.1 Load a saved search......................................................................................................................... 48
4.4.2 Delete a saved search ...................................................................................................................... 49
4.4.3 Add/remove a saved search to your favourites ............................................................................... 49
4.4.4 Sorting the list of saved searches..................................................................................................... 49
4.5 WORKING WITH YOUR FAVOURITE SEARCHES ..................................................................................................... 49
4.5.1 Loading a search .............................................................................................................................. 49
4.5.2 Organising your favourites .............................................................................................................. 49
4.5.3 Removing a favourite search or directory........................................................................................ 49
4.6 WORKING WITH YOUR SEARCH HISTORY ........................................................................................................... 50
4.7 BATCH SEARCH ............................................................................................................................................ 51
4.7.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 51
4.7.2 Load a file from disk......................................................................................................................... 51
4.7.3 Paste or type your list of companies ................................................................................................ 52
4.7.4 Batch search matching results ......................................................................................................... 52
4.7.5 New batch search ............................................................................................................................ 54
4.7.6 Viewing the company report for a match result .............................................................................. 54
4.7.7 Viewing the matched companies as a list ........................................................................................ 54
4.7.8 Save the matched companies .......................................................................................................... 54
5 MANAGING YOUR SEARCH ...................................................................................................................... 57
5.1 SEARCH STRATEGY TOOLBOX .......................................................................................................................... 57
5.1.1 Working with search steps............................................................................................................... 57
5.1.2 Search strategy toolbar ................................................................................................................... 57
5.2 SAVE A SEARCH............................................................................................................................................ 58

iv
 Table Of Contents

5.2.1 Procedure ......................................................................................................................................... 58

5.2.2 Other functions ................................................................................................................................ 58
5.3 BOOLEAN SEARCHING ................................................................................................................................... 59
5.4 BOOLEAN OPERATORS................................................................................................................................... 59
5.5 BOOLEAN SEARCH PRIORITY ........................................................................................................................... 61
5.5.1 Generic example .............................................................................................................................. 61
6 VIEWING SEARCH RESULTS ...................................................................................................................... 63
6.1 LIST OF RESULTS........................................................................................................................................... 63
6.1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 63
6.1.2 Working with a list of companies .................................................................................................... 63
6.1.3 List toolbar ....................................................................................................................................... 64
6.1.4 List side menu .................................................................................................................................. 65
6.2 SEARCH STRATEGY TOOLBOX .......................................................................................................................... 65
6.2.1 Working with search steps............................................................................................................... 66
6.2.2 Search strategy toolbar ................................................................................................................... 66
6.3 DEFINE THE DEFAULT PEER GROUP................................................................................................................... 66
6.4 MARKING COMPANIES FROM THE LIST OF RESULTS.............................................................................................. 67
6.5 LIST FORMATS ............................................................................................................................................. 68
6.5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 68
6.5.2 Create a new list format .................................................................................................................. 68
6.5.3 Modify a list format ......................................................................................................................... 69
6.5.4 Save a list format ............................................................................................................................. 69
6.5.5 Load a previously saved or predefined list ....................................................................................... 69
6.5.6 Delete a previously saved list format ............................................................................................... 70
6.5.7 Define the default list format .......................................................................................................... 70
6.6 FREE AND CHEAP LIST VARIABLES ..................................................................................................................... 70
6.6.1 Free variables ................................................................................................................................... 70
6.6.2 Cheap variables - by group .............................................................................................................. 71
7 COMPANY REPORTS ................................................................................................................................ 73
7.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................................. 73
7.2 REPORT SECTIONS ........................................................................................................................................ 73
7.2.1 Report section toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 74
7.3 REPORT TOOLBAR ........................................................................................................................................ 74
7.4 REPORT LATERAL MENU ................................................................................................................................ 75
7.4.1 Back to the list of results .................................................................................................................. 75
7.4.2 Search .............................................................................................................................................. 75
7.4.3 Define the format ............................................................................................................................ 75
7.4.4 Display a specific section ................................................................................................................. 75
7.5 DEFINE THE DEFAULT PEER GROUP................................................................................................................... 76
7.6 REPORT FORMATS ........................................................................................................................................ 77
7.6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 77
7.6.2 Create a new report format ............................................................................................................. 77
7.6.3 Modify a report format .................................................................................................................... 78
7.6.4 Save a report format........................................................................................................................ 78
7.6.5 Load a previously saved or predefined report ................................................................................. 78
7.6.6 Delete a previously saved report format ......................................................................................... 79
7.6.7 Define the default report ................................................................................................................. 79
7.6.8 Predefined reports ........................................................................................................................... 79
7.7 REPORT SECTION DISPLAY OPTIONS .................................................................................................................. 80
7.7.1 Layout options for tabular data ....................................................................................................... 80
7.7.2 Display options for options for stock data sections ......................................................................... 82
7.7.3 Display options for ownership sections............................................................................................ 83
7.7.4 Display options for graphs ............................................................................................................... 83
7.7.5 Elements of a peer report ................................................................................................................ 84
7.8 CUSTOMISED SECTIONS ............................................................................................................................... 105

v
Amadeus - User Guide

7.8.1 Create/modify a customised section ............................................................................................. 105

7.8.2 User defined variables ................................................................................................................... 109
7.8.3 Multiple data items........................................................................................................................ 114
7.9 MODIFY DATA OF A COMPANY ...................................................................................................................... 114
7.9.1 Edit a specific section ..................................................................................................................... 115
7.9.2 Update data ................................................................................................................................... 116
8 ANALYSES .............................................................................................................................................. 119
8.1 SEGMENTATION......................................................................................................................................... 119
8.1.1 Accessing the segmentation analysis ............................................................................................ 119
8.1.2 Segmentation wizard ..................................................................................................................... 120
8.1.3 Working with the results of a segmentation analysis .................................................................... 127
8.1.4 Display options............................................................................................................................... 131
8.2 PEER ANALYSIS .......................................................................................................................................... 139
8.2.1 Accessing the peer analysis ........................................................................................................... 140
8.2.2 Peer analysis wizard ...................................................................................................................... 140
8.2.3 Working with the results of a peer analysis ................................................................................... 145
8.2.4 Display options............................................................................................................................... 157
8.3 AGGREGATION .......................................................................................................................................... 175
8.3.1 Accessing the aggregation analysis ............................................................................................... 175
8.3.2 Aggregation wizard ....................................................................................................................... 176
8.3.3 Working with the results of an aggregation .................................................................................. 180
8.3.4 Display options............................................................................................................................... 186
8.4 STATISTICAL DISTRIBUTION........................................................................................................................... 197
8.4.1 Accessing the distribution analysis ................................................................................................ 198
8.4.2 Distribution wizard ........................................................................................................................ 198
8.4.3 Working with the results of a distribution analysis ....................................................................... 203
8.4.4 Display options............................................................................................................................... 207
8.5 CONCENTRATION ANALYSIS .......................................................................................................................... 213
8.5.1 Accessing the concentration analyses ........................................................................................... 214
8.5.2 Concentration wizard..................................................................................................................... 215
8.5.3 Working with the results of a concentration analysis.................................................................... 219
8.5.4 Display options............................................................................................................................... 225
8.6 LINEAR REGRESSION ................................................................................................................................... 234
8.6.1 Accessing the Linear regression analysis ....................................................................................... 235
8.6.2 Linear regression wizard ................................................................................................................ 236
8.6.3 Working with the results of a linear regression ............................................................................. 240
8.6.4 Display options............................................................................................................................... 244
9 MAPS .................................................................................................................................................... 251
9.1 WORKING WITH MAPS ................................................................................................................................ 251
9.1.1 Level of display............................................................................................................................... 251
9.1.2 Zooming in/out of the map ............................................................................................................ 251
9.1.3 Navigating within the map ............................................................................................................ 251
9.2 CARTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS ............................................................................................................................ 252
9.2.1 Accessing the cartographic analysis .............................................................................................. 252
9.2.2 Cartographic analysis wizard ......................................................................................................... 253
9.2.3 Working with the results of a cartographic analysis ..................................................................... 256
9.2.4 Display options............................................................................................................................... 259
10 ALERTS ............................................................................................................................................... 267
10.1 ALERTS - OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................ 267
10.1.1 Entity specific alerts ................................................................................................................... 267
10.1.2 Global alerts ............................................................................................................................... 267
10.2 CREATING AND CONFIGURING ALERTS ......................................................................................................... 267
10.3 LIST OF ALERTS....................................................................................................................................... 268
10.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 268

vi
 Table Of Contents

10.3.2 Working with the list of alerts .................................................................................................... 268

10.4 ALERTS SETTINGS.................................................................................................................................... 269
10.5 ADDRESS BOOK ...................................................................................................................................... 269
10.6 PLACE ALERTS ON HOLD ........................................................................................................................... 270
11 EXPORTING ........................................................................................................................................ 271
11.1 WORKING WITH THE EXPORT SYSTEM ......................................................................................................... 271
11.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 271
11.1.2 Limitations.................................................................................................................................. 271
11.2 EXPORT FORMATS .................................................................................................................................. 272
11.2.1 Which export format is more appropriate? ............................................................................... 272
11.3 DOWNLOADING LIMITATIONS ................................................................................................................... 273
11.3.1 Germany ..................................................................................................................................... 273
11.3.2 Sweden/Denmark ....................................................................................................................... 273
11.3.3 Spain and Portugal ..................................................................................................................... 273
11.3.4 France......................................................................................................................................... 274
11.4 EXPORTING FROM THE LIST OF RESULTS....................................................................................................... 274
11.4.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 274
11.4.2 Procedure ................................................................................................................................... 275
11.5 EXPORTING FROM A REPORT ..................................................................................................................... 276
11.5.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 277
11.5.2 Basic export ................................................................................................................................ 277
12 USER IMPORTED FIELDS ..................................................................................................................... 279
12.1 USER IMPORTED FIELDS ........................................................................................................................... 279
12.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 279
12.1.2 Definition .................................................................................................................................... 279
12.1.3 Working with user imported fields ............................................................................................ 279
12.2 MY IMPORTED FIELDS.............................................................................................................................. 280
12.2.1 Importing new fields .................................................................................................................. 281
12.2.2 Manage your imported fields ..................................................................................................... 282
12.3 USER IMPORTED FIELDS PROPERTIES ........................................................................................................... 283
12.3.1 Choose the value type ................................................................................................................ 283
12.3.2 Choose the value properties ....................................................................................................... 284
12.4 PREPARE THE FILE CONTAINING THE VALUES OF IMPORTED FIELDS .................................................................... 284
12.4.1 Valid file types ............................................................................................................................ 284
12.4.2 Valid file layouts (not applicable for segments) ......................................................................... 284
12.4.3 Valid file layouts (for fields of type segment only) ..................................................................... 287
13 USER EDITED DATA ............................................................................................................................ 289
13.1 USER EDITED DATA ................................................................................................................................. 289
13.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 289
13.1.2 Definition .................................................................................................................................... 289
13.1.3 Report modes ............................................................................................................................. 289
13.2 CREATE A NEW COMPANY ........................................................................................................................ 290
13.3 MODIFY DATA OF A COMPANY .................................................................................................................. 291
13.3.1 Edit a specific section ................................................................................................................. 291
13.3.2 Update data ............................................................................................................................... 293
14 USER DEFINED VARIABLES ................................................................................................................. 295
14.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................ 295
14.2 DEFINE THE FORMULA ............................................................................................................................. 296
14.2.1 Creating simple variables ........................................................................................................... 296
14.2.2 Creating variables based on averages ....................................................................................... 296
14.2.3 Creating conditional variables ................................................................................................... 296
14.2.4 Creating time based variables .................................................................................................... 298
14.2.5 Concatenating variables............................................................................................................. 299

vii
Amadeus - User Guide

14.3 DEFINE THE PROPERTIES OF A VARIABLE ...................................................................................................... 299

15 OWN CLASSIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................................... 301
15.1 OWN CLASSIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................................ 301
15.2 CREATE A NEW OWN CLASSIFICATION ......................................................................................................... 301
15.2.1 Preparing the own classification table ....................................................................................... 301
15.2.2 Uploading the own classification ............................................................................................... 303
16 ADDITIONAL MODULES ...................................................................................................................... 305
16.1 INDUSTRY RESEARCH ............................................................................................................................... 305
16.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 305
16.1.2 Coverage .................................................................................................................................... 306
16.1.3 Database cross-referencing........................................................................................................ 306
16.1.4 Database update process ........................................................................................................... 306
16.1.5 Documents library ...................................................................................................................... 306
16.1.6 Market values and trends analysis ............................................................................................. 314
16.2 PATENTS DATABASE................................................................................................................................ 332
16.2.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................ 332
16.2.2 Search......................................................................................................................................... 335
17 INDEX ................................................................................................................................................. 347
18 ................................................................................................................................................................. 347

viii
1 Introduction
1.1 Overview

Amadeus contains comprehensive information on millions of companies across Europe. You can use
it to research individual companies, search for companies with specific profiles and for analysis.

1.1.1 What information does Amadeus contain?

• Company information for both Western and Eastern Europe, with a focus on private
company information

• Company financials in a standard format so you can compare companies across borders

• Financial strength indicators

• Directors

• Images of report and accounts for listed companies

• Stock prices for listed companies

• Detailed corporate structures

• Market research

• Business and company-related news

• M&A deals and rumours

• Maps and cartographic analysis

1.2 How it helps you

Amadeus is easy to use and helps you navigate company information quickly and easily.

• Search by hundreds of criteria – you can search by trends and over multiple years

• Create analysis across borders using our standard financial template

• Do a detailed financial analysis on a company – you can also include our complementary
information including M&A deals and rumours, news and market research

• Refer to original filings using our library of scanned images

• Illustrate financials with our easy-to create graphs

• Get a quick view of a company’s financial strength

• See where companies are distributed geographically using the map analysis

• Monitor companies using our alert system

• Look at a company’s corporate structure in a tree diagram and find all companies with the
same parent

• Create and analyse peer groups

• Know more about your leads and prospects, enrich your CRM system, create prospect lists
and develop your accounts

1.3 Coverage

Amadeus contains information for the following countries: Albania, Austria, Belarus, Belgium,
Bosnia-Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France,
Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Kosovo, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania,
Luxembourg, Rep. of Macedonia, Malta, Rep. of Moldova, Monaco, Montenegro, Netherlands,

1
Amadeus - User Guide

Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Russian Federation, Serbia, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain,
Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey, Ukraine, United Kingdom.

1.4 Software overview

Over 100 search criteria can be combined using Boolean logic to clearly identify the company set
on which information will be displayed (reports) or that will be used for analysis (statistical
analysis, peer reports, segmentations, etc.).
Data than can be displayed, exported, sent by emais or printed in customised lists or reports
formats.

1.5 System Requirements

1.5.1 Hardware
• PC with CPU with frequency of 1 GHz or higher (Pentium/Celeron category
K6/Athlon/Duron/XP or compatible processor)

• 1 Gb of RAM

• SVGA video card and monitor of minimal resolution 1024 ×768 pixels.

1.5.2 Software
• Microsoft Windows Vista, 7 or higher

• Internet Explorer 9 or higher

• Microsoft .Net Framework 2 SP2 or higher

1.6 Frequently asked questions

Where is the data collected?

The data is collected by the Information Providers (IPs) of Amadeus at each national official
public body in charge of collecting the annual accounts in its country They are always the official
filed and audited accounts.
In some East-European countries where the data is difficult to get from a central source, IPs
might collect it directly from the companies.
How is the data normalised?
The data is normalised in two ways :
a. Standard presentation of the accounts :BvD has done a detailed analysis of the most
common formats of accounts used in Europe, either compulsory formats (like in France
or in Belgium) or suggested formats (UK, Netherlands, Germany). The result of this
analysis is BvD's standard format. This is a balance between a very detailed format that
could have lots of gaps if information is not filed, and a very brief format with not
enough information.
b. Standard industry codification :
As most IPs use different industry classifications, BvD has manually allocated each
company a CSO code (derived from the UK Statistical Office SIC codes). This avoids
errors that arise when codes are automatically translated or cross-referenced.
Are the notes to the accounts available?

The notes are used to complete the Amadeus format of accounts. They are not separated out or
added as another section of information on Amadeus.
Why does Amadeus not cover financial institutions and insurance companies?
Because these two types of organisations have formats of accounts which are completely
different from other companies and are not compatible with the format of accounts on Amadeus.

2
 Introduction

BvD has two products worldwide coverage on these institutions :

• Bankscope for Banks and Financial Institutions

• ISIS for Insurance Companies.

How does BvD enrich the ownership data?
BvD merges the ownership data it receives from all its IPs into one big database. This
information is then analysed to identify each cross-border holding/subsidiary link by the national
identification number of the companies involved.

BvD also enriches this database by the data it collects directly from the companies (e.g. annual
reports listing shareholders and subsidiaries, private communications i.e. questionnaires sent to
the companies) or from any other available source.
Does Amadeus list all owners and subsidiaries of a company?
We aim to show complete ownership information on Amadeus but in some cases e.g. listed
companies it is impossible.
We try also to collect complete information on all subsidiaries which are present in the Amadeus
database (a subsidiary which does not satisfy the size criteria to be on Amadeus will not be
listed).

What are the consolidation codes?

The consolidation codes indicate for each statement its type :

• C: Consolidated

• U: Unconsolidated

• LF: Limited financials

• NA: No financials
and for the consolidated and unconsolidated statements whether the company's unconsolidated
or consolidated companion statement is present or not :

• 1: there is no companion statement

• 2: there is a companion statement in the database

Thus e.g. C2 means : this is a consolidated statement and the unconsolidated statement of that
company is also available in the database.

What is the difference between Public and Quoted?

"Public" is a legal definition of the status of company used in the UK and Ireland. On Amadeus,
this indicates the legal form of a company rather than a company's relationship to a Stock
Exchange. "Quoted" companies are those companies listed on a Stock Exchange. There are
about 6,200 such companies on Amadeus.
Have the NAICS codes replaced the US SIC codes?
No. They are both are now available on Amadeus.
What are the plans to add new countries?
There are no short term plans to extend the coverage as it is difficult to source reliable and
detailed information in other countries.
What is the difference between Operating Revenue/Turnover and Sales?
The Sales figure includes all the revenue a company gets from selling its products to its clients.
The Operating Revenue/Turnover figure includes Sales plus all other revenue linked to the
normal operations of the company (e.g. stock variation, subsidies in some countries).
In most cases the figure of Sales is very close to the figure of Operating Revenue/Turnover.

Is Operating Profit shown after Depreciation?

3
Amadeus - User Guide

Yes, in almost all cases.

Are Fixed Assets shown net of Depreciation?
Yes.
Why are there no interim statements?
Because only listed companies make interim statements available i.e. 3% of the companies in
Amadeus.
Amadeus concentrates on private companies.
We publish other products with much more detailed information including interim reports about
listed companies (e.g. Bankscope, Osiris).
Why are there gaps in some reports?
There are gaps in reports when the data is not made available by the companies (e.g. detailed
accounts for many German companies, turnover for smaller British companies) either in
accordance with the national laws or in violation with the national laws.

Note : Germany is a special case as accounts are only made available for a limited number
of 15,000 companies (of which there are many small companies). Other German companies do
not file their accounts.
Do the values for Operating Revenue/ Turnover published in Amadeus include the excise taxes for
tobacco, petroleum or alcoholic beverages companies?
There is no fixed rule for how companies deal with this issue. Amadeus provides the figures as
they appear in a company's officially filed accounts; harmonizing them would be impossible, so
some country-to-country differences remain.
In general, Amadeus includes the gross value for Operating Revenue/ Turnover, including excise
taxes. For the United Kingdom and The Netherlands, however, Operating Revenue/ Turnover is
provided net of excise taxes.
More detailed information is available for listed companies on Osiris.
Why are details of Operating Expenses (a.o. Cost of Goods sold vs. Material Costs) not comparable
between countries on Amadeus?
Based on difference of history and philosophy in accounting practices in Europe, there are
mainly two types of reporting operating costs: by type of operations or by type of expenses.

• By type of operations: All costs are reported based on their link to the production
process (costs necessary for the production + costs related to the operations but not the
production such as administrative costs)

• By type of expenses: All costs, including depreciation, are reported based on the nature
of the expense (material/goods, services, personnel, etc.)
Hence costs of goods sold is not equal as material costs on BvD format because "Cost of Goods
sold" includes all costs directly related to the production process and their depreciation in the
‘by type of operations’ P/L structure while the "Material costs" include all purchases of the
company (raw materials but also goods sold or distributed) in the ‘by type of expenses’ PL
structure.
Amadeus displays by default the type of operation, but puts details of type of expenses in Memo
Lines when available.
Do the sales figures represent external sales, internal sales or both?
Sisters or intragroup companies are treated as external companies at the local level.
Only the consolidated figures of the mother company leverage the intragroup sales after having
applied consolidation rules (revenues/costs).

4
2 Getting started
2.1 Home page
2.1.1 Overview
Amadeus's home page is the first screen that you access when accessing the application. It allows
access to a variety of search options to query the database, load previously saved or unsaved
searches, and to run a series of analyses on the currently selected companies.
Home page

At the top of the screen is displayed Amadeus's toolbar. This toolbar is not specific to any screen or
module and is always available. It allows you to run a quick one-step search and access a variety
of core functions. See Product toolbar for more details.

The home page is composed of three main elements:

• The advanced search toolbox

• The search side menu

• The search strategy toolbox

2.1.2 Advanced search toolbox

The advanced search options provide you with multiple search criteria for you to find and retrieve
companies accurately.
Advanced search

5
Amadeus - User Guide

The advanced search is composed of tabs and subtabs.

2.1.2.1 Search tab
On the Search tab you can access all the available search criteria. The Search tab has two
subtabs:

• Grouped view: unless you specify otherwise (see Defining your default home page
for more details) the Grouped view of search criteria is displayed. This subtab
organises the available search criteria by logical category. See Working with the
grouped view of search criteria for more details.

• Alphabetical list: the alphabetical list subtab presents all the available search
criteria in an alphabetical list. See Working with the alphabetical list of search
criteria for more details.
In addition to these two subtabs, a text box is available enabling you to find a criterion:

1. Enter into the text box one or more words included in your required search criterion.
2. As you type, a look-up menu of criteria matching the current text is displayed below
the text box.
3. Click in the menu to select the criterion you want to use.

2.1.2.2 Saved searches tab

The Saved searches tab lists all your previously saved search strategies and company sets.
From this tab you can load a previously saved search, delete a previously saved search or
add/remove a saved search to your favourites.

See Working with your saved searches for more details.

2.1.2.3 Favourites tab

The Favourites tab lists all the saved searches that you added as favourites. You can create
directories and subdirectories in which to organise favourite searches.
See Working with your favourite searches for more details.
2.1.2.4 History tab

The History tab lists all the searches you have run previously, regardless of whether or not
you saved them. Your history is organised by time period so you can easily access a search
you ran today, yesterday, two days ago, etc. You can load an unsaved search by clicking it
from this screen.
See Working with your search history for more details.

2.1.3 Search side menu

The search side menu contains a variety of links and menus allowing you to view the list of results,
discard and create a new search or run a series of analyses on the currently selected companies.

6
 Getting started

Search side menu

To maximize your working space, click the Hide button to hide the side menu.
The other options are as follows:

Option Action
Go to list of results: View the list of results.
New search: Discard your current search and start a new search.
Modify current search: Nothing.
Search for multiple companies by name and location in one easy
Batch search:
step.
Segmentation: Run a segmentation analysis on the currently selected companies .
Peer analysis: Run a peer analysis on the currently selected companies .
Aggregation: Run an aggregation analysis on the currently selected companies .
Concentration
Run a concentration analysis on the currently selected companies .
analysis:
Statistical Run a statistical distribution analysis on the currently selected
distribution: companies.
Run a linear regression analysis on the currently selected
Linear regression:
companies .

2.1.4 Search strategy toolbox

The search strategy toolbox lists all the search steps that you specified for the current search and
allows you to: modify a search step, save a search, delete one or all search steps, and ignore a
search step. More importantly, if you have more than one search step, it allows you to build
complex search strategies using Boolean operators.
See Search strategy toolbox for more details.

Notes:
• The search strategy toolbox is only displayed if you specified at least one search step.
• You can access this Home page at any time by clicking the navigation breadcrumbs
displayed at the top left of any screen.
• By default you are presented with the grouped view of search criteria, but your default
Home page may have been customised. See Defining your default home page for more
details.

7
Amadeus - User Guide

2.2 Product toolbar

At the top of any screen available in Amadeus are features and options that are accessible at any
time when you are working.

• The text box allows you to run a quick one-step search according to a variety of criteria.
See Quick search for more details.

• To the right of the text box are a number of buttons and menus as explained below:

Button /
Function
Menu item
Alerts Hover over this option to expand the alerts menu, which allows you to
view and manage your list of alerts, to define your alert settings
and to manage your list of recipients through the address book.
Settings Click this button to access your user settings to fine-tune your
preferences and manage your saved searches, layouts, reports, etc.
Help Hover over this option to expand the help menu, which allows you to
access the user documentation, a list of tips of the day, and coverage
tables, and to download the Web Add-in, etc.
Contact us Click this button to access a screen through which you can provide
product feedback and submit technical questions to BvD.
Log out Click this to end your current session and log out of Amadeus.

2.3 Defining your default home page

By default, when you access Amadeus's Home page you are presented with the grouped view of
search criteria. You can change the default Home page to any of the following:

• The alphabetical list of search criteria

• Your saved searches

• Your favourites

• Your search history

To do so, go to the screen you want to set as your default Home page and select the Default
home page check box. Then, each time you access the Home page, you are presented with that
tab.

2.4 Navigating

Navigation between the different screens and modules is very easy and intuitive.
In addition to the clearly labelled buttons and links, the following navigational features are
available:

• At the top-left of each page, breadcrumbs are displayed allowing you to return to any of
the operations you performed to reach the current page. Click a breadcrumb to go to the
corresponding page (e.g. click Home to return to the home page).

• You can freely use your browser's Back button to return to the previous screen (e.g. to
modify your search criteria when you are viewing the list of search results).

8
3 Define your settings
3.1 Managing the application settings

Access: Hover over the Settings menu from the product toolbar to unfold the different setting
categories.

Amadeus's settings module allows you to:

• Configure and fine-tune general application and module-specific settings

• Access and manage previously saved data.

The settings are organised in categories, displayed in the side menu:

• Account
• General options
• Exports
• Searches
• Lists
• Reports
• Ownership
• Analysis
• Own Peer Groups
• Customised sections
• User defined variables
• User edited data
• User imported fields
• PowerPoint templates
• Own classifications
• Own Exchange Rates

3.2 Account settings

3.2.1 Managing your account settings
In the Account category in Amadeus settings, you can:

• View your account information

• Change your user name and password

For each option, when you are finished click the Finish button.

3.2.2 Account information

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the different setting
categories.
2. Hover over the Account submenu item.
3. Select Account information.

Account information dialog

9
Amadeus - User Guide

The account information dialog displays the following information:

• The number of users currently connected to the applications

• Your username

• Your group

• Your account

• The server to which you are connected

Notes:
• To change your username or password go to My username & password.
• If you previously stored your password, a message and a link is displayed allowing you to
remove it.
Storing your password allows you to automatically log in to Amadeus without having to
specify your user name and password at the log in screen.

3.2.3 My username & password

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the different setting
categories.
2. Hover over the Account submenu item.
3. Select My username & password.

The User name & password dialog allows to change the user name and password used to log in to
Amadeus.

Username & password dialog

• Select the required options as described below and click the Finish button

• You can click the Cancel changes link before you click Finish if you do not want current
changes to be applied

1. Enter your current password into the text box labelled Your current password is.
2. Optionally, enter a new username into the text box labelled Your new username is.
3. Enter your new password into the text box labelled Your new password is.
4. Confirm your new password in the text box labelled Retype our new password.

10
 Define your settings

3.3 General options

The general options settings allow you to define your:

• Default language

• User preferences

• Regional settings

• Printer settings

• Send settings

• Time consistency settings

For each subcategory of the general options:

• Click the Finish button to apply your settings.

• Revert to the default settings by clicking the Revert to default settings link.

3.3.1 Select the default language

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu from the product toolbar to unfold the different setting
categories.
2. Hover over the General Options submenu item.
3. Select Language.

The Language dialog allows you to define the default language for working.
To do so:

• Select the option button corresponding to the desired language and click the Finish button

• You can click the Cancel changes link before you click Finish if you do not want the
change to be applied

• You can also revert to the default language by clicking the Revert to default settings link

Note: You can also change the default language in the log in page of Amadeus.

11
Amadeus - User Guide

3.3.2 User preferences

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the different setting
categories.
2. Hover over the General options submenu item.
3. Select User preferences.

The user preference settings allow you to personalise Amadeus using a variety of options.
User preference settings dialog

• Select the required options as described below and click the Finish button

• You can click the Cancel changes link before you click Finish if you do not want current
changes to be applied

• You can also revert to the default settings by clicking the Revert to default settings link
3.3.2.1 Default currency

The currency you choose in this option will be the default currency used for searches, lists of
results, reports and analyses. Note that you have the option to change the currency in each of the
modules independently. For example in reports, you can modify the display options of a report
section containing financial items and choose the currency in which to display financial values.
3.3.2.2 When companies are in a list, display
Allows you to choose display:

• inactive companies in grey

• publicly listed companies in green

• branch locations in brown (availability depends on product)

• companies with edited data in light blue

3.3.2.3 Default alphabet option for results and analysis
This option allows you to choose to display company names, addresses, etc using local languages
(e.g. Cyrillic) or the internationally formatted counterpart name when it is available.
3.3.2.4 Side bar options
Choose if you want to show or hide the side menu, or display it to the left or the right of the
screen.

12
 Define your settings

3.3.2.5 Show the warning pop-up box when

• Saving under an existing name:

If you save a search, list format, report format, report layout or analysis using an existing
name, you overwrite it and hence lose the previously saved file. Select this option to force
a pop-up warning box to alert you that you are about to overwrite a pre-existing file.

• A file has been saved on to the server or a request has been performed:
When this option is selected, a pop-up warning box will be displayed each time you save a
search, list format, report format, report layout or analysis.

• Running a quick search:

When you run a quick search after having previously run at least one search step or loaded
a search, your current results are lost. Select this option to display a pop-up warning
message each time you run a quick search.

• Credits are needed:

Select this option to display a warning pop-up message each time you are about to
consume a credit.

• Searching on the Internet from a company report:

Select this option to display the Searching the Internet pop-up window to choose the
required search engine and to enter keywords to assist the search for the current company
or contact. If this option is cleared the options will default from the previous search.

3.3.3 Regional settings

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the different setting
categories.
2. Hover over the General options submenu item.
3. Select Regional settings.

The regional settings allow you to select:

• The time zone in which you are located

• The date format you want to use for input

• The date format you want to use for display

• The character used to separate multiples of a thousand in large numbers

• The character used to separate the whole and fractional parts of a decimal number
Regional settings dialog

• Select the required options as described above and click the Finish button

• You can click the Cancel changes link before you click Finish if you do not want current
changes to be applied

• You can also revert to the default settings by clicking the Revert to default settings link

Note: The thousand and decimal separators cannot be the same.

13
Amadeus - User Guide

3.3.4 Printer settings

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the General options submenu item.
3. Select Printer settings.

The printer settings allow you to define the settings you wish to apply hen printing out lists, reports
and results of analyses.
Printer settings dialog

• Select the required options as described below and click the Finish button

• You can click the Cancel changes link before you click Finish if you do not want current
changes to be applied

• You can also revert to the default settings by clicking the Revert to default settings link
3.3.4.1 Paper size and orientation

• Paper size: choose from the drop-down list of common paper sizes: A4, A3 or Letter

• Orientation: choose an option button to print in Portrait or Landscape format

Note: Ensure that the printer settings on your computer match the printer settings you select
above.
3.3.4.2 Header and footer
Use the Header and Footer drop-down menus to select one of the predefined headers and
footers.
You can also create your own custom headers and footers by clicking the Customise link. See
Customise headers and footers for more information.

Note: Ensure that the printer settings on your computer match the printer settings you select
above.
3.3.4.3 Include the search summary when exporting/printing
Select this option to always include the search summary (i.e. the list of search steps) used when
printing or exporting search results.

3.3.4.4 Show the print settings dialog before printing

Select this option to always show the printer settings dialog when printing list of results, reports or
results of analyses. If you clear this option, the dialog is not displayed and the default print settings
will always be applied.

14
 Define your settings

3.3.5 Send settings

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the different setting
categories.
2. Hover over the General options submenu item.
3. Select Send settings.

The send settings options allow you to choose how exported files are to be sent by email when
using the send function from lists, reports or analyses results.
Send settings dialog

• Select the required options as described below and click the Finish button

• You can click the Cancel changes link before you click Finish if you do not want current
changes to be applied

• You can also revert to the default settings by clicking the Revert to default settings link
Two options are available:

• A link to the exported document:

Choose this option to include a link to the exported document in the body of your email.
Your recipients will need to click the link to download and view the exported file from the
BvD servers.
This option has the advantage of not cluttering recipients' mailboxes.

• The exported document as an attached file only if the file does not exceed the
maximum size of (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10) MB:
Choose this option to send the exported document as an attachment to the email as long
as it does not exceed the maximum size you select from the drop-down list. If the
document you send is over the threshold, the body of your email will include a link to the
document.

Note: Recipients have seven days to download the exported document from the time the
document is was created.

3.3.6 Time consistency settings

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the General options submenu item.
3. Select Time consistency settings.

The time consistency settings allow you to modify the cut-off date (account closing date) you wish
to consider when displaying yearly values in lists, peer reports and statistical analyses.
Time consistency settings dialog

• Select the required options as described below and click the Finish button

15
Amadeus - User Guide

• You can click the Cancel changes link before you click Finish if you do not want current
changes to be applied

• You can also revert to the default settings by clicking the Revert to default settings link
You can select the day and month you want to consider.
The fiscal year cutoff date option (time consistency) determines to which year a set of accounts is
seen and this might thus influence the search result.
Here’s an example:

Or another example:
The 31/12/2010 accounts of a company will be considered as 2010 with cut off dates “1231” and
“0331”, but will be considered as 2011 with cut off date “1130” for instance.
The 31/03/2011 accounts of a company will be considered as 2011 with cut off dates “1231” and
“1130”, but will be considered as 2010 with cut off date “0331” for instance.

16
 Define your settings

3.4 Export settings

3.4.1 Managing your exports
In the Exports category in Amadeus settings, you can:

• View and manage active exports

• Define you export settings

For each option, when you are finished click the Finish button.

3.4.2 My exports

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Exports submenu item.
3. Select My exports.

You can export a substantial amount of data from any module available on Amadeus. My exports
allows you to view the progress of the export requests, and to download or delete any export file
that has been generated within the last seven days (exported documents are automatically deleted
from the BvD servers after seven days).

My exports dialog

• To download an exported document, click the name of the export

• To delete an export, click the icon corresponding to the export you want to delete

• To delete all exports, click displayed in the column header.

3.4.3 Export settings

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Exports submenu item.
3. Select Exports.

Export settings dialog

• Select the required options as described below and click the Finish button

17
Amadeus - User Guide

• You can click the Cancel changes link before you click Finish if you do not want current
changes to be applied

• You can also revert to the default settings by clicking the Revert to default settings link

The export settings allow you to:

• Choose to include the search summary when exporting.

• Choose how to process data in the export if the item is not available for a company (display
'n.a.' or leave field blank).

• Define the file names used for report exports (use the standard naming format, or use a
format based on the name or identifier you select from the drop-down list)

3.5 Search settings

3.5.1 Managing your search settings
In the Searches category in Amadeus settings, you can:

• View and manage previously saved searches

• Define your search settings

For each option, when you are finished click the Finish button.

3.5.2 Working with your saved searches

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Searches submenu item.
3. Select My searches.

Under the Saved searches tab/My search dialog are listed all your previously saved searches. From
this screen you can load a previously saved search, delete a previously saved search or
add/remove a saved search to your favourites.

Saved searches

Your saved searches are presented with the following columns of information:

• Name - this is the name you gave when saving the search.

• Date - this is the date and time when you saved your search.

• Type - two type of saved searches are available: Search strategy and Identifiers.
3.5.2.1 Load a saved search
To load a search, click the name of the saved search. The search will be launched immediately and
the list of results is displayed.

18
 Define your settings

You can also load a search (based identifiers or search strategy) saved on a local or networked disk
by clicking the Load from disk button. The following dialog is displayed allowing you to choose a
file name to load.

• A previously saved search strategy file has the extension .strategy.

• The file extension of a previously saved search based on ID number depends in the ID
number used (e.g. a file saved with BvD ID numbers has the file extension .bvd). See
uploading companies based on a list ID numbers for more details.
3.5.2.2 Delete a saved search

• To delete a previously saved search click the icon corresponding to the search you want
to delete.

• To delete all your previously saved searches click the icon displayed in the column
header.
3.5.2.3 Add/remove a saved search to your favourites

• To add a saved search to your favourites, click the corresponding to the search you
want to add.

• To remove a saved search that you previously added to your favourites, click the
corresponding to the search you want to remove.
3.5.2.4 Sorting the list of saved searches
By default, your saved searches are sorted by name in alphabetical order (from A to Z). The arrows
displayed in the column headers indicate how the list is sorted:

• : indicates the list is sorted by that column in ascending order

• : indicates the list is sorted by that column in descending order

To sort the list of saved searches by a different column or to change the sort order, click the
arrows in the corresponding column header.

3.5.3 Search settings

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Searches submenu item.
3. Select Settings.

The search settings allow you to define the default settings you want to apply when running
searches in Amadeus.

19
Amadeus - User Guide

Search settings dialog

• Select the required options as described below and click the Finish button

• You can click the Cancel changes link before you click Finish if you do not want current
changes to be applied

• You can also revert to the default settings by clicking the Revert to default settings link
3.5.3.1 Type of accounts to consider by default in searches and results
The options in this section allow you to define the default type of account/statement to consider
when searching and displaying results.

3.5.3.2 Start all search with search for active companies

Select this option to only include active companies in your search results. Additional options may
be available depending on the product you are working with. Note that this filter is not applied to
the following:

• advanced and quick search by company name

• advanced and quick search by any company ID

• search by legal status

• loading a search

• advanced search ‘all companies’

3.5.3.3 Exclude companies from financial searches

The options in this section allow you to exclude companies from financial searches according to the
availability of their financial data and/or the type of company.
3.5.3.4 Load a search when starting up Amadeus
This option allows you to load a default search each time you start a new session in Amadeus.
When you select this option a pop-up dialog is displayed allowing you to select a previously saved
search to load by default.

20
 Define your settings

You can modify the default search by clicking the Modify link.
3.5.3.5 Maximum number of records to display per page in company search
You can choose to display 15, 25, 50 or 100 records per page in the company search.
3.5.3.6 Maximum number of values of a search criterion displayed in the search
summary window
Use the drop-down list to choose the maximum number of values for each search step you want to
display in the search summary. For example, if you run a search by company name and select 10
companies in a single search step and choose the value 5 in this option, only five values will be
displayed in that search step in the search summary.
3.5.3.7 Display companies belonging to a company size category when doing a search
by company name
The options in this section allow you to choose the company size category you want to consider
when searching by company name. This allows users with limited access to see what companies,
belonging to a size category not included in their subscription, match their search criteria. While
the companies will be returned, companies not covered in a user's subscription will not be
selectable for inclusion in the list of results.

3.6 List settings

3.6.1 Managing list formats and list settings
In the Lists category in Amadeus settings, you can:

• View and manage previously saved list formats

• Define your lists settings

For each option, when you are finished click on the Finish button.

3.6.2 My lists

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Lists submenu item.
3. Select My lists.

The My lists dialog lists all available predefined and previously saved list formats.
My lists dialog

From this screen you can:

• Edit a list format: click the name of the list format you want to edit to go to the list
format screen.

• Delete a previously saved list format: click the icon corresponding to the list format
you want to delete.

• Delete all previously saved list formats: click the icon displayed in the column
header.

21
Amadeus - User Guide

• Create a new list format from scratch: click the button labelled New list.

• Load a list format from disk: click the Load from disk button to load a list format from
a local or networked disk (.list file extension).

3.6.3 List settings

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Lists submenu item.
3. Select Settings.

The list settings allow you to define the default settings you want to apply when viewing the lists of
results.
List settings dialog

• Select the required options as described below and click the Finish button

• You can click the Cancel changes link before you click Finish if you do not want current
changes to be applied

• You can also revert to the default settings by clicking the Revert to default settings link

The following settings are available:

• Show n records per page: select 15, 25, 50, 100 or All from the drop-down list to define
the maximum number of records you want to display per page..

• Show field codes: each field that you can include in the list of results is associated with a
unique field, and selecting this option displays the field codes.

3.7 Report settings

3.7.1 Managing report formats and report settings
In the Lists category in Amadeus settings, you can:

• View and manage previously saved report formats

• Define your report settings

For each option, when you are finished click the Finish button.

3.7.2 My reports

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Reports submenu item.
3. Select My reports.

The My reports dialog lists all available predefined and previously saved report formats.

22
 Define your settings

My reports dialog

From this dialog you can:

• Edit a report format: click the name of the report format you want to edit to go to the
report format screen

• Delete a previously saved report format: click the icon corresponding to the report
format you want to delete

• Delete all previously saved report formats: click the icon displayed in the column
header

• Create a new report format from scratch: click the New report button

• Load a report format from disk: click the Load from disk button to load a report
format from a local or networked disk (.txt file extension).

3.7.3 Report settings

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Reports submenu item.
3. Select Settings.

The report settings dialog allow you define the default settings to apply when building and viewing
company reports.
Report settings dialog

• Select the required options as described below and click the Finish button

• You can click the Cancel changes link before you click Finish if you do not want current
changes to be applied

• You can also revert to the default settings by clicking the Revert to default settings link.

23
Amadeus - User Guide

3.7.3.1 Show or hide sections for which no information is available

Use this option to choose whether to show or hide report sections that do not contain information
for a company. When you show such sections, a message is displayed informing that no
information is displayed.
3.7.3.2 Financial sections options

• Show accounting lines when values are not available for all selected columns:
When this option is selected, all accounting lines will always be displayed even if no value is
available the any of the selected columns. Clear this option to hide lines with no available
for any column.

• Show accounting line codes before/after the label:

Select this option to show the field code of each accounting item before or after the field
label.

3.7.3.3 Directors/Managers/Contacts options

• Always in English:
When this option is selected, the job titles of directors/managers/contacts are always
displayed in English, except in cases where the Information Provider only delivers that
information in a local language.

• In a local language:
When this option is selected, the job titles of directors/managers/contacts are always
displayed in a local language when delivered by the IP.

3.8 Managing ownership settings

In the Ownership category in Amadeus settings you can customise the definition of the ultimate
owner and the definition of the beneficial owner.

3.9 Analysis settings

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Analysis submenu item.
3. Select Settings.

The analysis settings allow you to choose to show or hide a help message when creating self
designed classed in the segmentation analysis.

3.10 My own peer groups

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Own peer groups submenu item.
3. Select My own peer groups.

The My own peer groups dialog lists all the own peer groups that you previously defined as a
default peer group for at least one company.

My Own peer group dialog

24
 Define your settings

Each peer group is displayed with the following information:

• Name of the peer group

• Description of the peer group

• Size of the peer group

• Date of last changes

• User who applied the last changed

3.10.1 View/change the companies associated to a peer group

1. Click the name of a peer group to view all companies currently associated to it. The
companies are presented in your current list format.
2. To remove an association, clear the check box corresponding to the company you want to
remove.

Notes:
• The list of companies displayed corresponds to all the companies for which the peer group
is currently defined as the default peer group. It does not correspond to the companies
comprising the peer group.
• To change the composition of the peer group, you can load the previously saved search and
modify the companies from the list of results or the peer report.

3.10.2 Delete a peer group

• To delete a peer group click the icon corresponding to the peer group you want to
delete.

• To delete all peer groups, click the in the column header.

Note: When you delete a peer group, all companies that were associated with it will become
associated with the default peer group.

3.11 Customised sections settings

3.11.1 Managing customised sections settings
In the Customised sections category in Amadeus settings, you can:

• View and manage previously saved customised sections

• Define your customised sections settings

For each option, when you are finished click on the Finish button.

25
Amadeus - User Guide

3.11.2 My customised sections

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Customised sections submenu item.
3. Select My customised sections.

The My customised sections dialog lists all available customised sections created and saved.
My customised section dialog

From this screen you can:

• Edit a customised section: click the name of the customised section you want to edit to
go to the Create/modify a customised section screen.

• Delete a previously saved customised section: click the icon corresponding to the
customised section you want to delete.

• Delete all previously saved customised sections: click the icon displayed in the
column header.

• Create a new customised section from scratch: click the New customised section
button.

• Load a customised section from disk: click the Load from disk button to load a list
format from a local or networked disk (.custo file extension).

3.11.3 Customised sections settings

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Customised sections submenu item.
3. Select Settings.

The customised settings allow you to define the default settings you want to apply when creating or
modifying a customised sections.
Customised sections settings dialog

• Select the required options as described below and click the Finish button

26
 Define your settings

• You can click the Cancel changes link before you click Finish if you do not want current
changes to be applied

• You can also revert to the default settings by clicking the Revert to default settings link

The following settings are available:

• Define the test company: click the Modify link to access the search by company name
and change the default test company.

• Display a help message when creating a new customised section: when this check
box is selected, a help message is displayed giving instructions how to add a line when
creating a new customised section.

3.12 User defined variables settings

3.12.1 Managing user defined variables settings
In the Customised sections category in Amadeus settings, you can:

• View and manage previously saved user defined variables

• Define user defined variables settings

For each option, when you are finished click on the Finish button.

3.12.2 My user defined variable

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the User defined variables submenu item.
3. Select My user defined variable.

The My User Defined Variables dialog lists all available user defined variables previously created
and saved.
My User Defined Variables dialog

From this screen you can:

• Edit a user defined variable: click the name of the user defined variable you want to edit
to go to the screen allowing you to create/modify a user defined variable.

• Delete a previously saved user defined variable: click the icon corresponding to the
user defined variable you wish to delete

• Delete all previously saved user defined variables: click the icon displayed in the
column header

• Create a new user defined variable from scratch: click the New UDV button.

27
Amadeus - User Guide

• Load from disk: click the Load from disk button to load a user defined variable format
from a local or networked disk (.udv file extension)

3.12.3 User defined variable settings

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the User defined variables submenu item.
3. Select Settings.

The User defined variables settings allow you to define the default settings you want to apply when
creating or modifying a UDV.
The following setting is available:

• Define the test company: click the Modify link to access the search by company name
and change the default test company.

3.13 User edited data

3.13.1 Managing user edited data
In the User edited data category in Amadeus settings, you can:

• View and manage user edited data

• Define settings associated with user edited data

For each option, when you are finished click the Finish button.

3.13.2 Companies with user edited data

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the User edited data submenu item.
3. Select Companies with user edited data.

The Companies with edited data dialog lists all companies for which user edited data has been
created and saved.
Companies with user edited data dialog

Each company is displayed with the following information:

• Name of the company: names displayed with a * indicate companies added to Amadeus

• Unique ID number associated to the company

• Date of last changes

• User who applied the last changed

• Last available accounts:

28
 Define your settings

o : indicates that the last closing data of the user edited data is more recent than
the last closing date on the Amadeus server.

o : indicates that the last closing data of the user edited data is the same as the
last closing date the Amadeus server.

o : indicates that the last closing data of the Amadeus server is more recent than
the last closing date of the user edited data.
3.13.2.1 Update a company's data
To modify/update a company's data click on the name of company.
3.13.2.2 Delete the user edited data associated to a company

• Click the icon corresponding to the company for which you wish to delete the user edited
data.

• Click the icon displayed in the column header to delete all user edited data.

Notes:
• If you delete a company that you created, you delete the record from the database
• If you delete a company included in the Amadeus database, you only delete the user edited
data that you inputted (i.e. the company record will still exist)
3.13.2.3 Create a new company
Click the button labelled New company to create a new company in the database and input user
edited data.
3.13.2.4 Load my data from disk
To load user edited data from a local or networked disk:
1. Click the button labelled Load from disk. The Load company from disk dialog is displayed.

2. Click the Choose File button and browse to locate the required file.
3. Click the OK button.
3.13.2.5 Clean outdated data
You are encouraged to clean outdated user edited data regularly in order to optimize the
performance of the application. To do so click the button labelled Clean outdated data. The
following rules are applied when cleaning up user edited data:

• When a company has more recent data on the official database, the company's edited
account(s) will be deleted

• When a company's edited data is as recent as the data available on the official database,
the company's edited account(s) will be deleted.

3.13.2.6 Export/print the list of user edited data

• Export: export the list of user edited data

• Print: print out the list of user edited data

29
Amadeus - User Guide

3.13.3 User edited data settings

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the User edited data submenu item.
3. Select Settings.

The user edited data settings allow you to define the default settings you want to apply when
editing user edited data and how to display user edited data.
The following options are available:

• Automatically check validity of accounts when clicking Finish after editing data:
Financial accounts that can be edited follow complex rules (the simplest being assets must
equal liabilities). Select this option to automatically check if all data inputted respect the
inherent rules when you click the Finish button.

• Treat "n.a." as zero in financial formulas

Select this check box if you want financial formulas to insert zero as the value for
unknown/unavailable values.

3.14 User imported fields

3.14.1 Overview
In addition to being able to retrieve data items (fields) from the official statements published by
companies, Amadeus allows you to add new fields to the current database.

Types of field that you can add to the database are:

• Company identifiers: add alternative identifiers than the ones proposed in Amadeus, such
as identifiers that you use internally in a client, prospect or supplier database

• Single data field: this a free text field that can, for example, contain a description of the
status of a prospect in the sales process, contact information, client account manager etc.

• Numbers: for example the number of days since a client last renewed its contract, the
number of users licensed to use your product, etc.

• Money values: for example sales projection, actual sales, etc.

• Percentages: for example the actual sales over sales projection.

• Date: for example a date at which a recurring event occurs, such as contract renewals.

• Segment: allows you to associate user defined segments with companies by assigning a
common string to several companies (e.g. suppliers or a sales force associated with a
group of companies).
IIf the Amadeus database is composed of N company records and K data fields, the database would
look like this:

Field 1 ... Field k ... Field K

Company 1 Value11 ... Value1k ... Value1K
... ... ... ... ... ...
Company i Valuei1 ... Valueik ... ValueiK
... ... ... ... ... ...
Company N ValueN1 ... ValueNk ... ValueNK
Table 1: representation of the unmodified database

Using the imported fields feature, you can add new fields to the database:

Field ... Field ... Field My Imported ... My Imported ... My Imported
1 k K Field K+1 Field K+m Field K+M
Company 1 Value11 ... Value1k ... Value1K MyValue1(K+1) ... MyValue1(K+m) ... MyValue1(K+M)
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Company i Valuei1 ... Valueik ... ValueiK MyValuei(K+1) ... MyValuei(K+m) ... MyValuei(K+M)

30
 Define your settings

... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Company N ValueN1 ... ValueNk ... ValueNK MyValueN(K+1) ... MyValueN(K+m) ... MyValueN(K+M)
Table 2: representation of the database with imported fields
3.14.1.1 Definition
We call User imported fields any fields that have been created in the database that exclusively take
values from an external source.
3.14.1.2 Working with user imported fields

To import new fields and manage existing ones, go to Settings > User imported fields > My
imported fields.
All user imported fields that you successfully create can be used as follows:

• Search on user imported field values

• Display user imported field values in the list of results

• Display user imported field values in a report

• Insert user imported fields in a customised section

• Insert user imported fields in a user defined variable formula (e.g. formula = my sales /
turnover)

• Use user imported fields in a peer report

• Use user imported fields in a statistical analysis (e.g. distribution of my sales)

• Risk analysis of my clients or suppliers portfolio, based on a segmentation analysis

(segment my clients or suppliers by score classes and use my sales or purchases as
descriptive variable)

• Launch a map analysis to represent my sales or purchases on a map and compare the
penetration indices

• Download user imported field values using web add-in and web service and generate
templates including data from BvD databases.

Notes:
• In addition to being able to create new fields and assign values of those fields to any
company in the database, Amadeus also allows you to modify the values of existing fields
and to add new companies to the database. See User edited data for more details.
• User defined variables (UDVs), while similar to user imported fields in the sense that they
allow you to create new fields that you can use in any of the ways explained above, they
are different in the sense that the value of a UDV is the result of a calculation from other
fields and does not originate exclusively from an external data source.

31
Amadeus - User Guide

3.14.2 My imported fields

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the User imported edited data submenu item.
3. Select My imported fields.

The My imported fields dialog lists all previously created imported fields allowing you to manage
them and create new ones. For background information on imported fields, see Imported fields.
My imported fields dialog

3.14.2.1 Importing new fields

3.14.2.1.1 Define the label and properties of the field

1. Click the grey link New label at the bottom of the Label column. A text box is displayed.
2. Type the name of the field label into the text box and press the Enter key on your
keyboard.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each field you want to import.

4. Once the label is entered, a unique code is automatically generated and associated with the
field. This code cannot be modified. You will need to use field codes in the client file
containing the values of the field.

5. For each label created, define the properties of the user imported field by clicking the
icon.
Defining the properties allows you to assign the type of value associated with the field. See
User imported fields properties for more information.

3.14.2.1.2 Prepare and enter the location of the file of values to import

1. In one or more Excel worksheets (.xls) or tab-delimited text files (.txt), input the values of
the fields you want to create, and save the files to a local or networked disk.
See Prepare the file containing the values of user imported fields for more information on
the rules for preparing these files.
2. Enter the complete pathname of the file you created and saved, or click the Browse button
to locate it.

Note: You can only import one file at a time.

32
 Define your settings

3.14.2.1.3 Import values from disk

1. After ensuring that the properties of each field match the values of the fields you are going
to import, click the Import button.
2. The import in progress dialog is displayed showing the progress of your import.
3. Once complete, one of the following will happen:
Import successful
If successful, the following screen is displayed showing the results of the import:

• On the left hand side are displayed the company IDs that have been matched on
the database and for which the values of imported fields were assigned to.

• On the right hand side are displayed the company IDs that have not been found
on the database.
Import failed
If the import file does not respect the validity rules, following screen is displayed
informing you of the nature of the error:

Close the window and either:

• Modify the properties of the field encountering the issue by clicking on the
icon.

33
Amadeus - User Guide

• Open the import file and modify the cell displaying the error.
3.14.2.2 Manage your imported fields
3.14.2.2.1 Sorting your imported fields

All columns with the icon can be sorted in both ascending ( ) and descending ( ) order. By
default, fields are sorted by Code with an ascending order.

3.14.2.2.2 Deleting user imported fields

• To delete an imported field click the icon corresponding to the user imported field you
want to delete.

• To delete all user imported fields, click the in the column header.

Note: When you delete an imported field, all values associated with the field are also deleted.

3.14.2.2.3 Define/view the properties of a user imported field

Click the icon corresponding to the user imported field whose properties you want to view or
edit. You cannot edit the properties of fields for which you already have imported data.

3.14.2.2.4 Change the label associated to a user imported field

Click the label of the field you want to change, then type a new name into it.

3.14.2.2.5 Checking import status and data associated to last import

• : Indicates that no values have yet been imported for that field

• : Indicates that values have been imported. The name of the source file, date and user
who last imported it are displayed.

3.14.3 User imported fields properties

Access: From My imported fields, click the icon corresponding to a user imported field.

Imported field properties dialog

User imported fields can be of seven types. Make sure that all properties that you define match the
properties of the fields in the external file you are going to import.

34
 Define your settings

3.14.3.1 Choose the value type

The following value types are available:

Value
Explanation Examples
types
Money Fields that refer to numerical values expressed in Sales figures, outstanding
value a monetary terms debt
Percent Fields that refer to numerical values expressed as Actual sales/projected
a percentage (%) sales, sales/cost of sales
Number Fields that refer to any numerical values with no Number of days a client
particular units last renewed its contract,
number of users licensed
to use your product
Single Fields that refer to any alphanumerical values that Client account manager,
data field can only have one single value which is not email address, rating
related to the fiscal closing dates
company Fields that refer alphanumerical values Internal ID used in your
ID representing a company identification number CRM
that you use and not present in Amadeus
Segment Fields that refer to any alphanumerical values that Client specific market
can only have one single value, not related to the segments (e.g. regions or
fiscal closing dates and that are liable to be industry specific
assigned to groups of companies groupings)
Date Fields that refers to a year, a month or a day Date at which a client
needs to renew his
contract

3.14.3.2 Choose the value properties

Depending on the type of value selected above, you can define the unit, the currency and number
of decimals in which the values are expressed. For example, if you define the field as a money
value item expressed in thousands of EUR, the values will be imported in thousands of EUR (i.e.
the value 30.125 in the file will be imported as 30,125 EUR)
The option My value is related to the fiscal year-end allows you to specify if the field is linked
to the fiscal year-end. If it is the field may be used in analyses and will be converted depending on
the display or layout options selected in lists, reports and analyses. For example if you choose to
display figures in millions of USD in your report and imported in thousands of EUR, the values will
be converted accordingly.

3.14.4 Prepare the file containing the values of imported fields

3.14.4.1 Valid file types

The file containing the values of your imported fields must be one of the following:

• Excel (.xls, .xlsx)

• Tab delimited (.txt)

• Zipped files (.zip)

Notes:
• If you are using a text file (.txt), make sure values are separated with tabs. If you use any
other delimiter, an error will be generate and you will not be able to import the file.
• Zipped files must contain a text file or an Excel worksheet. If several files are contained in
the zipped file, only the first file encountered is considered.
3.14.4.2 Valid file layouts (not applicable for segments)
The following information must be present in the file:

• User imported field code

• Company ID available in Amadeus
• Year

35
Amadeus - User Guide

• User imported field value

Optionally, you can include a label column. Two layouts are possible, standard and alternative:

3.14.4.2.1 Standard file layout

For each column you must include a header that exactly matches the instructions below in order to
successfully import the file. The order of the columns is not important as information is identified
using the text inputted in the column header, not its position.

Notes:
• The file should not have a duplicate record with the same values for User imported field
code, Company ID and Year. If there are such duplicates, you will be trying to assign
different values for the same field, for the same company for the same year.
• If in a specific column you have consecutive repeating values (e.g. five consecutive rows
for the same year), you only need to input the first occurrence of the value and leave the
cells underneath blank until the value changes. The blank cells will be imported using the
first value identified above it (see example below).
Column containing the user imported field code
Column label: "CODE"
In this column, enter the code given to the user imported field when you created it (e.g.
CF00001).

• Each cell in this column can contain a maximum of one code i.e. you cannot put in
CF00001 CF00002 a single cell.

• You can input different codes in different cells i.e. you can store and import the values
of more than one field in a single file.

• If you input an invalid code or a code that does not exist in Amadeus, the corresponding
value will not be imported and the following warning message will be displayed when
importing the file: Unknown field code(s).
Company ID column
Column label: label depends in the type of company ID you use.
• BvD ID numbers: label = "BVDID"
• ISIN number: label="ISIN"
• Sedol numbers: label = "SEDOL"
•

The company ID column is used to identify the company on Amadeus to which you want to
assign the value of the user imported field.

• You can use any company ID type supported by Amadeus. If you input an invalid
company ID label the following warning message is displayed when importing the file:
Unknown company ID type.

• One company ID number per cell.

• If you specify a company ID value that does not correspond to a company available in
Amadeus, the value associated with that line will not import. After the import process, a
result screen displays the company IDs that could not be matched.
If the company ID type you want to use is not listed above and you are unsure of what label to
input, please contact your account manager.
Year column
Column label: "YEAR"
The year column is used to identify the year to which the value of the user imported field
corresponds.

• Years must be entered as absolute values (e.g. 2009) and not in relative terms (N-1).

36
 Define your settings

• You must enter maximum one year per cell.

• If the user imported field is related to the fiscal year end (see User imported fields
properties), then the information regarding the year is mandatory and the User
imported field value will not import if it is not entered. If the User imported field is not
related to the fiscal year end, the year will be ignored when importing the file and you
may therefore leave it blank.
User imported field value column
Column label: "VALUE"
The value column is used to capture the value of the User imported fields you want to import.
You must ensure that values you enter match the properties associated to them.

• The value that you specify must match the type of field specified in the properties of the
User imported field. For example if you input text for a User imported field that should
be expressed as a money value, as a number or as a percentage, it will not import.

• For numbers, percentages or money values, decimals will only be taken into account if
the number of decimals has been correctly defined (to 1 or 2) in the User imported field
properties.

• For User imported fields that are expressed as money values, ensure that the value you
assign matches the unit and currency defined in the properties of the field.

User imported field label column

Column label: "LABEL"

The label column is optional and can be used to input the label of the field. The label may or
may not match the label assigned in the application.
Below is an example of a valid layout in Excel:

The following example disregards repeating values and will import the same data as above:

37
Amadeus - User Guide

3.14.4.2.2 Alternative file layout

Alternatively, you can use a layout where the imported field codes are used in the header of the
column. If you use this layout you do not need to include the "Code" column as above:

• Column 1 needs to be the company ID column and follows the same rules as above for the
standard layout

• Each subsequent column header must be the imported field code (e.g. CF00001, CF00002),
and, if it is field representing a money value, must be suffixed with the year it refers to
(e.g. CF00001_2007, CF00002_2007).
Below is an example of a valid file using this alternative layout:

3.14.4.3 Valid file layouts (for fields of type segment only)

The following information must be present in the file when creating a user imported field of type
"segment":

• User imported field code

• Company ID available in Amadeus
• Segment ID
• Segment label
Here too, two layouts are possible, standard and alternative:

3.14.4.3.1 Standard file layout

For each column you must include a header that exactly matches the instructions below in order to
successfully import the file. The order of the columns is not important as information is identified
using the text inputted in the column header, not its position.

38
 Define your settings

Note: If in a specific column you have consecutive repeating values (e.g. five consecutive rows
for the same year), you only need to input the first occurrence of the value and leave the cells
underneath blank until the value changes. The blank cells will be imported using the first value
identified above it (see example below).
Column containing the user imported field code
Column label: "CODE"
In this column, enter the code given to the user imported field when you created it (e.g.
CF00001). The same rules apply as above for the non-segment file.
Company ID column
Column label: label depends in the type of company ID you use. See list of ID codes above.
The company ID column is used to identify the company on Amadeus to which you want to
assign the value of the user imported field. Same rules as above apply.

Segmentation ID column
Column label: "SEGID"
The segmentation ID column is used to uniquely identify a specific segment in your user
imported field and define the companies belonging to a specific segment.

The ID you assign to each segment may be numbers (1, 2, 3, etc), letters (A, B, C, etc) or a
combination of both (A1, A2, B1, B2, B3, etc).
A segmentation ID:

• can be associated with more than one company

• for one same imported field, can only be associated with one segmentation label (see
below)

Segmentation label column

Column label: "SEGLABEL"

The segmentation label column is used to associate a label with a specific segment of your
imported field.

• Segment label is free text and should indicate what the segment refers to.

• For each imported field, the Segmentation label and ID association must be unique: you
cannot have a segment associated with two different labels or one label associated with
two different IDs.
Below is an example of a valid layout in Excel:

39
Amadeus - User Guide

3.14.4.3.2 Alternative file layout

Alternatively, you can use a different layout where the imported field codes are used in the header
of the column. If you use this layout you do not need to include the "Code" column as above:

• Column 1 needs to be the company ID column and follows the same rules as above

• Each subsequent column header must be the imported field code (e.g. CF00001, CF00002),
and must be suffixed SEGID for the segment ID column and SEGLABEL for the segment
label column.
Below is an example of a valid file using this alternative layout:

3.15 Own classifications

Own classifications give you the possibility to integrate into Amadeus your own hierarchical market
segmentation structures based on geography, industrial activity, and company ID numbers. Once
created, you can use these classifications in searches, lists, reports and analyses.
You can reference your segmentation structures to ID numbers, industry codes or geographical
items. This allows you to use your own marketing and sales structure on Amadeus in order to
analyse the market you have specified internally.
See also:

40
 Define your settings

• My own classifications

• Create a new own classification

3.15.1 My own classifications

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Own classifications submenu item.
3. Select My own classifications.

The My own classification dialog lists all previously created own classifications allowing you to
manage them and to create new ones. For background information on own classification, see Own
classifications.
My own classifications dialog

Each own classification is displayed with the following columns of information:

• Name: the name given to the own classification

• Date: the date on which the own classification was created

• Type: the type of own table the own classification refers to (Industry, Geographic or ID)

• Based on: the classification on which the table is based

You can sort the list according any column containing in the column header by clicking it (
indicates ascending, indicates descending).
3.15.1.1 Update an own classification

To update an own classification click the name of the classification you want to modify.
3.15.1.2 Delete an own classification

• Click the icon corresponding to the own classification for which you want to delete.

• Click the icon displayed in the column header to delete all own classifications.
3.15.1.3 Create a new classification
Click the button labelled New own classification to create a new own classification.

3.15.2 Create a new own classification

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Own classifications submenu item.
3. Select My classifications.
4. Click the button labelled New own classification.

This dialog allows you to upload a previously created own classification, to specify a name for the
table and for each level.

New own classification dialog

41
Amadeus - User Guide

3.15.2.1 Preparing the own classification table

Prior to uploading the own classification, use your favourite text editor (e.g. Notepad) to prepare
the external file to be uploaded, which must be tab delimited.

Three types of own classification tables are possible:

• Own industry classifications

• Own geographic classifications

• Own ID classifications
The layout of each type of own classification is the same:

• Column 1:
The column header indicates whether the table is based on an industry, a company or a
geographical parameter. Each value in this column must correspond to a value that exists
on Amadeus (e.g. if you are building an own industry classification, the classification must
exist on Amadeus and the codes specified must exist).

• Column 2:
The column header must be "REF". This column defines the table hierarchy and how each
segment in the first column maps to the own classification.
The values in this column must be numeric, each digit referring to a level. Amadeus allows
a hierarchy in a maximum of 10 levels.

• Column 3:
The column header must be "LABEL". This column defines the label associated with each
level of your own classification.
Example: The following table shows an own industry classification based on UK SIC codes

SUK REF LABEL

1 Classifications
11 Consumer Products
132 111 Tobacco
133 112 Sugarcane & Sugar Beets
181 113 Ornamental Floriculture & Nursery Products
12 Mining
121 Mining
1011 12101 Iron Ores
1021 12102 Copper Ores

42
 Define your settings

1031 12103 Lead & Zinc Ores

1041 12104 Gold Ores
1044 12105 Silver Ores
1061 12106 Ferroalloy Ores, Except Vanadium
1081 12107 Metal Mining Services
1094 12108 Uranium-Radium-Vanadium Ores
1099 12109 Miscellaneous Metal Ores, nec
1221 12110 Bituminous Coal & Lignite Surface Mining
1222 12111 Bituminous Coal Underground Mining
1231 12112 Anthracite Mining
1241 12113 Coal Mining Services
13 Energy & Utils
131 Energy & Utils
1311 13101 Crude Petroleum & Natural Gas
1321 13102 Natural Gas Liquids
1381 13103 Drilling Oil & Gas Wells
1382 13104 Oil & Gas Field Exploration Services
1389 13105 Oil & Gas Field Services, nec
14 Technology
141 Technology
3661 14101 Telephone & Telegraph Apparatus
3663 14102 Radio & Television Broadcasting and
3669 14103 Communications Equipment, nec
3671 14104 Electron Tubes
3672 14105 Printed Circuit Boards
3674 14106 Semiconductors & Related Devices
3675 14107 Electronic Capacitors
3676 14108 Electronic Resistors
3677 14109 Electronic Coils, Transformers, & Other
3678 14110 Electronic Connectors
3679 14111 Electronic Components, nec

3.15.2.2 Uploading the own classification

After having created and saved your own classification table:
1. Click the Choose File button and browse to locate and select the previously created file.
2. Click the Load button to upload the file.
3. Give a name to your own classification table and to each of its hierarchical levels.

43
Amadeus - User Guide

4. Click the OK button to confirm and create the own classification table.

3.16 My own exchange rates

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Own exchange rates submenu item.
3. Select My own exchange rates.

3.16.1 Overview
Amadeus can search for and display data in any one of the circa 200 IMF currencies. To accomplish
this Bureau van Dijk uses a monthly electronic feed of exchange rates from the International
Monetary Fund. This data feed contains the weekly, monthly or quarterly (depending on the
currency) exchange rates for each IMF currency to the USD.
When financial accounts are displayed in a currency different than the one filed, Bureau van Dijk
products use the nearest exchange rate to the year end date of the financial accounts using the
USD as a cross-referencing point. This cross referencing enables any set of filed accounts to be
displayed in any other available currency. The exchange rate used to perform the conversion is
displayed on screen at the top of the accounts.
The My own exchange rates dialog allows you to:

• View the official exchange rate applied between any available currency at each date

• Create an exchange rate between two currencies at a new date

• Change the exchange rate applied at a specific date

• Use a fixed rate to be applied at all periods

My own exchange rates dialog

44
 Define your settings

3.16.2 Viewing official exchange rates

To view all the official exchange rates applied at the different available dates between two
currencies:
1. Select the currency you wish to convert from the first drop-down menu.
2. Select the currency you would like to convert to from the second drop-down menu.
3. The list updates with the exchange rate prevailing at each date, showing the most recent
rate at the top.

For example, if you want to see what 1 EUR was worth in USD at each date you would select
"EUROLAND (EUR)" from the first drop-down and "UNITED STATES OF AMERICA (USD)" from the
second drop-down.

Note: The list of currencies available depends on whether you chose to display the "limited list"
or "complete list" of currencies from your user preferences.

3.16.3 Creating a new exchange rate

You can create a date and specify the exchange prevailing between two currencies at that date as
follows:
1. Select the two currencies from the drop-downs (see above).

2. Click the New date button. The following dialog appears:

3. Type the required values into the Date and Exchange rate text boxes.
4. Click the OK button to confirm.
The list of exchange rates is refreshed to include your chosen date, and your chosen exchange rate
appears in the Own exchange rate column. Notice that a icon appears to the left of the row
allowing you to delete it.
Optionally, you can repeat the procedure to add further exchange rates for different dates. A
icon in the header row allows you to delete all your own exchange rates together. A warning
prompt asks you to confirm deletion of exchange rates.

3.16.4 Changing the exchange rate at a specific date

If you would like to change the exchange rate applied at a date reported by official sources:
1. Select the two currencies from the drop-downs (see above).

45
Amadeus - User Guide

2. Click the data you would like to change the exchange rate. The following dialog appears:

3. Enter the exchange rate to be applied at that date.

4. Click the OK button to confirm.
The exchange rate that you typed in is displayed in the Own exchange rate column at the
corresponding date. Note that a icon appears in the row allowing you to delete your exchange
rate (and keep the one reported by official sources).

3.16.5 Applying a fixed exchange rate for all periods

In some instances, you may want to apply a fixed exchange rate for all periods between two
currencies. To do this:
1. Select the two currencies from the drop-downs (see above).
2. Select the check box Use a fixed rate for all periods and enter the rate to be applied
into the text box.

46
4 Search
4.1 Quick search

Access: The Quick search is accessible from any screen you are working with from the product
toolbar.

The quick search allows you to search Amadeus in one easy step according to a selection of
criteria.
1. Click to expand the available search criteria.
2. Select one of the available search criteria.
3. Type in one or more words into the text box:

• The search is matched on the beginning of words (e.g. sun finds suntan, Sunday,
etc.)

• You can use the Boolean operators AND, OR, AND NOT between the strings of
characters you enter. The default operator used when you include a space between
two strings is AND. If you include a comma between two strings, it is treated as an
OR. To include the operator AND NOT, you need to type it in.

• To retrieve companies matching exactly the text you enter, put the text in between
quotation marks.

4. Click to activate the search and view the list of companies complying with the criteria.
Notes:
• For more search options use the Grouped view or the Alphabetical list of search criteria.
• If you previously ran or loaded a search, you lose your previous search results.

4.2 Working with the grouped view of search criteria

Access: Go to Amadeus's Home page, click the Search tab and then click the Grouped view
subtab

The grouped view of search criteria organises the different available search criteria by logical
category for easy access.

Grouped view of search criteria

1. To access a search screen and specify a search step, either:

• If there are no subcriteria, click the search criterion.

• If you see a displayed, hover over the option to expand to the category and click the
subcriterion.
2. After you complete a search step, you return to the Home page and your search step is
displayed in the search strategy toolbox.

3. When you return to the home page, you can:

• Add another search step from the grouped view or the alphabetical list

• View your list of search results by clicking the View list of results button from the
search strategy toolbar or the menu item Go to list of results from the search
side menu.

• Save your search by clicking the Save button from the search strategy toolbox

• Run some analyses on the selected companies from the search side menu.

47
Amadeus - User Guide

4.3 Working with the alphabetical list of search criteria

Access: Go to Amadeus's Home page, click the Search tab and then click the Alphabetical list
subtab

The alphabetical list subtab presents all the available search criteria in an alphabetical list.
Alphabetical list of criteria

1. Scroll down the list or use the shortcuts displayed above the list to find the search criterion
you want to use.
2. Click the search criterion to access the search screen and specify your search step.
3. After you complete a search step, you return to the home page and your search step is
displayed in the search strategy toolbox.
4. From there on, you can:

• Add another search step from the grouped view or the alphabetical list

• View your list of search results by clicking the View list of results button from the
search strategy toolbar or selecting the menu item Go to list of results from the
search side menu.

• Save your search by clicking the Save button from the search strategy toolbox

• Run some analyses on the selected companies from the search side menu

4.4 Working with your saved searches

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Searches submenu item.
3. Select My searches.

Under the Saved searches tab/My search dialog are listed all your previously saved searches. From
this screen you can load a previously saved search, delete a previously saved search or
add/remove a saved search to your favourites.
Saved searches
Your saved searches are presented with the following columns of information:

• Name - this is the name you gave when saving the search.

• Date - this is the date and time when you saved your search.

• Type - two type of saved searches are available: Search strategy and Identifiers.

4.4.1 Load a saved search

To load a search, click the name of the saved search. The search will be launched immediately and
the list of results is displayed.
You can also load a search (based identifiers or search strategy) saved on a local or networked disk
by clicking the Load from disk button. The following dialog is displayed allowing you to choose a
file name to load.

• A previously saved search strategy file has the extension .strategy.

• The file extension of a previously saved search based on ID number depends in the ID
number used (e.g. a file saved with BvD ID numbers has the file extension .bvd). See
uploading companies based on a list ID numbers for more details.

48
 Search

4.4.2 Delete a saved search

• To delete a previously saved search click the icon corresponding to the search you want to
delete.

• To delete all your previously saved searches click the icon displayed in the column header.

4.4.3 Add/remove a saved search to your favourites

• To add a saved search to your favourites, click the corresponding to the search you want
to add.

• To remove a saved search that you previously added to your favourites, click the
corresponding to the search you want to remove.

4.4.4 Sorting the list of saved searches

By default, your saved searches are sorted by name in alphabetical order (from A to Z). The arrows
displayed in the column headers indicate how the list is sorted:

• : indicates the list is sorted by that column in ascending order

• : indicates the list is sorted by that column in descending order

To sort the list of saved searches by a different column or to change the sort order, click the
arrows in the corresponding column header.

4.5 Working with your favourite searches

Accessing: Go to Amadeus's Home page, and then click the Favourites tab.

The Favourites tab lists all the saved searches that you added as favourites. You can load a search,
create directories in which to organise your favourites, and remove a favourite search or directory.

Favourites

4.5.1 Loading a search

To load a search that you added to your favourites, simply click its name in the list. The list of
results are displayed.

4.5.2 Organising your favourites

Organising your favourites is easy and intuitive. You can create directories and drag and drop your
favourites into them. You can reorder your favourites by dragging and dropping them in the list.
To create a new directory:
1. Click the New directory button. The screen refreshes with a newly created directory.
2. In the text box, type the name you want to give to this directory and press Enter on your
keyboard.
At any time you can rename a directory by clicking the name and editing it in the text box.

4.5.3 Removing a favourite search or directory

• To remove a favourite search, click the icon corresponding to the search you no longer
want to be a favourite. Note that removing a favourite search does not delete the search

49
Amadeus - User Guide

from your saved searches. You can restore the search to your favourites from your list of
saved searches.

• To remove a directory,

1. Click the icon corresponding to the directory you wish to delete.

2. A dialog appears prompting you to indicate whether you want to remove the
directory and all favourite searches within it, or just the directory.

3. Click the required option button and click the OK button.

You can also remove the full list of favourites and all directories in one operation by clicking the
Remove all favourites from list button.

4.6 Working with your search history

Access: Go to Amadeus's Home page, click the History tab.

The history tab lists all the searches you have run, regardless of whether or not you saved them,
organised by time period so that you can easily find the searches you ran the today, yesterday,
two days ago, etc. A count of all the searches is shown in parentheses alongside each time period.
Search history

• Expand any time period with listed searches by clicking its icon or its name.

• Load a search by clicking its name in the expanded row.

• You can save a search by clicking the icon in its expanded row.

• You can delete an item in your history by clicking the icon in its expanded row. To delete
your full search history click the Delete all history button.

50
 Search

4.7 Batch search

Access: Select Batch search from the side menu of any screen you are working from.

4.7.1 Overview
The batch search functionality allows users to specify a list of companies and then to run a search
based on each of the specified company names, and optionally an associated city and country
specified for each company. This is a great time saver for users wanting to search for an array of
companies based on their name, city and country in one easy step rather than having to run
individual searches from the search by company name.
The list of companies to select can be specified in two ways:

• Uploading a file that contains the list of company names and optional associated city and
country

• Typing in (or copying and pasting) a list of company names with their respective city and
country in the provided text box.
In both cases, each line must correspond to one company. The batch search module will then
search, line-by-line, for companies matching the name in the Amadeus database.
Batch search screen

4.7.2 Load a file from disk

1. Click the Browse button to locate and select the file you want to upload. You should
choose a file of any type that can contain structured textual data, such as a .txt file or a
spreadsheet.
2. Click the OK button to display the following dialog allowing you specify and visualise the
structure of the file.

51
Amadeus - User Guide

3. Specify the following layout option:

• Worksheet: if you have specified a spreadsheet file, select from the drop-down list
of worksheets (tabs) within the chosen file. If you have selected another file type
this option is not displayed.

• Field separator: select from the drop-down list to specify what character delimits
each field in the client file. If you select 'To define' an extra text box is added
allowing you to indicate a custom separator. Activate the option Consider
consecutive separators as unique if consecutive delimiters should be regarded
as a single delimiter.

• Text delimiter: select from the drop-down list to specify how text is delimited
within the client file. If you select 'To define' an extra text box is added allowing
you to indicate a custom delimiter.

• Lines: allows you to specify which lines or rows to exclude from the search (e.g. if
your file contains column headers, you would want to exclude the first line).

• Column: allows you to specify which column contains the company names, city
and country
4. Click the OK button to view the batch search results (see below).

4.7.3 Paste or type your list of companies

1. Type or paste a list of company names with associated city and country (optional) into the
text box provided (one company name per line).
2. Click the OK button:
1. If you only specified company names, the matching process is launched
immediately (see below).
2. If you have additional columns, the same dialog is displayed as when loading a file
(see above).

4.7.4 Batch search matching results

Upon submitting the list of companies to the system, a matching process is launched to assess the
most likely companies that match the criteria you entered.
Batch search results dialog

52
 Search

The batch search results screen contains a list of results for each line in the client file or the
matching criteria you entered in the text box, one result per line in the following columns:

Column Description
Number Identifies the result within a count of the matching criteria you entered.
Icon If any matches have been found in the Amadeus database, this column contains a
. If no matches have been found, this column contains a .
Selection Click the View suggestions link to open a dialog containing the list of candidate
companies found by the matching process, together with the matching quality
indicator for each line. An option button indicates which of these matches has
been selected but you can choose a different match result if you want.

53
Amadeus - User Guide

• Optionally, you can change the criteria and click Search again to produce
a new list of match candidates.
• Click Select to confirm a change of selection, or click Back to list to
close the dialog without changing the selection.
Company The text you entered (or found in the client file) that you identified as the text to
name match against company names on the database.
R/O city The text you entered (or found in the client file) that you identified as the text to
match against associated cities on the database.
Country The text you entered (or found in the client file) that you identified as the text to
match against countries on the database.
Match The name of the company on the database that best match your criteria, together
result with the matching quality indicator (see below).

If you entered a large number of criteria the results may include multiple pages and you can use
the tool above the list of results to choose which page to view.
The automated process produces a matching score for each record. Our quality indicator uses the
following scoring criteria:

A Excellent total score >= 95%

B Good total score between 85 and 94%
C Fair total score between 75 and 84%
D Weak total score between 60 and 74%
E Poor total score < 60%

The higher the score, the better the data match. So B means that less data matched compared to
an A score. Candidates with a poor matching quality (E) may be irrelevant.

4.7.5 New batch search

Click the link at the bottom of the page to perform a new batch search as explained above.

Note: The Batch search page retains the current results throughout the session of work unless
you run a new batch search.

4.7.6 Viewing the company report for a match result

To open the company report, click the link in the Match result column for any row.

4.7.7 Viewing the matched companies as a list

To view all the companies currently displayed in the Match result column as a list:
1. Click the Views selected companies button. The companies are displayed in the standard
list format by default.

2. Select companies or manage the list format as you would for any list of companies.

4.7.8 Save the matched companies

To save all the companies currently displayed in the Match result column as a file:
1. Click the Save selected companies button. A dialog is displayed.

54
 Search

2. From the drop-down list, select whether you want the company IDs to be based on
registered number or BvD ID. The resulting saved file will be in the appropriate format
(*.ron or *.bvd).
3. Optionally, select the checkbox to include the file in your alerts system.

4. Enter the name of the file in the text box provided.

5. Click on one of the two following icons:

Icon Function
Save the search to the application server. The name of the saved search will be
listed under you saved searches. If a search with that name already exists, a
warning message asking you if you would like to replace it or save the report
under a new name is displayed.
Save the search to a local or network drive. This option will not be available if you
have chosen to include the file in your alerts system.

55
5 Managing your search
5.1 Search strategy toolbox

Access: After specifying at least one search criterion or loading a search, the search strategy
toolbox is accessible from the Home page or the List.

The search strategy toolbox lists all the search steps that you specified and allows you to: modify a
search step, save a search, delete one or all search steps, ignore a search step and more
importantly, if you have more than one search step, build complex search strategies using Boolean
operators.

• The first number displayed to the right of each search step indicates the number of
companies that search step has selected, independently of any previous search steps (also
known as "step result"). Note that the "step result" is only displayed if your Boolean
expression contains all "ANDs" or all "ORs".

• The second column corresponds to the number of companies the search step has selected
in combination with the previous search steps according to the Boolean expression
currently specified (all "ANDs" or all "ORs").

• The total number of companies selected is displayed underneath (in the example above,
this number is 6). The total results from the combination of all search steps. This number
depends on the Boolean expression specified in the Boolean search text box.

5.1.1 Working with search steps

• To modify a search step, click the search step you want to modify. The search screen is
displayed allowing you to modify the search step criteria.

• To ignore a search step, without actually deleting it from your search strategy, clear the
check box in its row. An ignored search step is greyed out and the Boolean expression is
amended automatically.

Note: You can ignore a search step by deleting it from the Boolean search text box and
by clicking the Refresh button.

• To delete a search step, click the icon in its row.

5.1.2 Search strategy toolbar

The icons/link displayed in the toolbar are defined below:

Icon / Link: Action

Save Save your search
Clear all steps Delete all search steps currently specified

Note: From the list, the search strategy toolbar contains an extra item labelled Add a search
step allowing to return to the home page to add a search step.

57
Amadeus - User Guide

5.2 Save a search

Access: From search strategy or List toolbar click the Save icon..

Save a search screen

5.2.1 Procedure
1. Amadeus offers two options to save a search:

• Save the search strategy (default option): if you select this option you are not
saving the actual companies selected by your search strategy, but the search steps
that you specified and the Boolean expression used to combine them. When you select
this option, each time you load this search, the number of companies may change as
the database is updated.

• Save the companies ID: if you select this option you are saving the list of
identification numbers that uniquely identify each company currently included in your
list of results. This means that when you load this search, the same companies will
always be included in your search results. Note that if you marked companies in your
list of results, only those will be saved.
2. Give a name to your search in the text box (or keep the default one).
3. Click one of the following icons:

Icon Function
Save the search to the application server. The name of the saved search will be
listed under you saved searches. If a search with that name already exists, a
warning message prompts you to indicate whether you want to replace it or to
save the report under a new name.
Save the search to a local or network drive.

5.2.2 Other functions

5.2.2.1 Load or delete a previously saved search
If you have previously saved a search to the application server, your previously saved searches are
displayed at the top of the screen:

• Click the name of a search to load it

• Click the icon to delete the search.

5.2.2.2 Add search file to alert system
Select the option Include this file in your alerts before clicking the save icon to add the file to
your alerts.

58
 Managing your search

5.3 Boolean searching

Access: Boolean searching is possible if you specify at least two search steps from the Search
Strategy toolbar available from the Home page or the List.

Boolean searching is an intuitive way to combine search steps when searching by more than one
criterion.
Amadeus allows you to conduct any number of search steps, one after the other, using different
criteria. As each search step is performed it is linked to the preceding search steps with either:

• The "AND" operator (most of the search criteria):

This means that companies selected in the current search step are compared with those in
the preceding ones and only company records satisfying all steps are selected.
Example: 1 AND 2 AND 3 AND 4

• The "FROM" operator:

(if you perform a search by "Top", available in searches based on financials and number of
employees)
This means that the current search step is "taken from" the company set resulting from
your previous search steps. This search step will always be positioned before all others and
parentheses are automatically inputted.
Example: 4 FROM (1 AND 2 AND 3)
You can modify how the search steps are combined with one another, and can exclude one or more
steps from the search strategy, by appending the Boolean expression in the text box. You can
change the execution order of search steps, and can modify the Boolean operators (FROM, AND,
AND NOT, OR). You can also include parentheses in order to specify which part of the Boolean
expression needs to be executed as a priority.
The priority order of execution of a Boolean expression is as follows:
1. Expression included in parentheses
2. FROM
3. AND / AND NOT
4. OR

Tip: When you have more than two search steps and use more than one type of Boolean
operator, it is highly recommended to use parentheses in order to ensure that the companies
selected by the Boolean expression specified are indeed the ones you intended to select.

5.4 Boolean operators

The easiest way to explain the concept of Boolean operators is to use Venn diagrams. Venn
diagrams used here are meant to represent an information space in Amadeus's database. A circle
with a word in it represents the subset of entities that comply to the criteria you entered during a
search step. When two subsets are shown in a single diagram, the overlap of the circle represents
entities that comply to both criteria.

The diagram above shows the information space of entities complying with criteria A and entities
complying with criteria B of a single search strategy. Criteria A is the first search step and criteria B
is the second search step.

59
Amadeus - User Guide

Some entities, the pink region, only comply with criteria A while some entities, the green region,
only comply with criteria B. The section of the two circles that overlap, the blue section, represents
all the entities in the database complying with both criteria.
Each search step is associated with another step using a Boolean operator. you can use any of the
four following operators:

• AND: this means that you want only the entities that comply with both criteria
simultaneously

• OR: this means that you want all entities that comply with either of the criteria no matter
which one it is.

• AND NOT: this means you want only those entities that comply with one search step but
that do not comply with the other.

• FROM: this is a special operator the must be used when you perform a search by "Top"
available in searches based on financials and number of employees. It means you are
taking the top N entities from the results of your previous search steps.
Going back to our Venn diagrams, if you want to retrieve entities belonging to the yellow area in
each diagram below, you would use the following Boolean expression (where numbers correspond
to search steps):

Diagram Boolean expression

Entities complying with criteria A

Entities complying with criteria B

1 AND 2

Entities complying with both criteria A and B at the same time

1 OR 2

Entities complying with either criteria A or B

60
 Managing your search

1 AND NOT 2

Entities complying with criteria A but not B

5.5 Boolean search priority

Using parenthesis to make sure Amadeus knows exactly what you mean is of utmost importance if
you have a search strategy composed of more the two steps and want to build a Boolean
expression composed of different operators. It allows you to instruct Amadeus which part of the
search to execute first. Items within parentheses (.) are always executed first.

More generally, the priority order of execution of a Boolean expression is as follows:

1. Expression included in parentheses
2. FROM
3. AND / AND NOT

4. OR

5.5.1 Generic example

Let's suppose that you specified the following search steps in the following order:

Search category Search subcategory Selection criteria Step result

1 Geographic location Region Region A 13.256

2 Industry Trade description Construction 28.352
3 Ownership data BvD independence ind. A+, A, A- 22.335
4 Number of employees - Top 50 50

5.5.1.1 Default Boolean expression

The default Boolean expression will look like this: 4 FROM (1 AND 2 AND 3)
Interpretation: You want the top 50 companies in terms of their number of employees of all
companies located in Region A, that have the word "Construction" in their trade description and
that are qualified as independent..

• If the number of companies resulting from (1 AND 2 AND 3) is above 50, the total number
of companies resulting from this search strategy is 50.

• If the number of companies resulting from (1 AND 2 AND 3) is lower than 50, the total
number of companies resulting from this search strategy is the total number of companies
resulting from (1 AND 2 AND 3).

5.5.1.2 Modified Boolean expressions

1. 1 AND (4 FROM 2) OR 3:

This expression will be executed as follows:

(i) = 4 FROM 2: top 50 companies in terms of their number of employees that have
the word trade "construction" in their trade description.
(ii) = 1 AND (i): companies resulting from (i) that are located in region A.

61
Amadeus - User Guide

(iii) = (ii) OR 3: either companies resulting from (ii) or companies that are
independent.
Interpretation: You want companies that are either qualified as independent, or the top
50 companies in terms of their number of employees that have the word "Construction" in
their trade description located in Region A.

2. 1 AND 4 FROM (2 OR 3):

This expression will be executed as follows:

(i) = 2 OR 3: all companies that either have the word trade "Construction" in their
trade description or all companies qualified as independent.
(ii) = 4 FROM (i): top 50 companies in terms of their number of employees of the
companies resulting from (i)

(iii) = 1 AND (ii): companies located in region A resulting from (ii).

Interpretation: You want the top 50 companies in terms of their number of employees of
all companies that either have the word trade "Construction" in their trade description or all
companies qualified as independent, located in Region A.
3. 3 AND 2 OR 4 FROM 1:

This expression will be executed as follows:

(i) = 4 FROM 1: top 50 companies in terms of their number of employees that are
located in Region A

(ii) = 3 AND 2: companies qualified as independent that have the word trade
"Construction" in their trade description
(iii) = (i) OR (ii): either companies resulting from (i) or companies resulting from (ii)
Interpretation: You either want companies qualified as independent that have the word
trade "Construction" in their trade description or the top 50 companies in terms of their
number of employees that are located in Region A.
4. 1 AND 4 FROM (2 AND NOT 3):

This expression will be executed as follows:

(i) = 2 AND NOT 3: companies that have the word trade "Construction" in their trade
description but are not qualified as independent.

(ii) = 4 AND (i): top 50 companies in terms of their number of employees of the
companies resulting from (i).
(iii) = 1 AND (ii): companies located in Region A and resulting from (ii).
Interpretation: You want the top 50 companies in terms of their number of employees
that have the word trade "Construction" in their trade description but are not qualified as
independent and that located in Region A.
As you can see from the examples above, the order of execution of the different search steps
dramatically impacts the interpretation of your search. It is therefore highly recommended to use
too many parentheses than not enough when building a Boolean expression composed of different
Boolean operators. Note that If an expression is composed of only ANDs or ORs, parentheses are
not needed.

62
6 Viewing search results
6.1 List of results

Access:
• Execute a quick search, or
• Execute a search step from the grouped view or alphabetical list of criteria and click View
list of results or Go to list of results, or
• Load a search from your saved searches, favourites or search history and click View list of
results or Go to list of results.

6.1.1 Overview
The list module is composed of four main elements:

• The list of companies selected by your search

• The list toolbar

• The list side menu

• The search strategy toolbox

List of results screen

6.1.2 Working with a list of companies

The list of results displays all the companies that comply with the criteria you specified in the
search module in a list format.
Each line contains the name of the company together with columns that contain the values of
several variables. If this is the first time you access a list of results, or if you have not specified
otherwise, you are presented with the Standard list. See List formats for more information on how
to change the list format.
To access a company report, click the name of the company you wish to view.
To the left of each company name, are displayed:

• The occurrence of the company according to how the list is sorted. The occurrence number
is used to specify the company or companies you would like to consider when exporting,
printing etc.

• A check box allowing to mark the company.

63
Amadeus - User Guide

6.1.2.1 Working with the columns of a list

You can work on the columns of a list in the following ways:

• You can change the order of the columns by clicking on a column header and dragging it to
the desired position

• Resize the width of a column by clicking its border and dragging it to the desired width

• Delete a column by clicking the icon in the corresponding column header

• You can sort the list of companies according to any variable where you see in the column
header. The list is sorted by the column whose header is darker grey ( indicates
ascending, indicates descending).

• To change the columns that are displayed in the list, go to the List formats page by clicking
the Add link or icon in the header of the last column.

6.1.3 List toolbar

The list toolbar, displayed at the top of the list of results, includes the following icons and controls:

Icon/Control: Action
Note: Create, modify or delete a note to one or more companies.
PG: Associate a default peer group to the companies included/selected in the
list of results.
Columns: Add or remove columns from the list.
Alert me: Set up scheduled email alerts for all or some of the companies included in
the list.
Export: Export the information as displayed in the list or the report of all
companies, all marked/unmarked companies or range of companies to an
external file (Excel, PDF, Word, etc.).
Send: Export and send by email the information as displayed in the list or the
report of all companies, all marked/unmarked companies or range of
companies to an external file (Excel, PDF, Word, etc.).
Print : Print out the information as displayed in the list or the report of all
companies, all marked/unmarked companies or range of companies.
: Jump to first page.
: Go to previous page.
1 of xx Enter a page number in the text box and press the Enter key on your
pages : keyboard to go to that page.
: Go to the next page.
: Jump to the last page.

64
 Viewing search results

6.1.4 List side menu

The list side menu contains links and menus that allow you to return to the search module, to
discard or create a new search, and to run a series of analyses on the currently selected
companies.
List side menu

You can hide the side menu in order to maximize your working space by clicking the Hide button.
The other options are as follows:

Option: Action:
Back to search Return to the home page
Discard your current search and start a new search from the home
New search
page
Modify current Return to the home page to add search steps or modify a current
search search step
Create a new list format from scratch or load a predefined or
List format
previously saved list format
Segmentation Run a segmentation analysis on the currently selected companies
Peer analysis Run a peer analysis on the currently selected companies
Aggregation Run an aggregation analysis on the currently selected companies
Concentration
Run a concentration analysis on the currently selected companies
analysis
Statistical Run a statistical distribution analysis on the currently selected
distribution companies
Linear regression Run a linear regression analysis on the currently selected companies
Map analysis Run a cartographic analysis on the currently selected companies

6.2 Search strategy toolbox

Access: After specifying at least one search criterion or loading a search, the search strategy
toolbox is accessible from the Home page or the List.

The search strategy toolbox lists all the search steps that you specified and allows you to: modify a
search step, save a search, delete one or all search steps, ignore a search step and more

65
Amadeus - User Guide

importantly, if you have more than one search step, build complex search strategies using Boolean
operators.

• The first number displayed to the right of each search step indicates the number of
companies that search step has selected, independently of any previous search steps (also
known as "step result"). Note that the "step result" is only displayed if your Boolean
expression contains all "ANDs" or all "ORs".

• The second column corresponds to the number of companies the search step has selected
in combination with the previous search steps according to the Boolean expression
currently specified (all "ANDs" or all "ORs").

• The total number of companies selected is displayed underneath (in the example above,
this number is 6). The total results from the combination of all search steps. This number
depends on the Boolean expression specified in the Boolean search text box.

6.2.1 Working with search steps

• To modify a search step, click the search step you want to modify. The search screen is
displayed allowing you to modify the search step criteria.

• To ignore a search step, without actually deleting it from your search strategy, clear the
check box in its row. An ignored search step is greyed out and the Boolean expression is
amended automatically.

Note: You can ignore a search step by deleting it from the Boolean search text box and
by clicking the Refresh button.

• To delete a search step, click the icon in its row.

6.2.2 Search strategy toolbar

The icons/link displayed in the toolbar are defined below:

Icon / Link: Action

Save Save your search
Clear all steps Delete all search steps currently specified

Note: From the list, the search strategy toolbar contains an extra item labelled Add a search
step allowing to return to the home page to add a search step.

6.3 Define the default peer group

Access: From the list of results or the company report, click the PG icon available in the toolbar.

The following dialog allows you to define/modify the default peer group associated with:

• companies included in your list of results (if accessed from the list of results). Note that if
you marked one or more companies in the list, the association will only apply those.

• a subject company if accessed from a company report

66
 Viewing search results

Two main options are available:

• Standard peer group: this is the peer group that Amadeus associates with the company
by default and is defined by industry code and size.

• Own peer group:

• Dynamic:
Select this option to define all companies complying with your current search
strategy as the default peer group. The search strategy will be saved with the
name given in the text box and will be available from your saved searches. It is
said to be dynamic because the companies composing the peer group may vary as
the database is updated or if you modify the search strategy.

• Static:
Select this option to define all companies included in the list of results as the
default peer group. The list of company identifiers will be saved with the name
given in the text box and also available from your saved searches. It is said to be
static since the companies composing the peer group does not change.

• Saved search:
Select this option to associate the group of companies with those in a previously
saved search as the default peer group. The saved search may be dynamic or static
depending on whether the saved search is a search strategy or a company set.

Notes:
• When selecting the option Dynamic or Static, the subject company will always be included
in the own peer group.
• You can associate up to 500 companies with a peer group. Should you have more than 500
companies in the list of results that you want to define together as a default peer group,
you must first save your results and then associate, by batches of 500, the companies to
the saved search.
• Should you delete the own peer group that you associated with the company or companies,
the default peer group will revert back to the standard peer group.
• For more information about peer groups, see the Peer groups topic.

6.4 Marking companies from the list of results

In the list of results, a check box is displayed next to each company allowing you to mark it.
Marking companies is a very useful feature as it allows you to indicate which companies you want
to:

• Save

• Export (or not export)

• Send (or not send)

67
Amadeus - User Guide

• Print (or not print)

• Delete (or keep)

• Include in your analyses.

6.5 List formats

Access:
• From the list of results side menu, expand the List format menu item and select New
format, or
• Click Columns from the list toolbar, or
• Click the Add link displayed in the last column of your list, or
• From My lists click the name of a previously saved list format or the New list button.

6.5.1 Overview
The Format the list dialog allows you to:

• Create a new list format

• Modify a list format

• Save a list format

• Load a previously saved or predefined list format

• Delete a previously saved list format

• Define the default list format

Format the list dialog

Note: if you selected the option Add/remove section, the columns currently selected for
display in the list are listed under 'Your selection'.

6.5.2 Create a new list format

In the left pane are listed all the variables that you can add the columns of your list. These
variables are organised by category.

1. Adding variables:

68
 Viewing search results

• To add a single variable:

1. Click to expand the category that contains the variable.

2. Click the variable name or select the corresponding check box to add the variable
to the list format. The variable is then displayed under Your selection.

• To add a group of variables:

1. Select the check box of the category you want to add.
2. All the variables contained in that category are then displayed under Your
selection.

• If you cannot easily find a variable in the tree-like structure, use the search feature to
find and select variables:
1. Type in one or more strings of characters in the text box and click the Search
button.
2. The variables whose labels include any part of the entered text are displayed (e.g.
subs name will find Subsidiary Name)
3. Select the check box corresponding to the variables you want to add.
2. After having added all the desired variables, you can:

• Remove a previously selected variable by clearing its the check box in Your selection.

• Change the order of the columns in which the variables will be listed by clicking a
variable's name in Your selection and dragging it to the desired position.

• Modify the number of displayed values for items that have more than one recorded value.
3. Click the OK button to view the list of results.

Note: List formats will not be saved by default, which means that when you start a new
session of Amadeus your modifications will be lost. See Save a list format below.

6.5.3 Modify a list format

To modify a previously saved list format or a predefined list, click the icon corresponding to the
list you want to modify.
Follow the instructions above to add/remove sections or reorder them.

6.5.4 Save a list format

1. Type the name you want to give to the list format into the Give a name text box. Note that
you cannot specify the name of a predefined list (e.g. Standard list).
2. Click one of the following icons:

Icon Function
Save the list format to the application server. The name of the saved list will be
listed in your saved lists. If a list with that name already exists, a warning message
is displayed prompting you to indicate whether you want to replace it or save the list
under a new name.
Save the list format to a local or network drive (.list extension file).

6.5.5 Load a previously saved or predefined list

• To load a list that you have previously saved on the application server or a predefined list click
its name on the left side of the Format the list dialog.

• To load a list saved on a local or networked disk click the link Load from disk. The Load a file
from disk dialog is displayed allowing you to choose a file to load.

69
Amadeus - User Guide

After having successfully loaded a list, you are presented with the list of results.

6.5.6 Delete a previously saved list format

To delete a list format that you previously saved on the application server, click the corresponding
icon.

6.5.7 Define the default list format

The default list format is the format used by default when viewing the results of a search at each
new session of Amadeus. Unless you specify otherwise it is the Standard list that is considered as
the default list.
You can change this default behaviour by selecting the check box of the format (predefined or
previously saved) you want to use by default. Then the chosen format will be used by default when
viewing a list of results at each new session.

Note: The list that is displayed by default in an open session is the last list format that was
displayed (also known as the current list).

6.6 Free and cheap list variables

6.6.1 Free variables

Group Variable Variable code

Own classifications (industry,
ID, geographic)
User imported fields
Contact details Company name NAME
City CITY
Country COUNTRY
Country ISO code CNTRYCDE
Legal & account information Release date UPDNUM
Consolidation code CONSOL
Last available year LASTYEAR
Size & group information Category of company DATASET
Industry & overview NACE Rev. 2, primary code NAC2PRI
NAICS 2012, core code NAICOR
US SIC, core code USCOR
Notes Note date NOTEDATE
Note text NOTETEXT
Update Update number UPDATENUMBER
Addition of company UPDATEADDEDDON
Last update - Company
UPDATEONNAME
name
Last update - Address UPDATEONADDRESS

70
 Viewing search results

Last update - Telephone

UPDATEONPHONE
number
Last update - Status (any
UPDATE_STATUS
change)
Last update - Category of
UPDATEONCOMPANYSIZE
company
Last update - Annual
UPDATEONACCOUNTS
accounts
Last update - Auditors UPDATEONAUDITORS
Last update - BvD
UPDATE_BVD_IND_INDICATOR
Independence Indicator
Link to news & deals Company & market news NRNEWS
Mergers & acquisitions deals NRNEWS
Link to original documents Global Reports IDNR
Local registry documents IDNR
Global Business Register IDNR

6.6.2 Cheap variables - by group

Please note that selecting several variables of the same group will cost only one credit (e.g.
selecting several variables from the Address group will only cost one credit).

Group Variable Variable code

Contact details Telephone number PHONES

Fax number FAXES
Address Address ADDRESS
Region REGION
Accounts header Account date STATDATE
Number of months MONTHS
Account unit UNIT_STR
Account currency CURRENCY
CPYCONTACTS_HEADER_
Manager name Full name
FullNameOriginalLanguagePreferred
CPYCONTACTS_HEADER_
First name
FirstNameOriginalLanguagePreferred
CPYCONTACTS_HEADER_
Middle name
MiddleNameOriginalLanguagePreferred
CPYCONTACTS_HEADER_
Last name
LastNameOriginalLanguagePreferred
CPYCONTACTS_HEADER_
Salutation
PrefixSalutation_Translated
Gender CPYCONTACTS_HEADER_Gender
Manager age Date of birth CPYCONTACTS_HEADER_Birthdate
Age CPYCONTACTS_HEADER_Age
Age bracket CPYCONTACTS_HEADER_AgeRange

71
7 Company reports

Access: To access a company report, click a company name from the list of results after having
specified some search criteria or loaded a search.

7.1 Overview

The report module is composed of three main elements:

• The company report is composed of report sections

• The report toolbar

• The report lateral menu

company report example

7.2 Report sections

A company report is a collection of independent information sections incorporating a wide range of

detailed data and information on a subject company. A report section may include tabular data or
charts illustrating tabular data.
The first section of any report contains signature information on the company. This section is called
the "header" and includes a variety of core company information. This section is special as it
cannot be removed.
Which sections are included in a report, and how they appear, is entirely up to you. You can display
a single predefined report section or create a new report format by selecting the sections you want
to include in the report and the order you want them to appear. Such report formats can be saved
and loaded for future re-use.
Many of the available predefined sections (such as ownership sections, sections providing financial
data, charts, etc.) allow further display or layout options. The options available intrinsically depend
on the section. They include for example the possibility to define the columns (years) of data you
want to display, the units and currency in which you want to express financial data, and much
more.
Furthermore, you may create you own customised section. Customised sections allow you to
incorporate data and information available from one or more predefined sections in one single

73
Amadeus - User Guide

section. You can create your own labels for these items as well as create new items based on
formulae. These customised sections can be saved for future re-use.
Lastly, Amadeus offers you the possibility to edit the data contained in several report sections
(such as the header, financial statements and directors) as well as add companies to the database.
Such data is called Own data.

7.2.1 Report section toolbar

At the top-right of each section the following icons are available:

Icon Action Notes

After the section is collapsed,
Collapse the section to hide the contents of the you may expand it by clicking
section. on .
Open/maximise the section in a new browser Double clicking within the
window. From this new window, you may then heading of a section also opens
export, send or print the section individually. the section in a new window.
Remove the section from report.

In addition to the icons, many sections also include the link Options or Layout, allowing you to
edit the display options of the section.

7.3 Report toolbar

The report toolbar, displayed at the top of each report, includes buttons and links allowing you to
navigate from one company report to another, export, etc.

Icon/Link: Action
PG Associate a default peer group to the subject companies
Locate Locate the company on a map (not available on all products).
Edit Edit information and data for the company currently displayed.
Sections Format the report
Alert me Set an alert on the company
Export Export one or more company reports
Send Export and send one or more company reports to a selection of recipients
by email
Print Print out the report of one or more companies
Display the report of the first company (according to how the list is
sorted)
Previous Display the previous company report (according to how the list is sorted)
1 of xx Enter the occurrence number of the company and press the Enter key on
companies your keyboard to jump to that company report.
Next View next company report (according to how the list is sorted).
Display the report of the first company (according to how the list is
sorted).

74
 Company reports

7.4 Report lateral menu

To the left or right of the report is displayed the following menu:

7.4.1 Back to the list of results

Use this link to return to the list of results.

7.4.2 Search
Use the menu items to either start a New search (you will lose your current search results) or
Modify current search.

7.4.3 Define the format

A report format is defined by a collection of report sections selected for the report (and the
sequence in which they appear).
Hover over the Report format menu item to expand the following menu of options:

• Create/modify a format:
The items under this heading allow you to create a new report format (New format) or
modify the current report format (Add/remove sections)

• Display a predefined format:

Click one of the predefined report formats to display it.

• Display a saved format:

Click one of your previously saved format to display it. Note that this category is empty if
you have not previously saved a report format.

7.4.4 Display a specific section

The options under this section of the lateral menu allow you to:

• Display a specific report section:

75
Amadeus - User Guide

• Click the section you would like to display

• Items with a > expand into report sections (i.e. they are not sections but
categories).

• Create a new customised section or load a previously saved customised section.

Note: This lateral menu may have been hidden by clicking Hide.

7.5 Define the default peer group

Access: From the list of results or the company report, click the PG icon available in the toolbar.

The following dialog allows you to define/modify the default peer group associated with:

• companies included in your list of results (if accessed from the list of results). Note that if
you marked one or more companies in the list, the association will only apply those.

• a subject company if accessed from a company report

Two main options are available:

• Standard peer group: this is the peer group that Amadeus associates with the company
by default and is defined by industry code and size.

• Own peer group:

• Dynamic:
Select this option to define all companies complying with your current search
strategy as the default peer group. The search strategy will be saved with the
name given in the text box and will be available from your saved searches. It is
said to be dynamic because the companies composing the peer group may vary as
the database is updated or if you modify the search strategy.

• Static:
Select this option to define all companies included in the list of results as the
default peer group. The list of company identifiers will be saved with the name
given in the text box and also available from your saved searches. It is said to be
static since the companies composing the peer group does not change.

• Saved search:
Select this option to associate the group of companies with those in a previously
saved search as the default peer group. The saved search may be dynamic or static
depending on whether the saved search is a search strategy or a company set.

76
 Company reports

Notes:
• When selecting the option Dynamic or Static, the subject company will always be included
in the own peer group.
• You can associate up to 500 companies with a peer group. Should you have more than 500
companies in the list of results that you want to define together as a default peer group,
you must first save your results and then associate, by batches of 500, the companies to
the saved search.
• Should you delete the own peer group that you associated with the company or companies,
the default peer group will revert back to the standard peer group.
• For more information about peer groups, see the Peer groups topic.

7.6 Report formats

Access:
• From the company report lateral menu, expand the Report format menu item and select
New report or Add/remove section, or
• Click Add/remove sections from the report toolbar.

7.6.1 Overview
The Report format dialog allows you to:

• Create a new report format

• Modify a report format

• Save a report format

• Load a previously saved or predefined report format

• Delete a previously saved report format

• Define the default report

Format the report dialog

Note : if you selected the option Add/remove section, the report sections currently
selected for display in the report are listed under 'Your selection'

7.6.2 Create a new report format

77
Amadeus - User Guide

The left pane of the dialog lists all the sections that you can add the report format. These report
sections are organised by category.
1. Adding sections:

• To add a single section:

1. Click the category containing the section to expand it
2. Click the section to add it to the report. The report section is then displayed under
Your selection.

• To add a group of sections:

1. Click the icon corresponding to the category you want to add.

2. All the sections contained in that category are then displayed under Your
selection.
2. After having added all the desired sections, you can:

• Remove a previously selected section by clearing the check box corresponding to that
section in Your selection.

• Change the order of sections displayed in the report by clicking a section's name under
Your selection and dragging it to the desired position.
3. Many sections offer a variety of display options. Click the link Display options link of the
section you want to edit.
4. Click the OK button to view the report.

Note: By default report formats will not be saved meaning that when you start a new session
of Amadeus your modifications will be lost. See Save a report format below.

7.6.3 Modify a report format

To modify a previously saved report format or predefined report, click the icon corresponding to
the report you want to modify.
Follow the instructions above to add/remove sections or reorder them.

7.6.4 Save a report format

1. Type the name you would like to give to the report format into the Give a name text box.
Note that you cannot specify the same as a predefined report (e.g. Standard report).
2. Click one of the following icons:

Icon Function
Save the report format to the application server. The name of the saved report will
be listed in your saved reports. If a report with that name already exists, a warning
message prompts you to replace it or to save the report under a new name.
Save the report format to a local or network drive (.txt extension file).

7.6.5 Load a previously saved or predefined report

• To load a report previously saved on the application server or a predefined report click the
name of the report you want to load on the left side of the dialog.

• To load a report saved on a local or networked disk click the Load from disk link. The Load a
file from disk dialog is displayed allowing you to choose a file to load.

78
 Company reports

After having successfully loaded a report, you are displayed with the report.

7.6.6 Delete a previously saved report format

To delete a customised report that you previously saved on the application server, click the
corresponding icon.

7.6.7 Define the default report

The default report is the report used by default when viewing a company report at each new
session of Amadeus. Unless you specify otherwise, the Standard report is the default report.

You can change this default behaviour by selecting the check box of the report format (predefined
or previously saved) that you want to use by default. By doing this, the chosen report will be used
by default when viewing a company report at each new session.

Note: The report that is displayed by default in an open session is the last report that was
displayed (also known as the current report).

7.6.8 Predefined reports

A predefined report is a system-defined collection of report sections delivered by default with
Amadeus. Although you can edit predefined reports, you cannot override them. This means that
after you have finished editing a predefined report you cannot save it using its predefined name.
Each time you load a predefined report, the system-defined sections are always displayed in the
usual order.
7.6.8.1 Standard report
The standard report is the factory default report i.e. unless otherwise specified, it is the report that
is used by default when displaying report at each new session of Amadeus.
It includes the following sections in the following order:

• Contact details

• Legal & account information

• Size & group information

• Industry classification

• Activities/industry

• Key financials & employees

• Evolution of a variable across time (chart)

• Evolution of a key variable

• Global standard format

• Global ratios

• Current Directors / Managers / Contacts

• Auditors

79
Amadeus - User Guide

• Controlling shareholders

• Current subsidiaries
7.6.8.2 Summary

• Contact details

• Status & account information

• Size & main activity/industry

• Key financials & employees

7.7 Report section display options

Access:
• From the report section's toolbar when viewing a company report, click the Options or
Layout link.
• From the report format dialog, click the Display options or Layout link corresponding to
the section you wish to edit.

A number of report sections offer a variety of display options or layout options.

These options can be classified in five broad categories:

• Layout options for tabular data section

• Display options for stock data sections

• Display options for ownership sections

• Display options for elements of a Peer report

• Display options for charts

7.7.1 Layout options for tabular data

7.7.1.1 Overview
The layout options for sections displaying tabular data allow you to define the columns of data to
display in the section as well as the sequence in which you want them to be displayed.

80
 Company reports

By default, a selection of columns is already selected. you can remove any of them by clearing the
corresponding check box under Your selection.
7.7.1.2 Adding columns
To add columns, follow these steps:
1. Select a tab to choose whether you want to display values for the Subject company,
Median of the peer group or Average of the Peer group.
2. Choose how you want to express the value of the financial items (currency, unit, etc).
Money values in reference currency :
Select this option if you wish to express figures in a currency of your choice:
a. Select the reference currency (by default, the default currency is selected).
b. Select the units in which you wish to express the values (note that default units
are the units in which the accounts have been published).
c. Select the exchange rate you wish to apply for the conversion from the original
currency by selecting one of the following option:
 Exchange rate at 'each' closing date: display the data by converting
the monetary values using the exchange rate prevailing at the date of
each report (i.e. different exchange rates will be applied to different
years).

 Exchange rate at 'last' closing date: display the data by converting

the monetary values for each years using the official exchange rate
prevailing at the end of the last published report (e.g. if the last
published report is March 2007, it is the exchange rate prevailing in
March 2007 that is applied to all available years).

Money values in original currency

Select this option to express values in monetary values in the currency in which the
accounts were originally published. Then select the units you wish to use from the Units
drop down list.
Relative sizes
Select this option to express financial variables as a percentage of the total of the
balance sheet or income statement (depending where the variable is included).
Variation in default currency
Select this option to express data in percentage of variation in respect to the value,
expressed in original currency, of the value of a financial item the year before.
Variation in reference currency

Select this option to express data in percentage of variation in respect to the value,
expressed in a reference currency, of a financial the year before.
Select the reference currency.
Select the exchange rate you wish to apply for the conversion from the original currency by
selecting one of the following option:
 Current: display the data by converting the monetary values using the
exchange rate prevailing at the date of each report (i.e. different
exchange rates will be applied to different years).
 Last reported date: display the data by converting the monetary
values for each years using the official exchange rate prevailing at the
end of the last published report (e.g. if the last published report is March
2007, it is the exchange rate prevailing in March 2007 that is applied to
all available years).

81
Amadeus - User Guide

3. Select the check box(es) corresponding to the period(s) (relative or absolute) for which you
want to include data.
4. After having added the desired columns you can change their display sequence by dragging
and dropping them into the desired order within the Your selection list.
7.7.1.3 Modify the columns
To modify previously saved columns or predefined columns, click the icon corresponding to the
column you want to modify. Repeat as required.
Follow the instructions above to add/remove columns or reorder them.
7.7.1.4 Save your columns
a. Type the required column set name into the Enter name text box in the lower right of the
dialog box. Note that you cannot specify the name of a predefined column set (e.g.
Standard columns).
b. Click one of the following icons:

Icon Function
Save the columns to the application server. The name is displayed in the 'Saved
columns' list. If an entry with the chosen name already exists, a warning message
prompts you to replace it or to save the columns under a new name.
Save the columns to a local or network drive (.txt extension file).

7.7.1.5 Load columns (previously saved or predefined)

• To load columns previously saved on the application server or a predefined set of columns
click the required name in one of the lists on the left side of the screen.

• To load a set of columns saved on a local or networked disk click the Load from disk link.
The Load a file from disk dialog is displayed allowing you to choose a file to load.

7.7.1.6 Delete previously saved columns

To delete columns that you previously saved on the application server, click the corresponding
icon.
7.7.1.7 Define the default columns
The default columns are the set of columns used by default when viewing a report section at each
new session of Amadeus. Unless you specify otherwise it is the Standard columns that is
considered as the default columns.
You can change this default behaviour by selecting the check box corresponding to the predefined
columns or previously saved columns that you want to use by default. By doing this, the columns
that you select that will be used by default whenever you view the report section at each new
session.

Note: The columns that are displayed by default in an open session, are the last columns that
were displayed.

7.7.2 Display options for options for stock data sections

82
 Company reports

The display options for stock data sections (only available for quoted companies) allow you to
specify the number of columns you want to include in the specific stock data section.
The following report sections allow these display options:

• Annual stock data

• Annual stock data valuation

• Monthly pricing series

• Weekly pricing series

• Daily pricing series

When modifying the format of any of these sections:
1. Click the Display options link in the Your selection list.
2. Select the required option button, which correspond to a number of years/months/weeks of
data as appropriate.

7.7.3 Display options for ownership sections

The display options for the ownership sections of the report allow a number of options such as:

• defining the variables to be included in the section,

• applying filters in order to exclude shareholders/subsidiaries verifying specific criteria,

• defining layout options specific to the section,

• defining whether or not to include M&A news on Global Ultimate Owners.

When modifying the format of any ownership section:
1. Click the Display options link in the Your selection list. An appropriate dialog box is
displayed, with tabs, check boxes and/or option buttons to select.
2. Select the required combination of options. Change the display order in the pane on the
right if required.

3. Click OK to finish.

7.7.4 Display options for graphs

7.7.4.1 Structure of the balance sheet
Allows you to modify the year.
7.7.4.2 Structure of the P&L account
Allows you to modify the year.
7.7.4.3 Evolution of a key variable
Allows you to choose the variable to be plotted on the graph.
7.7.4.4 Evolution in indices of several variables
Allows you to select up to five variables and select the base year.
7.7.4.5 Ownership structure
Allows you to :

• Choose the fields to display in each box

• The size of each box

• The number of companies per levels to display above and below the subject company

• The number of level to display initially.

7.7.4.6 Evolution of the Stock Market Prices

83
Amadeus - User Guide

Choose to display month end market prices or a high/low/close representation at each date.

7.7.5 Elements of a peer report

A peer report is a benchmarking tool that you can use to compare a subject company to a peer
group. By default, the peer report displays the figures corresponding to the default peer group
associated with the company
It is important to distinguish a peer report from a peer analysis as they serve different purposes.
The peer report compares a subject company to a predefined peer group whereas a peer analysis
compares companies against each other. Moreover, each element of a peer report is considered as
a section of a company report whereas a peer analysis is independent of any company report.
The following peer report elements can be customised:
7.7.5.1 Display options for the peer report table
The peer report table includes six categories of display options, each represented by a tab. You can
use the tabs to navigate between the categories. By default you presented with the General tab.

General
Use the general display options to modify the table's name and to select the statistical
parameters you want to display in the table.

• Name:
The current name of the table is displayed in this text box. You can modify it by
typing in a new name.

• Select the items you want to display:

By default the median, standard deviation and average are all displayed at the top
of the table. Select/clear the check box(es) corresponding to the parameter(s) you
want to display/remove from the table.
Each parameter can be displayed at the top or the bottom of the table.

84
 Company reports

• Select the parameter you want to display after each value:

This option allows you select the figure to display next to each value in the table.
You can select the to display the rank, quartile, decile or nothing.
Variables
Use this tab to modify the variables included in the table.

The Your possibilities list expands a tree-like structure of all the financial variables you
can select for the display in the table.
To add one or more variables, either:

• Click within the tree to select the financial items you want.

• Use the search feature by typing in a keyword in the text box, click the Search
button to display a list of matches, and then select the required item from the list.
The selected items are displayed under Your selection. The variables appear in the table in
the order displayed here. You can change this order by dragging and dropping within the
list.

To remove a variable from the table, simply clear its check box in the list
Years
Use this tab to add/remove years displayed in the table.

Layout
Use this tab to choose how you want to present the data in the table. Because the table
displays information according to three dimensions (variable, time, company) and a table is
essentially two dimensional, the data needs to be grouped according to one of the
dimensions.

85
Amadeus - User Guide

Three layouts are available:

• One table per year:

This option groups the values by year: the table is subdivided into subtables, each
corresponding to a different year.
It is recommended to select this layout if you have selected only a few years and a
large number of companies or variables in the analysis.

• One table per variable:

This option groups the values by variable; the table is subdivided into subtables,
each corresponding to a different variable.
It is recommended to select this layout if you have selected only a few variables and
a large number of companies or years in the analysis.

• One table per company:

This option groups the values by company: the table is subdivided into subtables,
each corresponding to a different company.
It is recommended to select this layout if only a few companies are included in the
analysis and you have included a large number of variables or years in the table.
For each of these layouts you can invert the lines and columns by clicking the invert the
lines and columns link corresponding to the proposed layout.
Currency
Use this tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are expressed.

Any change in this tab applies to all elements included in your report.
Group
Use this tab to define the group of companies to which the subject company is compared in
the peer report (i.e. define the peer group).

86
 Company reports

1. Select the peer group:

• Own peer group, if not standard peer group:

This is the default option and will select the standard peer group unless you
associated the subject company with an own peer group. See Define the
default peer group for more information on how to associate own peer
groups.

• Standard peer group:

Select this option to use the Standard peer group as the comparison group.

• List of results:
Choose this option to use the companies included in your list of results as
the comparison group.

• Saved search:
Choose this option and select a previously saved search to compare the
subject company to a previously saved search file.
2. Refine your selection:

You can further refine the comparison group by selecting the closest to top "N"
companies according to a proximity variable for a specific year.

Notes:
• Products covering more than one country have the choice between an international
or national peer group.
• The peer group cannot be composed of more than 2,500 companies for display in
the peer report.
Companies

This tab is only accessible if there are fewer than 2,500 companies included the peer group
selected for the peer report. The tab lists all the companies in the peer group selected
according the parameters defined under the Group tab.
You can exclude or include companies in the peer group by clearing/selecting the
corresponding check box(es).
You can save the list of selected companies by clicking the Save the company list link.

Any change in this tab applies to all elements in your peer report.

87
Amadeus - User Guide

When you have finished customising the display of the current element, click the OK button to
confirm your selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category represented by a tab with a dark blue background,
will apply to all the peer report elements included in your report.

7.7.5.2 Display options for a bar chart (peer report)

The peer report bar chart includes five categories of display options, each represented by a tab.
You can use the tabs to navigate from one category to another. By default you presented with the
General tab.

General
Use the general display options to modify the bar chart's name and to choose the
statistical parameters you want to display in the chart.

Variable
Use this tab to modify the variable selected for display in the chart.

You can select any variable from the available list, or use the search feature to quickly
find and select a variable.
Note: You can modify the variable directly from the bar chart in your report.

Year
Use the year tab to change the year displayed in the bar chart..

You can select any year displayed.

Notes: You can modify the year directly from the bar chart in your report.
Currency

Use the currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.
Any change under this tab apply to all elements in your peer report.

Group
Use this tab to define the group of companies to which the subject company is compared
in the peer report (i.e. define the peer group).

1. Select the peer group:

• Own peer group, if not standard peer group:

This is the default option and will select the standard peer group unless
you associated the subject company with an own peer group. See Define
the default peer group for more information on how to associate own peer
groups.

• Standard peer group:

Select this option to use the Standard peer group as the comparison
group.

88
 Company reports

• List of results:
Choose this option to use the companies included in your list of results as
the comparison group.

• Saved search:
Choose this option and select a previously saved search to compare the
subject company to a previously saved search file.
2. Refine your selection:

You can further refine the comparison group by selecting the closest to top "N"
companies according to a proximity variable for a specific year.

Notes:
• Products covering more than one country have the choice between an
international or national peer group.
• The peer group cannot be composed of more than 2,500 companies for display in
the peer report.

Companies
The Companies tab is only accessible if there are fewer than 2,500 companies included
the selected peer group. This tab lists all the companies in the peer group selected by the
parameters in the Group tab.
You can exclude or restore companies from the peer group by clearing/selecting the
corresponding check box(es).
You can also as save the list of selected companies by clicking the Save the company
list link.

Any change you make in this tab applies to all elements in your peer report.
When you finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options under a category represented by a tab with a dark blue background,
will apply to all the peer report elements included in your report.

7.7.5.3 Display options for a pie chart (peer report)

The peer report pie chart includes six categories of display options, each represented by a tab. You
can use the tabs to navigate between the categories. By default you presented with the General
tab.

General
Use the general display options to modify the pie chart's name, choose how you want it
to be displayed and select whether you want to display positive or negative values only.

• Name:
Use the text box to change the name of the pie chart.

• Angle:
Rotate the pie chart around the axis passing through its centre and perpendicular
to the surface in a clockwise fashion. The first slice starts at the angle selected
from the drop-down list. At 0° the first slice's left border starts at the top of the
pie chart. Move the first slice to the right by increasing the values (0° to 180°).
Decrease to the values (from 0° to -180°) to move the first slice to the left..

• Tilt:
Rotate the pie chart along its horizontal axis, i.e. the pie chart will rotate

89
Amadeus - User Guide

vertically. At 0° the pie chart is flat. At 70° the pie chart is slanted to its
maximum.

• Number of slices:
This option allows you to select the maximum number of slices (companies) that
the pie chart can contain. Increase the number of slices to add more companies
to the chart.

• Positive/Negative values:
Some variables may accept both positive and negative values. Because it is
impossible to plot in both negative and positive values together, you have to
choose which values to consider.

Note: Apart from the name, all these options can be modified from the pie chart in your
peer report
Variable
Use this tab to modify the variable selected for display in the chart.

You can select any variable in the list, or use the search feature to quickly find and select
a variable.
Note: You can modify the variable directly from the bar chart in your report.
Year
Use the year tab to change the year displayed in the pie chart.

You can select any year displayed.

Notes: You can modify the year directly from the pie chart in your report.
Currency
Use the currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.
Any change under this tab applies to all elements in your analysis.

90
 Company reports

Group
The options in this tab allow you to define the group of companies to which the subject
company is compared to in the peer report (i.e. define the peer group).

1. Select the peer group:

• Own peer group, if not standard peer group:

This is the default option and will select the standard peer group unless
you associated the subject company with an own peer group. See Define
the default peer group for more information on how to associate Own
peer groups.

• Standard peer group:

Select this option to use the Standard peer group as a comparison group.

• List of results:
Select this option to use the companies included in your list of results as
the group of comparison.

• Saved search:
Select this option and select a previously saved search to compare the
subject company to a previously saved search file.
2. Refine your selection:

You can further refine the comparison group by selecting the closest to top "N"
companies according to a proximity variable for a specific year.

Notes:
• Products covering more than one country have the choice between an
international or national peer group.
• The peer group cannot be composed of more than 2,500 companies for display in
the peer report.
Companies

This tab is only accessible if there are fewer than 2,500 companies included the peer
group selected for the peer report. The tab lists all the companies composing the peer
group selected according the parameters defined under the Group tab.
You can exclude or include companies in the peer group by clearing/selecting the

91
Amadeus - User Guide

corresponding check box(es).

You can also as save the list of selected companies by clicking the Save the company
list link.

Any change in this tab applies to all elements included in your peer report.
When you finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection

Note: Modifying the options in a category represented by a tab with a dark blue background,
will apply to all the peer report elements included in your report.

7.7.5.4 Display options for a Lorenz curve (peer report)

The peer report Lorenz curve includes six categories of display options, each represented by a tab.
You can use the tabs to navigate between the categories. By default you are presented with the
General tab.

General
Use the general display options to modify the chart's name and choose whether you want
to plot companies with positive values or negative values.

92
 Company reports

• Name:
The current name of the chart is displayed in this text box. You can modify it by
typing in a new name.

• Positive/Negative values:
Some variables accept both positive and negative values. Because it is impossible
to plot both in the same Lorenz curve, you have to choose which values you want
to consider.

Note: Apart from the name, these options can be modified from the Lorenz curve in
your report.
Variable
Use this tab to modify the variable selected for display in the chart.

You can select any variable in the list, or use the search feature to quickly find and select
a variable.

Note: You can modify the variable directly from the Lorenz curve in your report.
Year
Use the year tab to change the year displayed in the chart..

You can select any year displayed.

93
Amadeus - User Guide

Notes: You can modify the year directly from the Lorenz curve in your report.
Currency
Use the currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.
Any change under this tab apply to all elements in your analysis..

Group
The options in this tab allow you to define the group of companies to which the subject
company is compared to in the peer report (i.e. define the peer group).

1. Select the peer group:

• Own peer group, if not standard peer group:

This is the default option and will select the standard peer group unless
you associated the subject company with an own peer group. See Define
the default peer group for more information on how to associate Own
peer groups.

• Standard peer group:

Select this option to use the Standard peer group as a comparison group.

• List of results:
Choose this option to use the companies included in your list of results as
the group of comparison.

• Saved search:
Choose this option and select a previously saved search to compare the
subject company to a previously saved search file.
2. Refine your selection:

You can further refine the comparison group by selecting the closest to top "N"
companies according to a proximity variable for a specific year.

Notes:
• Products covering more than one country have the choice between an
international or national peer group.

94
 Company reports

• The peer group cannot be composed of more than 2,500 companies for display in
the peer report.
Companies
This tab is only accessible if there are fewer than 2,500 companies included the peer
group selected for the peer report. The tab lists all the companies composing the peer
group selected according the parameters defined under the Group tab.
You can exclude or include companies in the peer group by clearing/selecting the
corresponding check box(es).
You can also as save the list of selected companies by clicking the Save the company
list link.

Any change in this tab applies to all elements in your peer report.
When you finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection

Note: Modifying the options in a category represented by a tab with a dark blue background,
will apply to all the peer report elements included in your report.

7.7.5.5 Display options for a distribution chart (peer report)

The peer report distribution chart includes six categories of display options, each represented by a
tab. You can use the tabs to navigate between the categories. By default you are presented with
the General tab.

General
Use the general display to modify the chart's name and choose if you want to include the
first and tenth decile in the chart..

95
Amadeus - User Guide

• Name:
Displays the current name of the chart. You can modify it by typing a new name
in the text box.

• Include 1 and 10 decile:

Select/clear this option include/remove the first and tenth decile from the chart.

Note: Apart from the name, these options can be modified from the distribution chart
in your report.

Variable
Use this tab to modify the variable selected for display in the chart..

You can select any variable in the list, or use the search feature to quickly find and select
a variable.

Note: You can modify the variable directly from the distribution chart in your report.
Year
Use the year tab to change the year displayed in the chart..

96
 Company reports

You can select any year displayed.

Notes: You can modify the year directly from the distribution chart in your report.
Currency
In the currency tab you can modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.
Any change under this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

Group

The options under this tab allow you to define the group of companies to which the
subject company is compared to in the peer report (i.e. define the peer group).

1. Select the peer group:

• Own peer group, if not standard peer group:

This is the default option and will select the standard peer group unless
you associated an own peer group to the subject company. See Define
the default peer group for more information on how to associate Own
peer groups.

97
Amadeus - User Guide

• Standard peer group:

Select this option to use the Standard peer group as a comparison group.

• List of results:
Choose this option to use the companies included in your list of results as
the group of comparison.

• Saved search:
Choose this option and select a previously saved search to compare the
subject company to a previously saved search file.

2. Refine your selection:

You can further refine the comparison group by selecting the closest to top "N"
companies according to a proximity variable for a specific year.

Notes:
• Products covering more than one country have the choice between an
international or national peer group.
• The peer group cannot be composed of more than 2,500 companies for display in
the peer report.
Companies
This tab is only accessible if there are less than 2 500 companies included the peer group
selected for the peer report. Under this tab are listed all the companies composing the
peer group selected according the parameters defined under the tab Group.
You may exclude or reinclude companies from the peer group by deactivating/activating
the corresponding check-box(es).
You may also as save the list of selected companies by clicking the link Save the
company list.

Any change under this tab apply to all elements included in your peer report.
When you finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection

Note: Modifying the options in a category represented by a tab with a dark blue background,
will apply to all the peer report elements included in your report.

7.7.5.6 Display options for a indices chart (peer report)

The peer report indices chart includes six categories of display options, each represented by a tab.
You can use the tabs to navigate between the categories. By default you are presented with the
General tab.

98
 Company reports

General
Use the general display options to modify the chart's name and select the statistical
parameters you want to plot on the chart.

• Name:
Displays the current name of the chart. You can modify it by typing in a new
name in the text box.

• Select the items you want to display:

By default the median, standard deviation and average are all plotted on the
chart. Select/clear the check box(es) of the parameter(s) you want to
display/remove from the chart.

Note: Apart from the name, these options can be modified from the indices chart in
your report..

Variable
Use this tab to modify the variable selected for display in the chart..

99
Amadeus - User Guide

You can select any variable in the list, or use the search feature to quickly find and select
a variable.

Note: You can modify the variable directly from the indices chart in your report.
Years
Use the Years tab to:

• Change the years to display in the chart.

• Change the base year on which the indices are calculated.

Currency

In this tab you can modify the currency and unit in which financial items are expressed.
Any change you make here apply to all elements included in your analysis.

Group

100
 Company reports

The options under this tab allow you to define the group of companies to which the
subject company is compared to in the peer report (i.e. define the peer group).

1. Select the peer group:

• Own peer group, if not standard peer group:

This is the default option and will select the standard peer group unless
you associated an own peer group with the subject company. See Define
the default peer group for more information on how to associate Own
peer groups.

• Standard peer group:

Select this option to use the Standard peer group as a comparison group.

• List of results:
Choose this option to use the companies included in your list of results as
the group of comparison.

• Saved search:
Choose this option and select a previously saved search to compare the
subject company to a previously saved search file.
2. Refine your selection:

You can further refine the comparison group by selecting the closest to top "N"
companies according to a proximity variable for a specific year

Notes:
• Products covering more than one country have the choice between an
international or national peer group.
• The peer group cannot be composed of more than 2,500 companies for display in
the peer report.
Companies
This tab is only accessible if there are fewer than 2,500 companies included the peer
group selected for the peer report. The tab lists all the companies composing the peer
group selected according the parameters defined under the Group tab.
You can exclude or restore companies from the peer group by selecting/clearing their
check box(es).
You can also as save the list of selected companies by clicking the Save the company
list link.

101
Amadeus - User Guide

Any change in this tab applies to all elements included in your peer report.
When you finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection

Note: Modifying the options in a category represented by a tab with a dark blue background,
will apply to all the peer report elements included in your report..

7.7.5.7 Display options for a quantiles chart (peer report)

The peer report quantiles chart includes six categories of display options, each represented by a
tab. You can use the tabs to navigate between the categories. By default you presented with the
General tab.

General
Use the general display options to modify the chart's name and select whether you want
to display the evolution of the selected variable within the quartiles or the deciles.

Variables
Use this tab to modify the variable selected for display in the chart.

102
 Company reports

You may select any variable displayed from the available list use the search feature to
quickly find and select a variable.

Note: You may modify the variable directly from the quantiles chart in your report.
Years
Use the years tab to change the years displayed in the chart.

Currency
Use this tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are expressed.
Any change under this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis..

Group
Use the options in this tab to define the group of companies to which the subject
company is compared to in the peer report (i.e. define the peer group).

103
Amadeus - User Guide

1. Select the peer group:

• Own peer group, if not standard peer group:

This is the default option and will select the standard peer group unless
you associated the subject company with an own peer group. See Define
the default peer group for more information on how to associate Own
peer groups.

• Standard peer group:

Select this option to use the Standard peer group as a comparison group.

• List of results:
Select this option to use the companies included in your list of results as
the group of comparison.

• Saved search:
Select this option and select a previously saved search to compare the
subject company to a previously saved search file.
2. Refine your selection:

You can further refine the comparison group by selecting the closest to top "N"
companies according to a proximity variable for a specific year.

Notes:
• Products covering more than one country have the choice between an
international or national peer group.
• The peer group cannot be composed of more than 2,500 companies for display in
the peer report.
Companies

This tab is only accessible if there are less than 2 500 companies included the peer group
selected for the peer report. Under this tab are listed all the companies composing the
peer group selected according the parameters defined under the tab Group.
You may exclude or reinclude companies from the peer group by deactivating/activating
the corresponding check-box(es).
You may also as save the list of selected companies by clicking the link Save the
company list.

104
 Company reports

Any change under this tab apply to all elements included in your peer report.
When you finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection

Note: Modifying the options in a category represented by a tab with a dark blue background,
will apply to all the peer report elements included in your report.

7.8 Customised sections

Customised report sections allow you to incorporate any available item (financial or not) in the
desired sequence or layout. Furthermore, customised sections allow you to include variables that
you define using an algebraic expression of other financial items.
Each item available is associated with a unique code. In turn, each item that you create in a
customised section is associated with a new code starting with the characters "BVD" and followed
by five digits (e.g. BVD00000)..
Just like any other report section, customised sections can be displayed individually or included in
report formats.
You can access the dialog that allows you to create or modify a customised section by:

• Clicking the name of a previously saved customised section or clicking the New
customised section link from Settings > My customised sections > My saved customised
section.

• Selecting the New section option from the Customised section side menu of the report.

• Clicking the Modify link from a customised section toolbar displayed in a report.

7.8.1 Create/modify a customised section

Access:
• Click the name of a previously saved customised section or click the New customised
section button from Settings > Customised sections > My customised sections.
• From the Customised section side menu option of the report, select New section.
• Click the Modify link from a customised section toolbar displayed in a report.
7.8.1.1 Overview
To create a customised section you must add, line by line, the fields you want to include in the
section and optionally, for a financial field or a multiple data item, define the options for the
created item or variable.
After you have added all the items you want, you can use the icons displayed above your selection
to control how each item or variable is displayed, and the layout of the section.

105
Amadeus - User Guide

The customised section dialog screen allows you to:

• Add items or variables to the customised section

• Edit the items included

• Save a customised section

• Load a customised section

• Delete a customised section

7.8.1.2 Adding items

There are two ways you can add a field.

1. Adding fields from the list of available fields:
To add a single item, either:

• Click the desired field in the tree-like structure to add it to your selection

• Use the search feature to easily find and select the field.

To add multiple fields in one operation, click the icon to add all items under that
category.
2. Adding an item using the New label or New formula links:

Click the New label or New formula links to add a line and edit the label or formula of
the item.
In the label cell you may enter whatever you deem appropriate.
The value that you must input in the formula cell is more restrictive. You can either:

• Leave it blank: the field then represents, for example, a heading or an empty line.

• Enter a numerical value (constant) preceded be '#'.

• Enter a valid field code that uniquely identifies a known item (financial or textual).

• In the case of financial items, construct an algebraic formula composed of several

financial items using the usual arithmetic operators (+, -, *, /, ^), parentheses,
constants (always preceded by '#'). Note that you can also construct conditional
variables using the IF statement, the EXIST statement and Boolean operators
(AND, OR, NOT). To help you in constructing your formula, click the icon
alongside the formula's text box to launch the financial formula wizard.

106
 Company reports

When you add a field, the following are displayed in the new row in the Your selection pane:

• A icon, which allows you to delete the field

• A clear check box, which allows you to select or deselect the field

• A icon, which allows you to modify the field's options (when available)

• The BVD unique code assigned to the new field (e.g. BVD00000), which is incremented by
one for each new field. The BVD code can be used in formulas if it represents a financial
variable.

• A icon, which indicates that the field is valid or a icon, which indicates that the
formula of the field is invalid. If it is invalid, the invalid characters are displayed in red.
7.8.1.3 Editing the items of a customised section
Once you have added items or variables, from within the table of selected items, you can:

• Edit the label or formula of an item by clicking its label or formula, which opens an active
text box in which you can type as needed.

• Rearrange the order of the items by clicking, dragging and dropping them in the desired
sequence in the Your selection pane.

• Add a comment to any item by clicking the associated BVD code.

At the top of your selection are a series of icons that you can use to apply a wide array of functions
as explained in the table below. Each icon will affect active item(s), whose check boxes are
selected.

Icon Function
Define the options of the currently selected items. If no items are selected, this icon
allows you to create a new variable.
Define the currently selected financial item or variable as 100% of the balance sheet.
All other balance sheet items included in the customised section will be expressed as a
percentage of this item or variable, provided that in the section's layout options you
have included at least one column expressed in relative sizes.
This icon is active if you have selected only one financial item or variable.
Define the currently selected financial item or variable as 100% of the income
statement. All other income statement items included in the customised section will be
expressed as a percentage of this item or variable, provided that in the section's layout
options you have included at least one column expressed in relative sizes.
This icon is active if you have selected only one financial item or variable.
Insert a new item that is the subtotal of the financial items or variables that are
currently selected. This icon is active if you have selected two or more financial items
or variables.
Make the selected item(s) invisible. Although invisible these items will remain in your
customised section. This option is useful when including subtotals.
Attach a comment to the currently selected items.

Add a column header for financial data in your customised section..

Insert a picture in your customised section.

Insert a page break.

Define the font and style of the label and values of the selected items.

Define the background colour of the selected items.

Add and define borders of the selected items.

107
Amadeus - User Guide

Add numbering or bullets to the selected items.

Indent the labels of the selected items.

Define the spacing (before and after) of the selected items.

Insert a hyperlink or frame to display another web page in your customised section:
• A hyperlink will display a label upon which you can click to display a web page.
• A frame will insert a section in your customised report displaying the web
page.
Note that you can include the code of a variable in your URL by placing the code
between curly brackets {}. The variable will take the value of the variable of the
corresponding subject company.
For example, if you include the URL 'http://www.google.com/#hl=en&q={name}', you
will launch a page (or display a web page) showing the Google search results based on
the subject company's name.
Undo any formatting or layout modifications that have been made (restores the
original settings)
Preview the customised section

7.8.1.4 Save a customised section

1. Type the name you want to give to the customised section in the Enter name text box.
2. Click one of the following icons:

Icon Function
Save the customised to the application server. The name appears in the list of
saved sections in the left pane of the dialog. If a section with that name already
exists, a warning message prompts you choose to replace it or to save the
section under a new name.
Save the section to a local or network drive (.custo extension file).

7.8.1.5 Load a customised section

• To load a section previously saved on the application server click the name of the section you
want to load from the left side of the screen.

• To load a section saved on a local or networked disk click the link Load from disk. The Load a
file from disk dialog is displayed allowing you to choose a file to load.

After having successfully loaded the section, the report is displayed.

7.8.1.6 Delete a customised section
To delete a customised section that you previously saved on the application server, click the
corresponding icon from the list of previously saved sections.

108
 Company reports

7.8.2 User defined variables

Access:
• From the dialog allowing you to create or modify a customised section:
o Click the icon of a financial item or variable already included in a customised
section, or
o Click the icon displayed alongside the formula text box when editing the formula
of an item, or
o Double-click in the formula text box of a financial item or formula.
• Click the name of a previously saved user defined variable or click the New UDV button
from Settings > User Defined Variables > My User Defined Variables.
• From the Home page, go to the grouped view of search criteria, expand User Defined
Variables and select Create a new UDV.

7.8.2.1 Overview
The financial formulae wizard allows you to quickly and easily define formulas to create financial
variables that you can use in::

• Searches

• The list of results

• Company reports

• Customised sections

• Peer reports

• Analyses (segmentation, distribution, etc.)

• Spreadsheets or PowerPoint presentations, by downloading values using the Web add-in

Each item included in a financial formula is defined by a field code and a relative year using the
following syntax: FieldCode[N-i]. If no relative year is specified, the last available year is used [N].

The financial formulae wizard includes tabs allowing you to:

• Define the formula of the variable (Formula tab)

• Define the properties of the variable (Properties tab)

7.8.2.2 Define the formula
7.8.2.2.1 Creating simple variables

109
Amadeus - User Guide

Financial variables may be constructed from any existing financial field or previously created
financial variables using the usual arithmetic operators (+, -, *, /, ^), parentheses, and constants
(always preceded by '#').
You can type the formula directly in the Your formula text box, or use the following procedure:
1. From the drop-down list below the orange display area, select a relative year (N, N-1, N-2,
etc.) for the financial variable you want to include in your expression.
2. Select the financial item from the tree-like structure on the left of the dialog or use the
search feature below that to find and select the item to display the field code in the Your
formula text box.
3. In the keypad below the orange display area, click the operator you want to use to link this
item with the subsequent one.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until your expression is built. Wherever necessary, include
parentheses in order to specify the correct execution order for terms in the expression. To
insert a constant click the # button and then click the number buttons.
5. Click the Test button in the top right corner of the dialog to validate the formula on the
test company (shown in the orange box at the lower right). If you want to change the test
company click the Modify link. If the formula is invalid, an error message is displayed
informing you on the source of the error.

7.8.2.2.2 Creating variables based on averages

Using the same steps as above you can create variables based on averages using the following
syntax:
FieldCode(Mi)

Where:

• FieldCode: is the code of the field you want to retrieve the average

• M: is the indicator you want to calculate the average

• i: is the number of years (in relative terms to the last available year) for which you want to
calculate the average

Please note that averages are only calculated using available data. In other words, if, for a specific
year included in the average, a value is not available, it will be omitted from the calculation.
Example:

Value for = 100

LY
Value for = n.a.
LY-1
Value for = 120
LY-2
Value[M3] = (100 + 120) / 2 = 110
(i.e. the value for LY-1 is omitted from the calculation and we
divide by 2, instead of 3

7.8.2.2.3 Creating conditional variables

You can create more complex formulas using the:

• IF statement,

• EXIST statement

• Comparison operator (<, >, <=, >=, <>, ==)

• Boolean operators (AND, OR, NOT).

110
 Company reports

The classic structure of a conditional expression is:

IF(A, B, C), with:

• A: condition

• B: value to display if the condition is true

• C: value to display if the condition is false

Notes:
• B or C could themselves be nested conditional expressions (see example below).
• Use the following syntax to assign the result 'n.a.' to a condition: #N/A
• You are not limited to using numeric values when creating a conditional user defined
variable (UDV). You can build conditional UDVs using variables that take values of type
string (such as industry codes, legal forms, status, dates, durations etc.) and can assign a
text value to the result of a condition. All values of type string must be placed between
double quotation marks. Also note that all results of a condition must be of the same type
(i.e. you cannot have the result of a condition if it is true to be of type string and of type
numeric if it is false).
• For conditional variables based on dates or durations (see below), comparisons are only
possible if you compare dates to dates and durations to durations
Examples:
In the following examples, text in orange refers to a field code. The field codes referenced below
are generic and are used for example purposes only. Refer to the valid field codes displayed in
parentheses next to the field label in the tree-like structure displayed in the left side of the screen.

• IF(FieldCode1<>#N/A, FieldCode1, #0)

Interpretation: if a value for Field1 is available then the UDV is assigned the value of field1
else display it is assigned the constant 0.

• IF((FieldCode2<#100000) OR (FieldCode3==#0), #N/A, FieldCode2/FieldCode3)

Interpretation: if Field2 is less than 100000 or Field3 is equal to the constant 0, then value
of the UDV is "n.a."; if Field2 is equal or superior to 100000 or Field3 is different to the
constant 0, then the value of the UDV is equal to the ratio of Field2 divided by Field3.

• IF((FieldCode4>=#50) AND (FieldCode5<>FieldCode6), #0, FieldCode4+#50)

Interpretation: if Field4 is superior or equal to 50 and Field5 is different than Field6, then
value of the UDV is equal to the constant 0; if Field4 is less than 50 and Field5 is equal to
Field6, then value of the UDV is equal to field4+50.

• IF(EXIST(FieldCode7), FieldCode7, #0)

Interpretation: if Field7 exists, then the value of the UDV is the value the Fied7, else, the
UDV is equal to 0.

• IF(FieldCode8<#5000, #1, IF((FieldCode8<#10000), #2, #3))

Interpretation: if Field8 is less the 5000 then the value of the UDV is 1; if Field8 is superior
or equal to 5000 but less then 10000, then the value of the UDV is equal to 2; if Field 8 is
superior or equal to 10000 then the value of the UDV is equal to 3.

• IF(FieldCode9/FieldCode10<#50000), "Small Company",

IF((FieldCode9/FieldCode10<#500000), "Medium Company", "Large Company"))
Interpretation: if the ratio Field9 divided by Field10 is less the 50000 then the UDV is
assigned the string "Small company"; if the ratio Field9 divided by Field10 is superior or
equal to 50000 but less then 500000, then the UDV is assigned the string "Medium
company"; if the ratio Field9 divided by Field10 is superior or equal to 500000 then the
UDV is assigned the string "Large company".

• IF(FieldCode11=="ABC", "My Market", "Not My Market")

Interpretation: field11 is of type string; if the value of Field11 is 'ABC' then the UDV will be
assigned the string 'My Market'; if it is not, then it will be assigned the value 'Not My
Market'.

111
Amadeus - User Guide

7.8.2.2.4 Creating time based variables

Some fields included on Amadeus return a value of type date (e.g. date of incorporation, account
date, etc.). With items of this type, you can build UDVs that return a date or a duration (by, for
example, subtracting dates). Moreover, you can build conditional variables by comparing two dates
or durations and returning a value of your choice (e.g. a string).
For these types of variables, the following constants are supported:

• #TODAY: returns today's date.

• #xYxxMxxxD: returns a duration of x years, xx months and xxx days

Examples:
- #1Y = 1 year
- #2M = 2 months
- #20D = 20 days
- #2M20D = 2 months, 20 days
- #1Y2M20D = 1 year, 2 months, 20 days

• #1000: Non-monetary constant, returns the value 1,000 regardless of layout and currency

• $1000: Monetary constant, returns the value 1,000 CUR or equivalent, where CUR is the
currency in which the formula is expressed (see Properties below). The "$" symbol is used
to express a monetary constant, but the chosen currency does not need to be USD. The
relevant exchange rate used is taken at the closing date.
In addition to these constants, you can use the following functions within your formula:

• Date(#dd,#mm,#yyyy): returns a constant date

Example: Date(#31,#12,#2010) returns 31/12/2010

• Day(<date>): returns the day of date

Examples:
- Day(FieldCode1) returns the day associated to field1
- Day(#TODAY) returns 1 if we were the first of the month

• Month(<date>): returns the day of date

Examples:
- Month(FieldCode1) returns the month associated to field1
- Month(#TODAY) returns 1 if we were in January

• Year(<date>): returns the day of date

Examples:
- Year(FieldCode1) returns the Year associated to field1
- Year(#TODAY) returns 2011 if we were in 2011

7.8.2.2.4.1 Relative year

• OPRE[N]
Interpretation: this variable displays the operating revenue of year N, where N is selected
in a list format or a Catalyst's report financial widget.

• OPRE[N-1]
Interpretation: displays the operating revenue in year N-1. If the company has not filed
accounts in year N-1 the value 0 is displayed.

• OPRE[0]
Interpretation: year 0 is the year corresponding to the LAY of the subject company,
displays the operating revenue for the LAY.

• OPRE[1]
Interpretation: year 1 is the year corresponding to the LAY-1 of the subject company.

7.8.2.2.4.2 Absolute year

112
 Company reports

• OPRE[2012]
Interpretation: the displayed value will always be the operating revenue of 2012,
regardless of the layout.

• OPRE[2011]
Interpretation: the displayed value will always be the operating revenue of 2011,
regardless of the layout.
Et cetera.

7.8.2.2.4.3 Current year

• OPRE[Y]
Interpretation: the displayed value will be the operating revenue for the current calendar
year, regardless of the layout. 0 is displayed if current year is not available.

• OPRE[Y-1]
Interpretation: the displayed value will be the operating revenue for the year before the
current calendar year, regardless of the layout. 0 is displayed if relevant year is not
available.

• OPRE[Y-2]
Interpretation: the displayed value will be the operating revenue for two years before the
current calendar year, regardless of the layout (for 2012 if the current year is 2014). 0 is
displayed if relevant year is not available.

7.8.2.2.4.4 Age of company

• AGE_COMPANY: Returns a number of years, calculated from"the current year - the year
of incorporation".

7.8.2.2.4.5 Round function

• ROUND(UDV CODE,number of digits preceded by #): Allows rounding of numerical

values in a user defined formula. For instance, where UDV00001 = 40.17, then it can be
assigned the following effective values:

ROUND(UDV00001,#0) = 40 (if display precision = 0 in Properties)

ROUND(UDV00001,#1) = 40.2 (if display precision = 1 in Properties)
ROUND(UDV00001,#2) = 40.17 (if display precision = 2 in Properties)

Examples:
(Examples below use the item "dateinc" which refers to a company's date of incorporation)

• Year(dateinc)
Interpretation: this variable will return the year when company was incorporated.

• if(Year(#TODAY)-Year(dateinc)>#10, "More than 10 years ago", "Less than 10 years ago")

Interpretation: this variable will return the string "More than 10 years ago" if the company
was incorporated more than 10 years or "Less than 10 years ago" if it was incorporated
less than 10 years ago.

7.8.2.2.5 Concatenating variables

• CONCATENATE(A,B,C)
Interpretation: Concatenates A, B and C, where A, B and C can be Orbis items, UDVs or
strings of free text placed between double quotation marks. For example, you can create a
single field that concatenates all address fields (addr," ",city," ",country) or (addr,"-",city,"-
",country).

113
Amadeus - User Guide

7.8.2.3 Define the properties of a variable

In the Properties tab, you can:

• Define the units in which you want to express the variable

• Define value limits that the variable may take and the value to display if these limits are
reached

• Define how to treat values that are returned as non-available (n.a.) or non-significant
(n.s.);

• Treat "n.a." as zero: If not selected, any item in the calculation being "n.a." will
lead to the whole variable being "n.a.". If selected, then the value "0" will be used
for the calculation.

• Treat "n.s." as zero: if not selected, any item in the calculation being "n.s." will lead
to the whole variable being "n.s.". If selected, then the value "0" will be used for
the calculation.

7.8.3 Multiple data items

A multiple data item is a data item that may have more than one value (e.g. industry
code, auditor name, etc.). The following options allow you to indicate how to treat such type of
fields in a customised sections:

• Display all multiple data items:

Select this option to display all the values of the multiple data items. When you select this
option you can also select the option Repeat the label before each value in the report
to have a label assigned to each value.

• Display the first multiple data item only:

Select this option to display only the first value of the multiple data item.

7.9 Modify data of a company

Access:
• From a company report click the Edit icon of the report toolbar.
• From Settings > User edited data > Companies with edited data, click the name of the
company you want to edit (supposes that you have already created User edited data).

114
 Company reports

Once you enter the company report's in editable mode, the side menu refreshes allowing you to
choose a section to edit, or to update data from the database.

7.9.1 Edit a specific section

From the side menu, click the section you want to edit. The section is displayed in editable mode.
7.9.1.1 Editing a non-financial section
To edit a field within a report section either:

• For free-text fields, click a field and edit the value as required.

• For fields that accept a limited range of values, select the required value from the drop-
down list.

• Where available, click the icon to select a value from a table (displayed in a layered
pop-up).

When you are finished editing, click the icon to save your modifications.
7.9.1.2 Editing a financial section

• You can edit the value of any figure available by simply clicking the value of a field and
typing as needed.

• You can delete a year by clicking the icon corresponding to the year you want to
delete.

• You can change the characteristics of a year (type of statement, closing date, number of
months, currency and units) by clicking the header of the column.

115
Amadeus - User Guide

• You can add a new column of data by clicking the Add a year link. The following dialog
is displayed, which you can use to define the type of statement
(consolidated/unconsolidated), closing date, number of months, currency and units.

Note: If you choose a different type of statement than the ones existing all previous
financial values will be lost.

• When you are finished editing click to save your modifications.

Notes:

• All fields that depend on other fields (by sum, difference, products, etc.) are
automatically updated once all fields on which it depends on are completed. You can still
override the automatic computation of these fields by typing in values as you see fit.

• For all fields that you enter, you can enter values as formulae using standard arithmetic
operators (=, +, -, *, /) instead of the value. If you type for example "=1+1", the cell
will save 2.

• The Check validity of accounts link allows you to check that the different formulae are
valid as well verifying that the Total Assets and Liabilities equal one another and are
non-negative. When you click the link, a message informs you of any inconsistencies
and their origin.

Click the Finish button when you have finished your editing and view the report.

7.9.2 Update data

Click the application server from which you want to update the data. A screen is displayed showing
you which sections, if any, are different between your version and the data available on the
selected server.

116
 Company reports

If you have previously created "My Data" for the selected sections, this data will be overwritten
with the data from the database on the server.

117
8 Analyses
8.1 Segmentation

The Segmentation analysis can be performed on any number of companies, breaking down the
group of companies according to a maximum of two variables. These variables are defined as
primary and secondary, and may include industry, location, a financial variable etc.
The results of the analysis can be viewed in a segmentation table as well as illustrated with a bar
chart or a pie chart.
The principal purpose of the analysis is to target and characterise subgroups of companies
according to two variables, such as industry and turnover or any other pair of relevant variables.
Segmentation analyses are fully customisable to meet your needs:

• You can choose what the number displayed in each class is to represent (the descriptive
variable). By default this represents the number of companies in the class, but you can
choose another variable (such as aggregate number of employees, aggregate turnover
etc.) in which case the number in each cell represents the sum of the selected variable's
value for all the companies in a class.
You can also choose to display figures in each cell as a percentage of the total of the line,
column or total with or without penetrations indices.

• You can choose the classes to use for each variable from a list of predefined
standard/default classes. Standard and default classes can then be modified by changing
the thresholds, deleting or adding a class, inserting subtotals or rendering a class invisible.

8.1.1 Accessing the segmentation analysis

1. You can access the segmentation analysis using the side menu from Amadeus's Home page or
List page by expanding the Segmentation submenu:

2. Choose one of the following options:

New table
Select this option to build your own customised segmentation table.
When you click this option, you are displayed with the Segmentation Wizard.
Predefined analysis

119
Amadeus - User Guide

Choose one of the available predefined segmentation analyses to access the results
according to the two variables displayed in the submenu.
When you select this option, you bypass the Segmentation Wizard and are presented with
the results of the segmentation analysis.
Saved analysis
Choose one of your previously saved segmentation analyses. When you click a previously
saved segmentation analysis, you are presented with the results of the analysis.

Notes:
• The side menu may be displayed on the other side of the screen displayed above.
• The side menu may be hidden. To display it hover of the left or right of the screen.
• The category Saved analysis is not displayed if you have not previously saved a
segmentation analysis.

Tip: If you want to run a segmentation analysis that closely resembles an existing one (saved or
predefined), select that analysis and then customise it by adding or removing elements, modifying
the primary or secondary variable, modifying the descriptive variable or modifying the display
options of the different elements included in the analysis.

8.1.2 Segmentation wizard

8.1.2.1 Overview
As with the other available analyses, the segmentation analysis has a built-in Wizard which you can
use to simplify the construction and customisation of your analysis through an easy step-by-step
procedure.
The Segmentation Wizard is composed of six distinct steps:

• Step 1: specify the first variable (Primary variable) you want to use. This first variable will
be used for the rows of the table.

• Step 2: choose the classes to use for the primary variable

• Step 3: optionally, specify the second variable (Secondary variable) you want to use. This
second variable will be used in the columns of the table.

• Step 4: choose the classes for the secondary variable (if a secondary variable has been
selected).

• Step 5: select the descriptive variable to be displayed in each cell..

• Step 6: select the elements (tables and charts) to include in the segmentation.
8.1.2.2 Navigation between steps
Several buttons and links are displayed at the bottom of each step allowing you to navigate
between the steps of the wizard:

Icon /
Function
Link
Previous Navigate to the previous step of the wizard
Next Navigate to the next step of the wizard.
Go to the results of the segmentation analysis. This button is only active if you
included at least one element in the analysis.

120
 Analyses

At the upper left of the Wizard is a set of numbered icons, which you can click to jump directly to
the corresponding step.

The number highlighted in orange is the current step. Clicking the last icon allows you to view the
results of the segmentation analysis.
8.1.2.3 Loading/saving/modifying/deleting a segmentation analysis
8.1.2.3.1 Saving your segmentation analysis

At each step you have the possibility to save your analysis to either the application server or to
a local hard drive.

Icon Function
Save the analysis to the application server
Save the analysis to a local or network drive (.seg extension file)

Note: These icons are only active if you added at least one element to the analysis.

8.1.2.3.2 Loading a pre-existing analysis

At any time, you can decide to load and view a pre-existing analysis. There are two types of
pre-existing analyses:

• Predefined analyses:
Under the heading Predefined analyses is a list of all the predefined analyses delivered
with the application. Just click the name of the predefined analysis you want to load
and view.

• Previously saved analyses:

Under the heading Saved analysis is a list of all the analyses that you previously saved
on the application server. Just click the name of the saved analysis you want to load
and view.
To load an analysis that you saved on a local hard drive, click the Load from disk link
and browse for the relevant file where you saved (with .seg extension).

Note: You can load a predefined analysis or an analysis saved on the application server
from the side menu. See Accessing the segmentation analysis for more details.

8.1.2.3.3 Modifying a pre-existing analysis

Each pre-existing analysis (saved on server or predefined) can be modified by clicking the
icon of the analysis you want to modify. After clicking this icon, you are presented with the first
step of the wizard.

Note: If you are modifying a saved analysis, you can save it with the same name. You
must choose a different name if you are modifying a predefined analysis.

8.1.2.3.4 Deleting a previously saved analysis

To delete an analysis that you previously saved on the application server, click the
corresponding icon.
8.1.2.4 Segmentation Wizard: Step 1
8.1.2.4.1 Overview

Upon creating a new segmentation analysis, you are presented with the first step of the
Segmentation Wizard.

This first step allows you to select the primary variable to use for the rows of the analysis.

121
Amadeus - User Guide

Step 1 dialog

8.1.2.4.2 Steps to follow

1. Expand the tree-like structure to find the item you want to use for the rows.
2. Select the option button of the required item.

3. If you have selected a financial variable, click the Modify link alongside the item in the
Your selection pane, and select the option button for the year you want to consider, clicking
OK to close the selection pop-up.
4. Click the Next link to move to the next step of the wizard.

Note: If you select the variable Number of employees, you may choose to use estimates of the
value for companies whose value is n.a.
8.1.2.5 Segmentation Wizard: Step 2
8.1.2.5.1 Overview

The second step of the Wizard allows you to choose the classes to use for the variable selected in
step 1.
A class is:

• An interval if the selected variable takes numerical values (e.g. a financial variable)

• A category if the selected variable takes descriptive values (e.g. legal form).
Step 2 dialog

122
 Analyses

8.1.2.5.2 Steps to follow

1. Each variable has its own set of standard/default classes and the option Own classes. Select
the option button for the required classes.
2. The selected classes are displayed in the table underneath:

• If you selected a default/standard class, the relevant class limits or categories are
displayed along with the corresponding row title.

• If you select the option Own classes, an empty table is displayed with the link New
class allowing you to create your classes (see step 3 below for more details).
3. From this table you can customise the rows by:

• Deleting a class:
Click the corresponding to the class you wish to delete.

• Adding a new class:

Click the link New class from within the table:
o Numerical valued variables: a new line is displayed in which you should input
the lower and/or upper threshold limits.
o Descriptive valued variables: a search dialog is displayed in which you can
select the desired values to include in the class.
The title of the row is automatically amended according to your selection.

• Modifying a class:
To modify a class, click the value of the class you want to modify:
o Numerical valued variables: click either of the threshold values and type in a
new value.
o Descriptive valued variables: the search dialog is displayed allowing you to edit
the values included in the class.

• Renaming a row title:

Click the row title you want to rename and type in a new title.

123
Amadeus - User Guide

• Modifying the order of display of the classes:

Drag and drop a class to the required position in the resulting table.

• Inserting subtotals:
Select the check boxes of the classes you want to display the subtotal, then click the
Insert a subtotal button displayed above the table to include a subtotal row. The
subtotal row is displayed at the last line of the table with a default name. If you want
you can change both the position and the name of the subtotal

• Making one or more classes invisible:

Select the check boxes of the classes you want to hide, then click the Toggle
invisibility button displayed above the table. Note that if the selected classes were
previously invisible, they will be now visible again.

Note: An invisible class is always taken into account if included in a subtotal.

4. Click the Next link when you are finished to go to the next step of wizard.

8.1.2.6 Segmentation Wizard: Step 3

8.1.2.6.1 Overview

This third step allows you to select the secondary variable to use for the columns of the analysis.
Step 3 dialog

8.1.2.6.2 Steps to follow

1. Expand the tree-like structure to find the item you want to use for the rows.
2. Select the option button of the required item. By default None is selected meaning that
you will have a one dimension table. If you keep this option selected, you go to step 5 of
the wizard.
3. If you have selected a financial variable, click the Modify link alongside the item in the
Your selection pane, and select the option button for the year you want to consider, clicking
OK to close the selection pop-up.

124
 Analyses

4. Click the Next link to move to the next step of the wizard.

Notes:
• If you select the variable 'Number of employees', you can choose to use estimates of the
value for companies whose value is n.a..
• This step of the wizard is optional.
8.1.2.7 Segmentation Wizard: Step 4
8.1.2.7.1 Overview

The fourth step of the wizard allows you to choose the classes to use for the variable selected in
step 3.
A class is:

• An interval if the selected variable takes numerical values (e.g. a financial variable)

• A category if the selected variable takes descriptive values (e.g. legal form).
Step 4 dialog

8.1.2.7.2 Steps to follow

1. Each variable has its own set of standard/default classes and the option Own classes. Select
the option button for the required classes.
2. The selected classes are displayed in the table underneath:

• If you selected a default/standard class, the relevant class limits or categories are
displayed along with the corresponding row title.

• If you select the option Own classes, an empty table is displayed with the link New
class allowing you to create your classes (see step 3 below for more details).
3. From this table you can customise the rows by:

• Deleting a class:
Click the corresponding to the class you want to delete.

• Adding a new class:

Click the New class link from within the table:

125
Amadeus - User Guide

o Numerical valued variables: a new line is displayed in which you should input
the lower and/or upper threshold limits.
o Descriptive valued variables: a search dialog is displayed in which you can
select the desired values to include in the class.
The title of the column is automatically amended according to your selection.

• Modifying a class:
To modify a class, click the value of the class you want to modify:
o Numerical valued variables: click either of the threshold values and type in a
new value.

o Descriptive valued variables: the search dialog is displayed allowing you to edit
the values included in the class.

• Renaming a column title:

Click the row title you want to rename and type in a new title.

• Modifying the order of display of the classes:

Drag and drop a class to the required position in the resulting table.

• Inserting subtotals:
Select the check boxes of the classes you want to display the subtotal, then click the
Insert a subtotal button displayed above the table to include a subtotal row. The
subtotal row is displayed at the last line of the table with a default name. If you want
you can change both the position and the name of the subtotal.

• Making one or more classes invisible:

Select the check boxes of the classes you want to hide, then click the Toggle
invisibility button displayed above the table. Note that if the selected classes were
previously invisible, they will be now visible again..

Note: An invisible class is always taken into account if included in a subtotal.

4. Click the Next link when you are finished to go to the next step of wizard.

Note: This step is not compulsory if you selected the option None in step 3 of the wizard.

8.1.2.8 Segmentation Wizard: Step 5

8.1.2.8.1 Overview

The fifth step of the wizard allows you to select the descriptive variable. The descriptive variable
refers to the number that is contained in each cell of the segmentation table.

8.1.2.8.2 Steps to follow

1. The default option is the number of companies belonging to each class. If you want to
select a different variable, select the option button of the desired variable from the
available list.
2. Click the Modify link alongside the item in the Your selection pane, and select the option
button for the year you want to consider, clicking OK to close the selection pop-up.
3. Click the Next link when you are finished to go to the next step of wizard.

Example: If you select Aggregate number of employees, the number in each cell represents
the sum of the number of employees of each company included in that class.
8.1.2.9 Segmentation Wizard: Step 6
8.1.2.9.1 Overview

126
 Analyses

The sixth and final step of the Segmentation Wizard allows you to select the elements you wish to
include in the segmentation analysis.
Step 6 dialog

Three types of presentation element can be selected, which are listed under Options:

• Table

• Bar Chart

• Pie Chart

8.1.2.9.2 Steps to follow

1. Click a presentation element to select it. The element is displayed under Your selections.
2. If you want to remove a selected element, clear its check box in the Your selections pane
(clearing the check box in the table header removes all elements).
3. The analysis will present the elements in the same order as they appear in the table. You can
change this by dragging and dropping them to the desired position.

4. Each element can be further customised by clicking the corresponding Display options link.

• Display options for a segmentation table

• Display options for a bar chart

• Display options for a pie chart

5. Click the Finish button to generate the segmentation analysis and view it.

Tip: You can add as many elements of the same type as you want in an analysis (e.g. three
tables or four pie charts). Use the display options to customise each element so you can view the
results from different perspectives.

8.1.3 Working with the results of a segmentation analysis

127
Amadeus - User Guide

8.1.3.1 Overview
After having loaded a predefined analysis, loaded a previously saved analysis or built a new
analysis with the Segmentation Wizard, the results of the analysis are displayed.
The segmentation analysis is composed of elements that can be of three types:

• The segmentation table

• The segmentation bar chart

• The segmentation pie chart.

An analysis can be composed of more than one element of the same type. For example you can
include two tables, three bar charts and one pie chart. The display of each individual element may
be customised allowing you to have a different perspective on the same set of company data.
To customise the display options of an element click the Options link from the upper right corner
of the element.
8.1.3.2 Segmentation results toolbar
The following icons are available in the toolbar displayed at the upper right corner of the analysis:

Icon Function
Add or remove elements (tables, or graphs) from the segmentation analysis
Export the segmentation analysis to an external document of a specified format
(Excel or PDF)
Export and send the segmentation analysis by email to a selection of recipients
Print out the segmentation analysis.

Notes:
• You can modify the settings defined at any step of the Segmentation Wizard by clicking the
step number from the icons displayed at the top left of the segmentation analysis.

• Each individual element can be hidden ( ), deleted ( ) or maximised ( ).

8.1.3.3 Segmentation table
8.1.3.3.1 Overview

The segmentation table organises the companies included in the analysis in a two dimensional
table. The axes are defined by the primary variable (rows) and secondary variable (columns).
The numbers displayed in each cell are defined by the descriptive variable. The descriptive variable
used is displayed in the upper right corner of table.

Table 1: - Primary variable: Incorporation date (5 classes)

- Secondary variable: Number of employees (4 classes)
- Reference year: last available year
- Descriptive variable: Number of companies

128
 Analyses

- Display options: Value.

8.1.3.3.2 Working with a segmentation table

You can change the order of the columns by dragging and dropping them to the desired position.
You can click a cell to select companies included in the cell in order to view them or save them (see
below)
The icons displayed within the table are defined below:

Icon Function
Delete the corresponding line or column
Sort the table according to the column
Transpose the lines and the columns of the table (the primary variable will become the
secondary variable and vice versa)

8.1.3.3.3 Segmentation table toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the table's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
View View the companies included in the previously selected cell(s) in your list of
companies results.
Save Save the companies included in the previously selected cell(s).
companies
Options Change the display options of the table
Hide (collapse) the segmentation table (restore the element by clicking ).
Open/maximise the table in a new browser window.
Remove the segmentation table from the analysis.

8.1.3.4 Segmentation bar chart

8.1.3.4.1 Overview

The bar chart allows you to illustrate the breakdown of a primary variable's class (row) in terms of
the classes of the secondary variable (columns) on the basis of the selected descriptive variable.
The descriptive variable used is displayed in the grey circle at the bottom left of the chart.

129
Amadeus - User Guide

Bar Chart 1: breakdown of turnover (4 classes) for all companies included in the group based on
the Number of companies .

8.1.3.4.2 Working with a bar chart

From the left menu, you can:

• Change the primary variable's class (row) that is broken down.

• Remove/add classes of the secondary variable (columns) from the chart.

• Show or hide 'n.a.' values and empty classes.

• Invert the primary and secondary variables by clicking .

You can hide the left menu by clicking Hide.

8.1.3.4.3 Bar chart toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the bar chart toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the bar chart
Hide (collapse) the bar chart (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the bar chart in a new window. You can also double-click in the
section to maximise it.
Remove the bar chart from the analysis.

8.1.3.5 Segmentation pie chart

8.1.3.5.1 Overview

130
 Analyses

The pie chart allows you to illustrate the breakdown of a primary variable's class (row) in terms of
the classes of the secondary variable (columns) on the basis of the selected descriptive variable.
The descriptive variable used in is displayed in the grey circle at the bottom left of the chart.

Pie Chart 1: breakdown of turnover (4 classes) for companies incorporated between 1990 and
1999 based on the Number of companies .

8.1.3.5.2 Working with a pie chart

From the left menu, you can:

• Change the primary variable's class (row) that is broken down

• Change the display options of the pie chart.

• Invert the primary and secondary variables by clicking

You can hide the left menu by clicking Hide.

8.1.3.5.3 Pie chart toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the pie chart toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the pie chart
Hide (collapse) the pie chart (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the pie chart in a new window. You can also double-click
anywhere in the element to maximise it.
Remove the pie chart from the analysis.

8.1.4 Display options

8.1.4.1 Display options for a segmentation table

131
Amadeus - User Guide

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 6 of the Segmentation Wizard and click the Display options link from the
corresponding table.
• From the segmentation table's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options
link.

Two categories of options are available from the tabs: General and Classes

8.1.4.1.1 General

Segmentation table: general display options dialog

1. Name:
Use the text box to change the name of the segmentation table.
2. Display values or percentages:
The options under this section allow you to display the number in each cell as a values,
percentage or penetration index.

The Penetration index measures the representation of a class by comparing it with the average
of the companies included in the analysis. An index greater than 100 indicates an over
representation of the class as compared to the average of the companies. An index less than
100 indicates an underrepresentation of the class as compared to the average of the
companies.
For example, if 75% of the companies with a profit of more than 50 million USD employ more
than 1000 people and on average only 50% of all the companies included in the company set
employ over 1000 people, the penetration index for companies with more then 50 million USD
of profit would be equal to 150 (= [75/50]*100).

• Values (default option):

Display figures in terms of the value of the descriptive variable.

• Base = column totals:

Select this option to calculate and display the weight (in %) of each cell in terms of the
total of the column to which it belongs to (conditional frequencies)Example

132
 Analyses

This table informs us for example that :

• 30.94% of the companies included in the company set with a turnover

comprised between 75 000 EUR and 300 000 EUR were incorporated
between 5 and 10 years ago.

• 69.01% of the companies included in the company were incorporated more

than ten years ago.

• Base = row totals:

Select this option to calculate and display the weight (in %) of each cell in terms of the
total of the row to which it belongs to (conditional frequencies).Example

This table informs us for example that:

• 85.55% of companies of the company set that were incorporated less than
one year ago have a turnover of less then 75 000 EUR.

• 25.36% of all companies included in the set have a turnover of more then
750 000 EUR.

• Base = complete total:

Select this option to calculate and display the weight (in %) of each cell in terms of the
total value of the companies included in the analysis. (absolute frequencies).Example

• Base = column totals including penetration indices:

Select this option to calculate and display the weight (in %) of each cell in terms of the
total of the column to which it belongs to (conditional frequencies) as display the
penetration index of each cell.
Example

This table informs us for example that 70.11% of the companies with more than
750 000 EUR of turnover have been incorporated more than ten years ago. The

133
Amadeus - User Guide

percentage of companies incorporated more than ten years ago as a whole is

49.18%. The penetration index for this cell is therefore 143 [=100 x (70.11/49.18)]
Moreover, with this table, one could conclude that, in relative terms, companies
incorporated more than ten years ago are more inclined to have a larger turnover.

• Base = row totals including penetration indices:

Select this option to calculate and display the weight (in %) of each cell in terms of the
total of the row to which it belongs to (conditional frequencies) as display the penetration
index of each cell.
Example

This table informs us for example that 85.55 of companies incorporated less than
one year ago have a turnover of less than 75 000 EUR. The percentage of
companies with less than 75 000 EUR of turnover is as a whole is 23.04%. The
penetration index for this cell is therefore 371 [=100 x (85.55/23.04).

• Penetration indices:
Select this option to calculate and display the penetration indices of each cell. Example

A Penetration Index greater than 100 indicates an over representation of the class
as compared to the average of the company set. An index smaller than 100
indicates an underrepresentation of the class as compared to the average of the
company set.

Note: The penetration indices and percentages calculated depend intrinsically on the
descriptive variable chosen in the segmentation table. In the examples above, the descriptive
variable is the number of companies.
3. Display 'n.a.' values
Companies that have a non-available (n.a.) value for the variable used for the rows or
columns are grouped in a row or column labelled 'n.a.'. Companies with n.a. for one or both
variables can be excluded from the segmentation table analysis by clearing this check box.
4. Display empty classes:
Clear this check box to remove the row(s) or column(s) that do not contain any observations.

8.1.4.1.2 Classes

Segmentation table: classes display options dialog

134
 Analyses

The options under this category of options allow you to exclude (or restore) one or more classes
from segmentation analysis.

Note: Modifying settings in this category will affect the display options of all elements included
in the analysis.

8.1.4.2 Display options for a bar chart (segmentation)

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 6 of the Segmentation Wizard and click the Display options link for the
corresponding bar chart.
• From the bar chart's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Two categories of options are available from the tabs: General and Classes

8.1.4.2.1 General

Bar chart: general display options dialog

135
Amadeus - User Guide

1. Name:
Type in the text box to change the name of the bar chart.
2. Display values or percentages:
The options in this section allow you to display the height of each bar in the chart in terms of
values, percentages or penetration indices.
The Penetration index measures the representation of a class by comparing it with the average
of the companies included in the analysis. An index greater than 100 indicates an over
representation of the class as compared to the average of the companies. An index less than
100 indicates an underrepresentation of the class as compared to the average of the
companies.
For example, if 75% of the companies with a profit of more than 50 million USD employ more
than 1000 people, and on average only 50% of all the companies included in the company set
employ over 1000 people, the penetration index for companies with more then 50 million USD
of profit would be equal to 150 (= [75/50]*100).

• Values (default option):

The height of each bar will correspond to the value of the descriptive variable for each
column in a given row.

• Base = column totals:

Select this option to display the height of each bar as the percentage of the total of the
columns for each column of a given row. (conditional frequencies).

• Base = row totals:

Select this option to display the height of each bar as the percentage of the total of the
rows for each column of a given row (conditional frequencies).

• Base = complete total:

Select this option to display the height of each bar as the percentage of the total of
companies for each column of a given row (absolute frequencies).

• Penetration indices:
Select this option to display the height of each bar as the penetration index for each
column of a given row.

Note: The penetration indices and percentages calculated depend intrinsically on the
descriptive variable chosen in the segmentation analysis.

136
 Analyses

3. Display 'n.a.' values

Companies that have a non-available (n.a.) value for the variable used for the rows or
columns are grouped in a category labelled 'n.a.'. Companies with n.a. for one or both
variables can be excluded from the bar chart by clearing this check box.
4. Display empty classes:
Clear this check box to remove the row(s) or column(s) that do not contain any observations.

Note: Displaying or hiding 'n.a.' values and empty classes may be done directly from the bar
chart.

8.1.4.2.2 Classes

Segmentation bar chart: classes display options dialog

The options under this category of options allow you to exclude (or restore) one or more classes
from segmentation analysis.

Note: Modifying settings under this category will affect the display options of all elements
included in the analysis.

8.1.4.3 Display options for a pie chart (segmentation)

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 6 of the Segmentation Wizard and click the Display options link in the
corresponding pie chart.
• From the pie chart's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Two categories of options are available from the tabs: General and Classes.

Note: Modifying the general settings of the pie chart may be edited directly from the pie chart
itself.

8.1.4.3.1 General

Pie chart: general display options dialog

137
Amadeus - User Guide

1. Name:
Use the text box to change the name of the pie chart.
2. Display options:

• Angle:
Rotate the pie chart around the axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to the
surface in a clockwise fashion. The first slice starts at the angle selected from the drop-
down list. At 0° the first slice's left border starts at the top of the pie chart. Move the first
slice to the right by increasing the values (0° to 180°). Decrease to the values (from 0° to
-180°) to move the first slice to the left.

• Tilt:
Rotate the pie chart along its horizontal axis, i.e. the pie chart will rotate vertically. At 0°
the pie chart is flat. At 70° the pie chart is slanted to its maximum.

• Number of slices:
Choose the number of slices (classes) to display in the pie chart.
3. Sorted by:
Choose how the slices are sequenced clockwise.

• Values: the first slice represents the class with the highest value in terms of the value
of descriptive variable.

• Classes: the first slice represents the class with the highest value in terms variable
representing the class.
4. Display 'n.a.' values:
Companies that have a non-available (n.a.) value for the variable used for the rows or
columns are grouped in a category labelled 'n.a.'. Companies with n.a. for one or both
variables can be excluded from the pie chart by clearing this check box.

8.1.4.3.2 Classes

Segmentation pie chart: classes display options dialog

138
 Analyses

The options under this category of options allow you to exclude (or restore) one or more classes
from segmentation analysis.

Note: Modifying settings under this category will affect the display options of all elements
included in the analysis.

8.2 Peer analysis

The peer analysis is a benchmarking tool you can use to compare a group of companies against
one another, or against some summary statistics of the group of companies. The comparison group
of companies is composed of the companies currently selected from the list of results.

The distinction between a peer analysis and a peer report is that the peer report (available from
the company report ide menu) compares a subject company to a predefined peer group (defined
by a proximity variable, year and/or industry) whereas a peer analysis enables you to fully
customise the composition of the group companies you want to compare and include a subject
company. Moreover, the peer report is considered as a section of a company report whereas a peer
analysis is independent of any company report.
The comparison can be based on any variable available from any financial section of the company
report for any of the available years.
The results of the peer analysis can viewed in a table and illustrated with a variety of charts and
graphs:

• Bar chart

• Pie chart

• Lorenz curve

• Distribution chart

• Indices chart

• Quantile chart

Note: You can run this analysis on maximum 2,500 companies.

139
Amadeus - User Guide

8.2.1 Accessing the peer analysis

1. You can access the peer analysis using the side menu from Amadeus's Home page or List page
by expanding the Peer analysis submenu:

2. Choose one of the following options:

New analysis
Select this option to build your own customised peer analysis. When you select this option,
you are presented with the Peer Analysis Wizard.
Predefined analyses

Click one of the available predefined analyses to access the results of the peer analysis.
When you select a predefined analysis, you bypass the Peer Analysis Wizard and are
immediately presented with the results of the peer analysis.
Saved analyses
Choose one of your previously saved peer analyses. When you click a previously saved peer
analysis, you are directly presented with the results of the peer analysis.

Notes:
• If you do not select companies from the list before accessing the peer analysis, all
companies included in your results are considered for the analysis.
• The analysis is only available if a maximum of 500 companies are selected for the analysis.
• The side menu shown above may be displayed on the other side of the screen.
• The category Saved analysis is not displayed if you have not previously saved a peer
analysis.

8.2.2 Peer analysis wizard

8.2.2.1 Overview

140
 Analyses

As with the other available analyses, the peer analysis has a built-in Wizard that you can use to
construct and customise your analysis using an easy step-by-step procedure.
The Peer Analysis Wizard is composed of three distinct steps:
1. Step 1: select the financial variables you would like compare the companies with.
2. Step 2: select the years of accounting data you wish to compare.
3. Step 3: select the elements (tables and charts) to include in the results of the peer
analysis.
8.2.2.2 Navigation between steps
Several buttons and links are displayed at the bottom of each step allowing to navigate between
the steps of the Wizard:

Icon / Link Function

Previous Navigate to the previous step of the wizard
Next Navigate to the next step of the wizard.
Go to the results of the peer analysis.
This button is only active if you have completed each step of the Wizard.

At the upper left of the Wizard is a set of numbered icons, which you can click to jump directly to
the corresponding step.

The number highlighted in orange is the current step. Clicking the last icon allows you to view the
results of the peer analysis and is only active if each step of the Wizard has been completed.
8.2.2.3 Loading/saving/modifying/deleting a peer analysis
8.2.2.3.1 Saving your peer analysis

At each step you have the option to save your analysis to either the application server or to a
local or networked drive.

Icon Function
Save the analysis to the application server.
Save the analysis to a local or network drive (.peer extension file).

Note: These icons are only active if you completed each step of the Wizard.

8.2.2.3.2 Loading a pre-existing analysis

At any step of the Wizard, you may decide to load and view a pre-existing analysis. There are
two types of pre-existing analyses:

• Predefined analyses:
Under the heading Predefined analyses are listed all the predefined analyses delivered
with Amadeus. Just click the name of the predefined analysis you want to load and
view.

• Previously saved analyses:

Under the heading Saved analysis are listed all the analyses that you previously saved
on the application server. Just click the name of the saved analysis you want to load
and view.
To load an analysis that you saved on a local hard drive, click the Load from disk link
and browse for the relevant file (with .peer extension).

Note: You can load a predefined analysis, or an analysis saved on the application server,
from the side menu. See Accessing the peer analysis for more details.

141
Amadeus - User Guide

8.2.2.3.3 Modifying a pre-existing analysis

Each pre-existing analysis (saved on server or predefined) can be modified by clicking the
icon of the analysis you want to modify. After clicking this icon, you presented with the first
step of the wizard.

Note: If you are modifying a saved analysis, you can save the analysis with the same
name after having modified it. You must choose a different name if you are modifying a
predefined analysis.

8.2.2.3.4 Deleting a previously saved analysis

To delete an analysis that you previously saved on the application server, click the
corresponding icon.
8.2.2.4 Peer Analysis Wizard: Step 1
8.2.2.4.1 Overview

Upon creating a new peer analysis, you are presented with the first step of the Peer Analysis
Wizard. This first step allows you to select the variables you want to use in order to compare the
group of companies.
Step 1 dialog

8.2.2.4.2 Steps to follow

1. Under Options, are listed all the financial items you can select for the analysis. To select a
variable, either:

• Use the tree-like structure and click the financial items you want to select.

• Use the search feature by typing in a keyword in the text box at the bottom of the left
pane, clicking the button and selecting the items from the list of matched items.
2. The selected variables is displayed under Your selection. The variables will be used in the
display elements that you add to the analysis in the same order as they appear under Your
selection. You can change this order by dragging and dropping them to the desired
position.

3. Click the Next link to move to the next step of the wizard.

142
 Analyses

Notes:
• You cannot select more than 24 variables per analysis.
• If you are modifying an analysis that already has some elements included, the variables
that you select in this step will not modify the variables used in the elements that have
already been included. Changing the variable here only determines the variables that will
be used in elements that you add subsequently.
To change the variable of an element modify the element's display options.
8.2.2.5 Peer Analysis Wizard: Step 2
8.2.2.5.1 Overview

The second step of the wizard allows you to select the years of accounting data you wish to
compare.
Step 2 dialog

8.2.2.5.2 Steps to follow

1. Select the Relative years or Absolute years tab at the top of the wizard.
2. Select the check box(es) corresponding to the year(s) you want to consider for your
analysis.
3. Click the Next link to move on to the next step of the wizard.

Note: If you are modifying an analysis that already has some elements included, the years
that you select in this step will not modify the years used in the elements that have already been
included. Changing the years here only determines the years that will be considered in elements
that you add subsequently.
To change the years of an element modify the element's display options.
8.2.2.6 Peer Analysis Wizard: Step 3
8.2.2.6.1 Overview

The third and final step of the Peer Analysis Wizard allows you to select the display elements you
want to include in the results of the peer analysis.

Step 3 dialog

143
Amadeus - User Guide

Seven types of presentation element can be selected, which are listed under Options:

• Table
• Bar chart
• Pie chart
• Lorenz curve
• Distribution chart
• Indices chart
• Quantiles chart

8.2.2.6.2 Steps to follow

1. To add an element click it. The selected element is then displayed under Your selections.
2. To remove an element, clear its check box under Your selections (clearing the check box in
the header removes all elements)..
3. The analysis results will present the elements in the same order as they appear in the table.
You can change this by dragging and dropping them to the desired position.
4. Each element will display the results according to your choices in step 1 and step 2 of the
Wizard. You can modify the year and the variable, and can further customise the display of
each element by clicking the corresponding Display options link.
 Display options for a table
 Display options for a bar chart
 Display options for a pie chart
 Display options for a Lorenz curve
 Display options for a distribution chart
 Display options for a indices chart
 Display options for a quantiles chart
5. Click the Finish button to generate and view the results of the peer analysis.

TIP: You may add as many elements of the same type as you wish in one same analysis. Use
the Display options to customise each element so you can view the results from different
perspectives.

144
 Analyses

Note: You can include a maximum of three tables and six charts in an analysis.

8.2.3 Working with the results of a peer analysis

8.2.3.1 Overview
After having loaded a predefined analysis, loaded a previously saved analysis or built a new
analysis with the Peer Analysis Wizard, the results of the analysis are displayed.
The results of a peer analysis is composed of elements that can be of seven types:

• Table
• Bar chart
• Pie chart
• Lorenz curve
• Distribution chart
• Indices chart
• Quantile chart
An analysis can be composed of more than one element of the same type but are limited to three
tables and up to six charts (of any type) per analysis. The display of each element can be
customised allowing you to have a different perspective on the same set of data.
To customise the display options of an element click the Options link in the upper right of the
element.
Use the scrollbar to navigate between the elements included in your analysis.
8.2.3.2 Analysis results toolbar
The following icons are available in the toolbar displayed at the top right of the analysis:

Icon Function
Add or remove elements (tables or graphs) from the peer analysis
Export the results of the peer analysis to an external document of a
specified format (Excel or PDF)
Export and send the results of the peer analysis by email to a selection of
recipients
Print out the results of the peer analysis.

Notes:
• You can modify the settings defined at any step of the Peer Analysis Wizard by clicking the
step number from the icons displayed at the top left of the results.

Modifying a step in the Wizard only determines the variable and year that will be used in
elements that you subsequently add to the analysis and not the elements already included
in the analysis.
• Each individual element can be hidden ( ), deleted ( ) or maximised ( ).

8.2.3.3 Table (peer analysis)

8.2.3.3.1 Overview

The peer table displays the values of the selected variables for each company included in the
analysis.
Peer table

145
Amadeus - User Guide

The presentation of the data depends on the layout selected in the table's display options. You can
have any of the following:
i. One table per year (with one company per line and one variable per column, or with one
variable per line and one company per column)

ii. One table per variable (with one company per line and one year per column, or with one
year per line and one company per column)
iii. One table per company (with one year per line and one variable per column, or with one
variable per line and one year per column)
For a new analysis built with the Peer Analysis Wizard, the default layout is one table per year with
the companies on the lines and the variables in the columns.
A number of summary statistics (such as the average, median, standard deviation, etc.) are also
displayed in the table. The position and number of summary statistics displayed in the table can be
modified from the table's display options.

The figure displayed next to the value of each variable represents either the companies rank or the
quartile or decile to which the company belongs (also selectable from the table's display options.

8.2.3.3.2 Working with a peer table

8.2.3.3.2.1 Sorting the table

As long as you do not have the companies in the columns of the table, or do not have one table per
company, you can sort the table according to any column.
To do so, click within the column header ( : indicates an ascending sort; : indicates a
descending sort).

8.2.3.3.2.2 Resizing the table

You can modify the width of each column included in the table by clicking a column border and
dragging it to the desired width.

146
 Analyses

8.2.3.3.2.3 Changing the column order

If you have the variables displayed in the columns, you can change the order of a column by
clicking its header and dragging it to the desired position.

8.2.3.3.2.4 Deleting a line or a column

To remove a line or a column in the table click the corresponding to the line or column you want
to delete (you can restore a deleted line or column from the table's display options).

8.2.3.3.2.5 Viewing the report of a company

If the table is presented with one table per year, with the companies displayed in the lines, you can
view the report of a company by clicking its name. A new window opens displaying the company's
report..

8.2.3.3.3 Peer table toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the table's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the table.
Hide (collapse) the table (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the table in a new window. You can also double-click in the
section to maximise it.
Remove the table from the analysis.

8.2.3.4 Bar chart (peer analysis)

8.2.3.4.1 Overview

The bar chart illustrates the analysis with a histogram plotting the value of all, or some, companies
for a specific variable in a specific year.

Bar chart

147
Amadeus - User Guide

Each bar represents either a company or a summary statistic (average, median or standard
deviation). The height of each bar is determined by the value of the variable for the year selected
from the left menu.

8.2.3.4.2 Working with a bar chart

8.2.3.4.2.1 Selecting the companies to plot

By default all companies included in the analysis are plotted in the bar chart. From the bar chart's
left menu you can remove companies from the bar chart by clearing the check boxes corresponding
to the companies' names.
The Select all companies check box allows you to easily remove or include all companies from
the bar chart.

Note: Removing companies only determines the companies plotted in the bar chart and not the
companies included in the analysis. To remove companies from the analysis and not just from the
bar chart, select the Companies tab from any element's display options.

8.2.3.4.2.2 Changing the variable

You can plot the values of any variable selected for the analysis one at a time from the left menu.
To do so simply select the option button corresponding to the variable you want to plot..

Note: You can also change the variable from the bar chart's display options.

8.2.3.4.2.3 Changing the year

From the left menu, you can choose the year of data to display from the Select a year drop-down
menu. You can choose any year selected for the analysis.

Note: You can also change the year from the bar chart's display options.

148
 Analyses

8.2.3.4.2.4 Showing/hiding summary statistics

The left menu allows you to select the summary statistics you want to include in the chart. The
summary statistics that you can display are the median, the standard deviation and the average.
Select/clear the check box(es) corresponding to the statistic(s) you want to include/remove from
the chart.

Note: You can also choose which statistics to display from the bar chart's display options.

8.2.3.4.3 Bar chart toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the chart's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the chart.
Hide (collapse) the chart (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the chart in a new window. You can also double-click in the
section to maximise it.
Remove the chart from the analysis.

Note: You can hide the left menu by clicking Hide.

8.2.3.5 Pie chart (peer analysis)
8.2.3.5.1 Overview

The pie chart allows you to illustrate the breakdown of an additive variable across the group of
companies for a specific year.
Pie chart

149
Amadeus - User Guide

The 360° circle represents the sum of the variable for the year selected from the left menu across
the companies included in the analysis. Each segment represents the share of a company in terms
of this variable across the group of companies.
Example: If the aggregated value of variable N is 360,000 USD and the value of variable N for
company A is 36,000 USD, then the angle of the slice representing company A is 36° [= (36,000 /
360,000) × 360°].
By default, the five companies with the largest value for the selected variable for the selected year
are plotted on the chart. The last slice represents the aggregated value of the rest of the group.

8.2.3.5.2 Working with a pie chart

8.2.3.5.2.1 Changing the companies plotted on the chart

You can change the companies plotted on the chart from the left menu by clearing the check
box of a company already included and selecting the check box of a company you want to
include.
To add one or more companies to the chart without having to remove a company, you first
need to change the number of slices the chart contains from the display options (see below).

8.2.3.5.2.2 Changing the variable

All the variables selected for the analysis are listed under Select a variable in the left
menu. To change the variable, select the option button corresponding to the variable you
want to represent.

Note: Only additive variables can be plotted. If you select a non-additive variable the
following message is displayed: "The chosen variable being non-additive, this chart is not
meaningful".

8.2.3.5.2.3 Changing the year

All the years selected for the analysis are listed in the drop-down menu Available years in
the left menu. To change the year, expand the menu and select the year you want to
consider.

8.2.3.5.2.4 Modifying the display options

From the left menu you can modify how the pie chart is displayed according to three criteria:

• Angle:
This option allows you to rotate the pie chart around the axis passing through the
centre of the circle and perpendicular to the surface in a clockwise fashion. The first
slice starts at the angle selected from the drop-down list. At 0° the first slice's left
border starts at the top of the pie chart. Move the first slice to the right by
increasing the values (0° to 180°). Decrease to the values (from 0° to -180°) to
move the first slice to the left..

• Tilt:
This option allows you to rotate the pie chart along its horizontal axis. At 0° the pie
chart is flat. At 70° the pie chart is slanted to its maximum.

• Number of slices:
This option allows you to select the maximum number of slices (companies) that the
pie chart can contain. Increase the number of slices to add more companies to the
chart.

8.2.3.5.2.5 Showing positive/negative values

150
 Analyses

Some variables accept both positive and negative values. Because it is impossible to plot
both negative and positive values in the same chart, an option allowing you to select which
ones you want to plot is available from the left menu under the heading Show.

8.2.3.5.3 Pie chart toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the pie chart toolbar are defined hereunder:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the pie chart
Hide (collapse) the pie chart (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the pie chart in a new window. You can also double-click
anywhere in the element to maximise it.
Remove the pie chart from the analysis.

Notes:
• You can hide the left menu by clicking Hide.
• Except for the choice of companies to display, all the options available from the left menu
are also available from the chart's display options.

8.2.3.6 Lorenz curve (peer analysis)

8.2.3.6.1 Overview

The Lorenz curve allows you to illustrate the peer analysis with a chart measuring the
concentration of an additive variable within the group of companies and positioning a company on
the curve (represented with a orange segment on the Lorenz curve itself).
Lorenz curve

151
Amadeus - User Guide

All the companies included in the analysis are positioned in the X-axis. The order in which the
companies are plotted is determined by their position in the distribution of the variable that is
selected. If, for example, the group is composed of 20 companies the first 5% of the axis
represents the company with highest value for the selected variable. The following 5% of the axis
represents the company with the second highest figure of the group and so on.
The Y-axis represents the value of the selected variable in percentage of the total of the group.
The dashed line represents a situation of perfect equality in terms of concentration of the variable
across the group (it shows a situation where the top X% of the companies represent X% of the
total of the group).
The Lorenz curve is the blue arc joining the points [0;0] and [100;100]. The more the Lorenz curve
deviates from the dashed line, the more the variable is concentrated in small number of
companies . For example if the Lorenz curve passes by the point [10;40], this indicates the 10% of
the companies account for 40% of the value of the group.
The Gini coefficient is also given under the table. The Gini coefficient is the ratio of the area
between the Lorenz curve and the 45° degree line and the area underneath the 45° degree line.
The coefficient always lies between 0 and 1: the closer it is to 1, the more a variable is
concentrated in a small group of companies.

8.2.3.6.2 Working with a Lorenz curve

8.2.3.6.2.1 Displaying the position of a company

The Lorenz curve enables you to position a company on the curve. The name of the company
currently plotted is displayed in the legend underneath the chart and is represented on the Lorenz
curve with an orange segment.
To change the company select the option button corresponding to the company name you want to
position from the left menu.

8.2.3.6.2.2 Changing the variable

All the variables selected for the analysis are listed under Select a variable in the left menu. To
change the variable, click the option button corresponding to the variable you want to represent.

Note: Only additive variables can be plotted. If you select a non-additive variable the following
message is displayed: "The chosen variable being non-additive, this chart is not meaningful".

8.2.3.6.2.3 Changing the year

All the years selected for the analysis are listed in the drop-down menu Available years in the left
menu. To change the year, select from the drop-down menu..

8.2.3.6.2.4 Showing positive/negative values

Some variables may accept both positive and negative values, but because it is impossible to plot
both values in the same chart, you must select an option button under the heading Show.

8.2.3.6.3 Lorenz curve toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the Lorenz curve's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the Lorenz curve.
Hide (collapse) the chart (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the Lorenz curve in a new window. You can also double-click
anywhere in the element to maximise it.
Remove the chart from the analysis.

152
 Analyses

Notes:
• You can hide the left menu by clicking Hide.
• Except for the choice of companies to display, all the options available from the left menu
are also available from the chart's display options.

8.2.3.7 Distribution chart (peer analysis)

8.2.3.7.1 Overview

The distribution chart displays a graphical representation of the distribution of a variable within the
group of companies included in the analysis for a specific year and allows you to position a
company within this distribution.
Distribution chart

Each cylinder represents a quartile. The height of each cylinder is determined by the difference
between the higher and lower limit of each quartile.
The blue horizontal line represents the position within the distribution of the company selected in
the left menu (see below for more details).
Underneath the table are displayed the relative interquartile interval, the number of observations,
the standard deviation and the name of the company currently positioned in the chart.

8.2.3.7.2 Working with a distribution chart

8.2.3.7.2.1 Displaying the position of a company in the chart

Each company included in the analysis can be plotted in the distribution chart by selecting a
company name from the menu displayed to the left of the chart.
Within the chart a horizontal line is displayed allowing you to see how the company is positioned in
the distribution. The name of the selected company is displayed in the legend underneath the
chart.

8.2.3.7.2.2 Changing the variable

153
Amadeus - User Guide

From the left menu you can modify the variable on which the distribution is based by clicking the
name of variable.

Note: You can also change the variable from the chart's display options.

8.2.3.7.2.3 Changing the year

The left menu includes a drop-down menu labelled Available years allowing to change the year on
which the chart is based.

Note: You can also change the year from the chart's display options.

8.2.3.7.2.4 Including/removing the first and last deciles

Due to the fact that the set on which the analysis is based might contain extreme values and
therefore skew your analysis, an option to remove the first and last deciles is available.
Clear the Include 1 and 10 deciles check box to remove these extreme values. When you
remove these values, the first and last quartile contain respectively 15% (= 25% - 10%) of the
observations.

Note: You can also remove these deciles from the chart's display options.

8.2.3.7.3 Distribution chart toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the chart's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the chart.
Hide (collapse) the chart (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the chart in a new window. You can also double-click in the
section to maximise it.
Remove the chart from the analysis.

8.2.3.8 Indices chart (peer analysis)

8.2.3.8.1 Overview

The indices chart displays the evolution of a financial item in a line chart, expressed in indices, for
up to five companies, and allows you to compare these companies with the average, median and
standard deviation of the group.
Indices chart

154
 Analyses

8.2.3.8.2 Working with an indices chart

8.2.3.8.2.1 Adding/removing a company

To add/remove a company plotted on the chart select/clear the check box corresponding to the
company you are interested in from the left menu. You can include up to five companies.

8.2.3.8.2.2 Changing the variable

All the variables selected for the analysis are listed under Select a variable in the left menu. To
change the variable, click the option button corresponding to the variable you want to represent.

Note: You can also change the variable from the chart's display options.

8.2.3.8.2.3 Changing the base year

The base year is the year used to calculate the indices. You can change this base year using the
drop-down menu Select the base year from the left menu.

Note: You can also change the base year from the chart's display options.

8.2.3.8.2.4 Showing/hiding summary statistics

You have the option to show or hide the evolution of summary statistics such as the average,
median and standard deviation.
Select/clear the check box(es) corresponding to the statistic(s) you want to include/remove from
the chart.

Note: You can also choose which statistics to display from the chart's display options.

8.2.3.8.3 Indices chart toolbar

155
Amadeus - User Guide

The icons and links displayed in the chart's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the chart.
Hide (collapse) the chart (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the chart in a new window. You can also double-click in the
section to maximise it.
Remove the chart from the analysis.

8.2.3.9 Quantiles chart (peer analysis)

8.2.3.9.1 Overview

The quantiles chart allows you to illustrate the analysis with a line chart displaying the evolution of
a variable in either the quartiles or the deciles of the group for up to 15 companies.
The chart basically allows you to see the evolution of one or more companies' variable within the
distribution of the group.
Quantiles chart

The choice of displaying the evolution within the quartiles or the deciles of the group is made from
the chart's display options.

8.2.3.9.2 Working with a quantiles chart

8.2.3.9.2.1 Adding/removing a company

To add/remove a company plotted on the chart select/clear the check box of the company you
want to add/remove from the left menu. You can include up to 15 companies.

8.2.3.9.2.2 Changing the variable

All the variables selected for the analysis are listed under Select a variable in the left menu. To
change the variable, click the option button corresponding to the variable you want to represent.

156
 Analyses

Note: You can also change the variable from the chart's display options.

8.2.3.9.3 Quantiles chart toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the chart's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the chart.
Hide (collapse) the chart (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the chart in a new window. You can also double-click in the
section to maximise it.
Remove the chart from the analysis.

8.2.4 Display options

8.2.4.1 Display options for a peer table

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Peer Analysis Wizard and click the Display options link in the
corresponding table.
• From the table's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Peer table display options dialog

There are six categories of display options for the table, each represented by a tab. Use the tabs to
navigate between categories. By default you presented with the General tab.
General
The general display options allow you to modify the table's name and select the statistical
parameters you want to display in the table.

157
Amadeus - User Guide

• Name:
The table's current name is displayed in this text box. You can modify it by typing in
a new name.

• Select the items you want to display:

By default the median, standard deviation and average are all displayed at the top
of the table. Select/clear the check box(es) corresponding to the parameter(s) you
want to display/remove from the table.
Each parameter can be displayed at the top or the bottom of the table.

• Select the parameter you want to display after each value:

This option allows you to select the figure to display next to each value in the table.
You can select the to display the rank, quartile, decile or nothing.
Variables

Use the Variables tab to modify the variables included in the table.
In the left pane are listed all the financial items you can select for the analysis.
In the tree-like structure, the first node, Variables in your analysis, lists all the variables
currently selected for the analysis. The items that are selected here are currently included in
the table.
The second node, Financial sections and ratios, lists all the variables that can be displayed
in the table.
To add one or more variables, either:

• Use the tree-like structure and click the financial items you want to select.

• Use the search feature by typing a keyword into the text box, click the button
and select the item from the list of matches

The selected items are displayed under Your selection. The variables will appear in the
table in the same order as displayed here. You can change this order by dragging and
dropping them to the desired position.

To remove a variable from the table, simply clear the check box of the variable you want to
remove.

Note: If you select an item from the Financial sections and ratios node, this item will
also be available for display in the other elements included in you analysis.

Years
Use the Year tab to add/remove years displayed in the table.

158
 Analyses

Note: If you add a year here it will also be available for the charts included in your
analysis.
Layout
The options available in this tab allow you to choose how you want to present the data in
the table. Because the table displays information according to three dimensions (variable,
time, company) and a table is essentially two dimensional, the data needs to be grouped
according to one of the dimensions.

Three layouts are available:

• One table per year:

This option groups the values by year: the table is subdivided in subtables each
corresponding to a different year.
It is recommended to select this layout if you have selected few years and many
companies or variables in the analysis.

• One table per variable:

This option groups the values by variable; the table is subdivided in subtables each
corresponding to a different variable.
It is recommended to select this layout if you have selected few variables for the
table and many companies or years in the analysis

• One table per company:

This option groups the values by company: the table is subdivided in subtables each
corresponding to a different company.
It is recommended to select this layout if few companies are included in the analysis
and you have included many variables or years in the table.
For each of these layouts you can invert the lines and columns by clicking the relevant
invert the lines and columns link.
Currency

Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.

159
Amadeus - User Guide

Any change in this tab applies to all elements included in your analysis.
Companies
The Companies tab lists all the companies that were selected from the list of results for
inclusion in the analysis.
You can exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis by selecting/clearing their check
box(es).
You can also as save the list of selected companies by clicking the Save the company list
link.

Any change in this tab applies to all elements included in your analysis.
When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.
8.2.4.2 Display options for a bar chart (peer analysis)

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Peer Analysis Wizard and click the Display options link in the
corresponding bar chart.
• From the bar chart's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Bar chart display options dialog

160
 Analyses

There are five categories of display options for this element. Use the tabs to navigate between
categories. By default you presented with the General tab.
General

The general display options allow you to modify the bar chart's name and choose the
statistical parameters you want to display in the chart..

Variable
The Variable tab is used to modify the variable selected for display in the chart.
You can select any variable in the list.
To display a variable not displayed in the list, either add the variable from the first step of
the Peer Analysis Wizard or add the variable to an existing table from the table's display
options.

Note: You can modify the variable directly from the bar chart in your analysis.
Year
Use the Year tab to change the year displayed in the bar chart..

161
Amadeus - User Guide

You can select any year list.

To display other years, either add the desired year from the second step of the Peer
Analysis Wizard or add the year to an existing table from the table's display options.

Notes: You can modify the year directly from the bar chart in your analysis.
Currency
Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

Companies
Use the Companies tab to exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis as well as
save the companies that are selected.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

162
 Analyses

When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.2.4.3 Display options for a pie chart (peer analysis)

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the peer analysis wizard and click on the link Display options from the
corresponding pie chart
• From the pie chart's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click on the Options link

Pie chart display options dialog

There are five categories of display options for this element. Use the tabs to navigate between
categories. By default you presented with the General tab.
General
The general display options allow you to modify the pie chart's name, choose how you
want it to be displayed, and select whether you want to display positive or negative
values only..

• Name:
Use the text box to change the name of the pie chart.

163
Amadeus - User Guide

• Angle:
Rotate the pie chart around the axis passing through its centre and perpendicular
to the surface in a clockwise fashion. The first slice starts at the angle selected
from the drop-down. At 0° the first slice's left border starts at the top of the pie
chart. Move the first slice to the right by increasing the values (0° to 180°).
Decrease to the values (from 0° to -180°) to move the first slice to the left.

• Tilt:
Rotate the pie chart along its horizontal axis, i.e. the pie chart will rotate
vertically. At 0° the pie chart is flat. At 70° the pie chart is slanted to its
maximum.

• Number of slices:
This option allows you to select the maximum number of slices (companies) that
the pie chart may contain. Increase the number of slices to add more companies
to the chart.

• Positive/Negative values:
Some variables may accept positive and negative values, but because it is
impossible to plot both in the same chart, you have to choose which values you
want to consider.

Note: Apart from the name, all these options can be modified from the pie chart in
your analysis.
Variable
Use the Variable tab to modify the variable selected for display in the chart.
You can select any variable displayed in the list.
To display another variable, either add it in the first step of the Peer Analysis Wizard or
add the variable to an existing table from the table's display options.

Note: You can modify the variable directly from the pie chart in your analysis.
Year

Use the Year tab to change the year displayed in the pie chart.

You can select any year displayed.

To display another year, either add it in the second step of the Peer Analysis Wizard or
add the year to an existing table from the table's display options.

Note: You can modify the year directly from the pie chart in your analysis.

164
 Analyses

Currency
Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

Companies
Use the Currencies tab to exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis as well as
save the companies that are selected.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.2.4.4 Display options for a Lorenz curve (peer analysis)

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Peer Analysis Wizard and click the Display options link from the
corresponding Lorenz curve.
• From the Lorenz curve's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Lorenz curve display options dialog

165
Amadeus - User Guide

There are five categories of display options for this element. Use the tabs to navigate between
categories. By default you presented with the General tab.
General

The general display options allow you to modify the chart's name and choose if you want
to plot companies with positive values or negative values.

• Name:
The chart's current name is displayed in this text box. You can modify it by typing
in a new name.

• Positive/Negative values:
Some variables may accept positive and negative values, but because it is
impossible to plot both in the same Lorenz curve, you have to choose which
values you want to consider.

Note: Apart from the name, these options can be modified from the Lorenz curve in
your analysis.
Variable
In this tab you can modify the variable selected for display in the chart.
You can select any variable displayed in the list.

To display a variable not displayed in the list, either add it from the first step of the Peer
Analysis Wizard or add the variable to an existing table from the table's display options.

Note: You can modify the variable directly from the Lorenz curve in your analysis.
Year

166
 Analyses

In this tab you can change the year displayed in the chart.

You can select any year displayed.

To include a year not displayed, either add the desired year from the second step of the
Peer Analysis Wizard or add the year to an existing table from the table's display options.

Note: You can modify the year directly from the Lorenz curve in your analysis.
Currency
In this tab you can modify the currency and unit in which financial items are expressed.
Any changes you make here apply to all elements included in your analysis.

Companies
In this tab you can exclude or restore companies from the analysis as well as save the
companies that are selected.
Any changes you make here apply to all elements included in your analysis.

167
Amadeus - User Guide

When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.2.4.5 Display options for a distribution chart (peer analysis)

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Peer Analysis Wizard and click the Display options link from the
corresponding distribution chart.
• From the distribution chart's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Distribution chart display options dialog

There are five categories of display options for this element. Use the tabs to navigate between
categories. By default you presented with the General tab.
General
The general display options allow you to modify the chart's name and choose if you want
to include the first and tenth decile in the chart..

168
 Analyses

• Name:
The current name of the chart is displayed in this text box. you can modify it by
typing in a new name.

• Include 1 and 10 decile:

Select/clear this check box to remove/include the first and tenth decile in the
chart.

Note: Apart from the name, these options may be modified from the distribution
chart in your analysis.

Variable
Use the Variable tab to modify the variable selected for display in the chart
You can select any variable displayed in the list.
To display a variable not displayed in the list, either add the variable from the first step of
the Peer Analysis Wizard or add the variable to an existing table from the table's display
options.

Note: You can modify the variable directly from the distribution chart in your
analysis.
Year
In this tab you can change the year displayed in the chart.

You can select any year displayed.

To display further years, either add the desired year in the second step of the Peer
Analysis Wizard or add the year to an existing table from the table's display options.

Note: You can modify the year directly from the distribution chart in your analysis.
Currency
Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

169
Amadeus - User Guide

Companies
Use the Companies tab to exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis as well as
save the companies that are selected.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

When you finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.2.4.6 Display options for a indices chart (peer analysis)

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Peer Analysis Wizard and click the Display options link in the
corresponding indices chart.
• From the indices chart's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Indices chart display options dialog

170
 Analyses

There are five categories of display options for this element. Use the tabs to navigate between
categories. By default you presented with the General tab.
General

The general display options allow you to modify the chart's name and select the statistical
parameters you want to plot on the chart.

• Name:
The chart's current name is displayed in this text box. You can modify it by typing
in a new name.

• Select the items you want to display:

By default the median, standard deviation and average are all plotted on the
chart. Select/clear the check box(es) corresponding to the parameter(s) you
want to display/remove from the chart.

Note: Apart from the name, these options may be modified from the indices chart in
your analysis.
Variable
Use the Variable tab to modify the variable selected for display in the chart.
You can select any variable displayed in the list.

To display more variables, either add the variable in the first step of the Peer Analysis
Wizard or add the variable to an existing table from the table's display options.

Note: You can modify the variable directly from the indices chart in your analysis.
Years

171
Amadeus - User Guide

Use the Years tab to:

• Change the years to display in the chart.

• Change the base year on which the indices are calculated.

Currency
Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

Companies
Use the Companies tab to exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis as well as
save the companies that are selected.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

172
 Analyses

When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.2.4.7 Display options for a quantiles chart (peer analysis)

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Peer Analysis Wizard and click the Display options link in the
corresponding indices chart.
• From the quantiles chart's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Quantiles chart display options dialog

There are five categories of display options for this element. Use the tabs to navigate between
categories. By default you presented with the General tab.
General
The general display options allow you to modify the chart's name and select whether you
want to display the evolution of the selected variable within the quartiles or the deciles.

Variable
Use the Variable tab to modify the variable selected for display in the chart.
You can select any variable displayed in the list.

173
Amadeus - User Guide

To display another variable, either add it in the first step of the Peer Analysis Wizard or
add the variable to an existing table from the table's display options.

Note: You can modify the variable directly from the quantiles chart in your analysis.
Years
Use the Years tab to change the years displayed in the chart.

Currency
Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

Companies
Use the Currencies tab to exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis as well as
save the companies that are selected.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

174
 Analyses

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.3 Aggregation

The aggregation analysis allows you to sum, year by year, the lines of the accounts of each
company selected from the list of results.

The results of the analysis presents you with one final virtual company's yearly account statement.
The aggregated account can be illustrated with the following types of graph:

• Structure of the balance sheet

• Structure of the P&L account

• Bar chart

• Evolution of several variables in indices

Notes:
• You can run this analysis on maximum 1,000 companies.
• When viewing the aggregated accounts, the number of companies included in the accounts
varies from year to year due to the fact that not all accounts included in your selected
company group have the same availability. So when viewing and comparing the evolution
of a variable through time, you need to take into account that there may not be the same
number of observations and that therefore the results may be biased.

8.3.1 Accessing the aggregation analysis

1. You can access the aggregation analysis using the side menu from Amadeus's Home page or
List page by expanding the Aggregation submenu:

2. Choose one of the following options:

New analysis

175
Amadeus - User Guide

Select this option to build your own customised aggregation analysis. When you select this
option, you are presented with the Aggregation Wizard.
Predefined analyses
Click one of the predefined analyses to access the results of the aggregation analysis.
When you select a predefined analysis, you bypass the Aggregation Wizard and are
presented with the results of the aggregation analysis.
Saved analyses
When you click one of your previously saved aggregation analysis, you are directly
presented with the results of the analysis.

Notes:
• If you do not select companies from the list before accessing the aggregation analysis, all
companies included in your results are considered for the analysis.
• The analysis is only available if a maximum of 1,000 companies are selected for the
analysis.
• The side menu shown above may be displayed on the other side of the screen.
• The category Saved analysis is not displayed if you have not previously saved an
aggregation analysis.

8.3.2 Aggregation wizard

8.3.2.1 Overview

As with the other available analyses, the aggregation analysis has a built-in Wizard allowing you to
easily construct and customise your analysis using an easy step-by-step procedure.
The Aggregation Wizard is composed of three distinct steps:

• Step 1: select the report sections you want to aggregate.

• Step 2: choose the years of accounting data you want to compare.

• Step 3: select the elements (tables and charts) to include in the aggregation results.
8.3.2.2 Navigation between steps

Several buttons and links are displayed at the bottom of each step allowing you to navigate
between the steps of the Wizard:

Icon /
Function
Link
Previous Navigate to the previous step of the Wizard
Next Navigate to the next step of the Wizard.
Go to the results of the aggregation analysis. This button is only active if you have
completed each step of the Wizard.

At the upper left of the Wizard is a set of numbered icons, which you can click to jump directly to
the corresponding step.

The number highlighted in orange is the current step. Clicking the last icon allows you to view the
results of the aggregation analysis.

8.3.2.3 Loading/saving/modifying/deleting an aggregation analysis

8.3.2.3.1 Saving your aggregation analysis

At each step you have the option to save your analysis to either the application server or to a
local drive..

176
 Analyses

Icon Function
Save the analysis to the application server
Save the analysis to a local or network drive (.agg extension file)

Note: These icons are only active if you completed each step of the Wizard.

8.3.2.3.2 Loading a pre-existing analysis

At any time, you can load and view a pre-existing analysis. There are two types of pre-existing
analyses:

• Predefined analyses:
Under the heading Predefined analyses are listed all the predefined analyses delivered
with Amadeus. Just click the name of the predefined analysis you want to load and
view.

• Previously saved analyses:

Under the heading Saved analysis are listed all the analyses that you previously saved
on the application server. Just click the name of the saved analysis you want to load
and view.
To load an analysis that you saved on a local drive, click the Load from disk link and
browse for the relevant file (with .agg extension).

Note: You can load a predefined analysis or an analysis saved on the application server
from the side menu. See Accessing the aggregation analysis for more details.

8.3.2.3.3 Modifying a pre-existing analysis

Each pre-existing analysis (saved on server or predefined) can be modified by clicking the
icon corresponding to the analysis you want to modify. After clicking this icon, you are
presented with the first step of the Wizard.

Note: If you are modifying a saved analysis, you can save the analysis with the same
name after having modified it. You must choose a different name if you are modifying a
predefined analysis.

8.3.2.3.4 Deleting a previously saved analysis

To delete an analysis that you previously saved on the application server, click the
corresponding icon.
8.3.2.4 Aggregation Wizard: Step 1
8.3.2.4.1 Overview

Upon creating a new aggregation, you are presented with the first step of the Aggregation Wizard.
This first step allows you to select the report sections from which you want to aggregate the
figures.

Step 1 dialog

177
Amadeus - User Guide

8.3.2.4.2 Steps to follow

1. Select the check box(es) of the report sections you want to aggregate.
2. The selected sections are displayed under the table Your selection. From this table you
can remove sections by clearing their check boxes, and can reorder the sections by
dragging and dropping them to the desired position.
3. Click the Next link to move to the next step of the Wizard.

8.3.2.5 Aggregation Wizard: Step 2

8.3.2.5.1 Overview

The second step of the Wizard allows you to choose the years of accounting data you want to
aggregate and compare.

Step 2 dialog

178
 Analyses

8.3.2.5.2 Steps to follow

1. Select the check box(es) corresponding to the years you want to display.
2. Click the Next link to move to the next step of the Wizard.

8.3.2.6 Aggregation Wizard: Step 3

8.3.2.6.1 Overview

The third and final step of the Aggregation Wizard allows you to select the elements you want to
include in the aggregation analysis.

Step 3 dialog

179
Amadeus - User Guide

The following types of presentation element can be selected, which are listed under Options:

• Table

• Structure of the balance sheet

• Structure of the P&L account

• Bar chart

• Evolution of several variables in indices.

8.3.2.6.2 Steps to follow

1. Click an element to add it. The selected element is then displayed under Your selections.
2. To remove an element, clear its check box in the table under Your selections (clearing the
check box in the header removes all elements).
3. The analysis results will present the elements in the same order as they appear in the table.
You can change this by dragging and dropping them to the desired position.
4. Each element can be further customised by clicking the corresponding Display options link.

• Display options for an aggregation table

• Display options for the structure of the balance sheet

• Display options for the structure of the P&L account

• Display option for a bar chart

• Display option for the evolution of several variables in indices

5. Click the Finish button to generate the aggregation analysis and view it.

TIP: You can add as many elements of the same type as you want in one same analysis. Use
the Display options to customise each element so you can view the results from different
perspectives.

8.3.3 Working with the results of an aggregation

8.3.3.1 Overview
After having loaded a predefined analysis, loaded a previously saved analysis or built a new
analysis with the Aggregation Wizard, the results of the analysis are displayed.
Aggregation analysis results page

180
 Analyses

The aggregation analysis is composed of elements that can be of the following types:

• The aggregation table

• The structure of the balance sheet chart

• The structure of the P&L account chart

• The aggregation bar chart

• The evolution of several variables in indices chart.

An analysis can be composed of more than one element of the same type. The display of each
individual element can be customised allowing you to have a different perspective on the same set
of data.
To customise the display options of an element click the Options link from the upper right corner
of the element.
Use the scrollbar to navigate between the elements included in your analysis.
8.3.3.2 Analysis results toolbar
The following icons are available in the toolbar displayed at the top right side of the analysis:

Icon Function
Add or remove elements (tables or graphs) from the aggregation analysis
Export the aggregation analysis to an external document of a specified
format (Excel or PDF)
Export and send the aggregation analysis by email to a selection of
recipients
Print out the aggregation analysis.

Notes:

181
Amadeus - User Guide

• You can modify the settings defined at any step of the Aggregation Wizard by clicking the
step number from the icons displayed at the top left of the aggregation analysis.

• Each individual element can be hidden ( ), deleted ( ) or maximised ( ).

8.3.3.3 Aggregation table

8.3.3.3.1 Overview

The aggregation table displays the yearly aggregated figures of each financial item included in the
report section(s) selected for the analysis.

Aggregation table

Each line displays the aggregated value of a financial item. The items are organised by report
section.
Each column displays the yearly values of the aggregated accounts.

8.3.3.3.2 Working with an aggregation table

• The first line of the table displays the number of companies included in the yearly
aggregated figures. This number varies from year to year depending on the availability of
accounts for each company included in the analysis.

The number displayed next to each figure within the table represents the number of
companies (observations) considered for the calculation of the figure.

When comparing yearly aggregated values, the number of observations that were used to
produce each figure should not be overlooked as it has significant influence on the
magnitude of each figure.

• Each column can be resized by clicking the border of a column header and dragging it to
the desired width.

• Click to delete the corresponding year or report section.

8.3.3.3.3 Aggregation table toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the table's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function

182
 Analyses

Options Change the display options of the table.

Hide (collapse) the table (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the table in a new window. You can also double-click in the
section to maximise it.
Remove the table from the analysis.

8.3.3.4 Structure of the balance sheet

8.3.3.4.1 Overview

The structure of the balance sheet chart illustrates the annual structure of the aggregated balance
sheet in a block diagram.
Structure of the balance sheet example

It breaks down:
 The aggregated assets in terms of Fixed assets and Current assets
 The aggregated liabilities in terms of Shareholders funds, Non current liabilities and Current
liabilities.

The middle cylinder represents the Net current assets (= Current assets - Current liabilities). All
figures are expressed in percentage of the total.
By default, the structure of the group's balance sheet corresponding to the last selected year is
displayed. Use the drop-down menu in the top-left of the chart to change the year.

8.3.3.4.2 Structure of the balance sheet toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the chart's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the element.
Hide (collapse) the element (restore the element by clicking ).
Remove the element from the analysis.
Maximise and open the section in a new window. You can also double-click in the
section to maximise it.

183
Amadeus - User Guide

8.3.3.5 Structure of the P&L account

8.3.3.5.1 Overview

The structure of the P&L account diagram illustrates the annual structure of the aggregated profit
and loss account in a block diagram.
Structure of the P&L account example

It breaks down on one hand the aggregated expenses, and on the other the aggregated income. All
figures are expressed in percentage of Operating Revenue/Turnover.
By default, the structure of the group's P&L account corresponding to the last selected year is
displayed. Use the drop-down menu in the top left of the chart to change the year.

8.3.3.5.2 Structure of the P&L account toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the chart's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the element.
Hide (collapse) the element (restore the element by clicking ).
Remove the element from the analysis.
Maximise and open the section in a new window. You can also double-click in the
section to maximise it.

8.3.3.6 Bar chart (aggregation)

8.3.3.6.1 Overview

The bar chart in an aggregation analysis displays the evolution of an aggregated variable over a
certain time period.
Bar chart example

184
 Analyses

The menu displayed to the left of the chart allows you to select the variable you want to illustrate.

Note: You can hide the left menu by clicking Hide.

8.3.3.6.2 Bar chart toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the chart's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the element.
Hide (collapse) the element (restore the element by clicking ).
Remove the element from the analysis.
Maximise and open the section in a new window. You can also double-click in the
section to maximise it.

8.3.3.7 Evolution of several variables in indices (aggregation)

8.3.3.7.1 Overview

The 'Evolution in indices of several variables' chart displays the evolution of up to five financial
items in a line chart expressed in indices.
Evolution of several variable in indices example

185
Amadeus - User Guide

The menu to the left of the chart allows you to:

• Change the base year on which the indices are calculated.

• Add/remove financial items from the chart. A maximum of five items can be included at
one time.

Note: You can hide the left menu by clicking Hide.

8.3.3.7.2 Evolution of several variables in indices toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the chart's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the element.
Hide (collapse) the element (restore the element by clicking ).
Remove the element from the analysis.
Maximise and open the section in a new window. You may also double click in the
section to maximise it.

8.3.4 Display options

8.3.4.1 Display options for an aggregation table

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Aggregation Wizard and click the Display options link in the
corresponding table.
• From the table's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Aggregation table display options dialog

186
 Analyses

There are five categories of display options for the aggregation table. Use the tabs to navigate
between categories. By default you presented with the General tab.
General

The general display options allow you to:

• Modify the table's name.

• Display/hide the number of companies with available accounts for each selected
year or the number of companies for which each account item is available..

Sections

Use the Sections tab to add or remove report sections from the table.
The sections available under the heading Sections in your analysis are those that you
selected in step 1 of the wizard.

187
Amadeus - User Guide

Note: Modifying the report sections only applies to the table you are customising.
Years
Use the Years tab to:

• Add or remove the years displayed in the table.

• Change the column order (from the most recent to the least recent or from the
least recent to the most recent).

Notes:
• Modifying the years only applies to the element you are customising.
• To modify the years of all elements included in the analysis, go to step 2 of the
Aggregation Wizard.
Currency
Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

Companies

188
 Analyses

Use the Currencies tab you can exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis as well
as save the companies that are selected.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.3.4.2 Display options for the structure of the balance sheet (aggregation)

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Aggregation Wizard and click the Display options link in the
corresponding element.
• From the structure of the balance sheet chart's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click
the Options link.

Structure of the balance sheet display options dialog

There are four categories of display options for this element. Use the tabs to navigate between
categories. By default you presented with the General tab.
General

189
Amadeus - User Guide

The general display options allow you to modify the element's name.

Year
Use the Years tab to change the year to display in the chart. Only the years selected in
step 2 of the wizard are displayed.

Note: You can modify the year directly from the chart in your analysis.
Currency
Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

Companies

Use the Currencies tab to exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis as well as
save the companies that are selected.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

190
 Analyses

When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.3.4.3 Display options for the structure of the P&L account (aggregation)

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Aggregation Wizard and click the Display options link from the
corresponding element.
• From the structure of the P&L account toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the
Options link.

Structure of the P&L account display options dialog

There are four categories of display options for this element. Use the tabs to navigate between
categories. By default you presented with the General tab.

General
The general display options allow you to modify the element's name.

191
Amadeus - User Guide

Year
Use the Years tab to change the year to display in the chart. Only the years selected in
step 2 of the wizard are displayed.

Note: You can modify the year directly from the chart in your analysis.
Currency
Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

Companies
Use the Currencies tab to exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis as well as
save the companies that are selected.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

192
 Analyses

When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.3.4.4 Display options for a bar chart (aggregation)

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Aggregation Wizard and click the Display options link from the
corresponding bar chart.
• From the bar chart's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Bar chart display options dialog

There are five categories of display options for this element. Use the tabs to navigate between
categories. By default you presented with the General tab.
General
The general display options allow you to modify the bar chart's name.

Variable
Use the Variables tab to modify the variable selected for display in the chart..

193
Amadeus - User Guide

You can select the variable from the tree-like structure or search for an item using the
search feature..

Note: You can modify the variable directly from the bar chart in your analysis.
Years
Use the Years tab to change the year to display in the bar chart.

Notes:
• You can modify the year directly from the bar chart in your analysis.
• Modifying the years only applies to the bar chart you are customising.
• To modify the years of all elements included in your analysis, go to step 2 of the
Aggregation Wizard.
Currency
Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

194
 Analyses

Companies
Use the Currencies tab to exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis as well as
save the companies that are selected.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.3.4.5 Display option for the evolution of several variables in indices (aggregation)

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Aggregation Wizard and click the Display options link in the
corresponding bar chart.
• From the evolution of several variables in indices chart's toolbar in the results of your
analysis, click the Options link.

Evolution of several variables in indices display options dialog

There are five categories of display options for this element. Use the tabs to navigate between
categories. By default you are presented with the General tab.

195
Amadeus - User Guide

General
The general display options allow you to modify the bar chart's name.

Variables
Use the Variables tab to modify the variables selected for display in the chart. You can
select maximum of five variables.
You can select the variables from the tree-like structure or search for an item using the
search feature.

Note: You can modify the variables directly from the chart in your analysis.
Years
Use the Years tab to:

• Change the years to display in the chart.

• Change the base year on which the indices are calculate..

Notes:

196
 Analyses

• The base year can be modified directly from the chart in your analysis.
• Modifying the years only applies to the chart you are customising.
• To modify the years of all elements included in your analysis, go to step 2 of the
Aggregation Wizard.
Currency
Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

Companies
Use the Currencies tab to exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis as well as
save the companies that are selected.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.4 Statistical distribution

The statistical distribution analysis allows you to analyse how a specific variable is distributed in a
group of companies selected from the list of results.
The results of the analysis are presented in a table displaying summary statistics such as the
median, the average, the standard deviation, etc. The results can also be illustrated with a
distribution chart.

Note: You can run this analysis on maximum 5,000 companies.

197
Amadeus - User Guide

8.4.1 Accessing the distribution analysis

1. You can access the distribution analysis using the side menu from Amadeus's Home page or
List page by expanding the Statistical distribution submenu:

2. Choose one of the following options:

New analysis

Select this option to build your own customised distribution analysis. When you select this
option, you are displayed with the Distribution Wizard.
Predefined analyses
Choose one of the predefined analyses available to access the results of the distribution
analyses according to the variable displayed in the selected option.
When you select a predefined analysis, you bypass the Distribution Wizard and are
immediately presented with the results of the distribution analysis.
Saved analyses
When you click one of your previously saved distribution analyses, you are directly
presented with the results of the analysis.

Notes:
• If you do not select companies from the list before accessing the distribution analysis, all
companies included in your results are considered for the analysis.
• The analysis is only available if a maximum of 5,000 companies are selected for the
analysis.
• The side menu shown above may be displayed on the other side of the screen.
• The category Saved analysis is not displayed if you have not previously saved a
distribution analysis..

8.4.2 Distribution wizard

8.4.2.1 Overview

198
 Analyses

As with the other available analyses, the distribution analysis has a built-in Wizard allowing you to
construct and customise your analysis using an easy step-by-step procedure.
The Distribution Wizard is composed of three distinct steps:
1. Step 1: select the financial variable you want to analyse.
2. Step 2: select the year of accounting data you want to consider.
3. Step 3: select the elements (tables and charts) to include in the distribution analysis
results.
8.4.2.2 Navigation between steps
Several buttons and links are displayed at the bottom of each step allowing you to navigate
between the steps of the Wizard:

Icon / Link Function

Previous Navigate to the previous step of the Wizard.
Next Navigate to the next step of the Wizard.
Go to the results of the distribution analysis.
This button is only active if you have completed each step of the Wizard.

At the upper left of the Wizard is a set of numbered icons, which you can click to jump directly to
the corresponding step.

The number highlighted in orange is the current step. Clicking the last icon allows you to view the
results of the distribution analysis and is only active if each step of the Wizard has been completed.
8.4.2.3 Loading/saving/modifying/deleting a distribution analysis
8.4.2.3.1 Saving your distribution analysis

At each step you have the option to save your analysis to either the application server or to a
local or networked drive.

Icon Function
Save the analysis to the application server
Save the analysis to a local or network drive (.dis extension file)

Note: These two icons are only active if you completed each step of the Wizard

8.4.2.3.2 Loading a pre-existing analysis

At any step of the Wizard, you can decide to load and view a pre-existing analysis. There are
two types of pre-existing analyses:

• Predefined analyses:
Under the heading Predefined analyses are listed all the predefined analyses delivered
with Amadeus. Just click the name of the predefined analysis you want to load and
view.

• Previously saved analyses:

Under the heading Saved analysis are listed all the analyses that you previously saved
on the application server. Just click the name of the saved analysis you want to load
and view.
To load an analysis that you saved on a local drive, click the Load from disk link and
browse for the relevant file (with .dis extension).

Note: You can load a predefined or an analysis saved on the application server from the
side menu. See Accessing the distribution analysis for more details.

199
Amadeus - User Guide

8.4.2.3.3 Modifying a pre-existing analysis

Each pre-existing analysis (saved on server or predefined) can be modified by clicking the
icon for the analysis you want to modify. After clicking this icon, you presented with the first
step of the Wizard.

Note: If you are modifying a saved analysis, you can save the analysis with the same
name after having modified it. You must choose a different name if you are modifying a
predefined analysis.

8.4.2.3.4 Deleting a previously saved analysis

To delete an analysis that you previously saved on the application server, click the
corresponding icon.
8.4.2.4 Distribution Wizard: Step 1
8.4.2.4.1 Overview

Upon creating a new distribution analysis, you are presented with the first step of the Distribution
Wizard. This first step allows you to select the variable you want to consider for the analysis.
Step 1 dialog

8.4.2.4.2 Steps to follow

1. In the left pane are listed all the financial items you can select for the analysis. To select a
variable, either:

• Use the tree-like structure and click the financial item you want to select.

• Use the search feature by typing in a keyword in the text box, clicking the
button and selecting the item from the list of matches.
2. The selected variable is displayed under Your selection.
3. Click Next to move to the next step of the Wizard.

Note:

200
 Analyses

• Although you can only select one variable from the Wizard, the results of the distribution
analysis may include several tables or charts, each displaying a different variable. For more
details, see Working with the results of a distribution analysis.
• If you are modifying an analysis that already has some elements included, the variable that
you select in this step will not modify the variable used in the elements that have already
been included. Changing the variable here only determines the variable that will be used in
elements that you add subsequently.
To change the variable of an element modify the element's display options.
8.4.2.5 Distribution Wizard: Step 2
8.4.2.5.1 Overview

The second step of the Distribution Wizard allows you to select the year of accounting data you
want to consider.
Step 2 dialog

8.4.2.5.2 Steps to follow

1. Choose Relative years or Absolute years tab at the top of the Wizard.
2. Select the check box(es) corresponding to the year(s) you want to consider for your
analysis.
3. Click the Next link to move to the next step of the Wizard.

Notes:
• Although you can only select one year from the Wizard, the results of the distribution
analysis may include several tables or charts, each displaying values for a different year.
For more details, see Working with the results of a distribution analysis.
• If you are modifying an analysis that already has some elements included, the year that
you select in this step will not modify the year used in the elements that have already been
included. Changing the year here only determines the year that will be considered in
elements that you add subsequently.
To change the year of an element modify the element's display options.

8.4.2.6 Distribution Wizard: Step 3

201
Amadeus - User Guide

8.4.2.6.1 Overview

The third and final step of the Distribution Wizard allows you to select the elements you want to
include in the results of the distribution analysis.
Step 3 dialog

Two types of presentation element can be selected, which are listed under Options:

• Table

• Distribution chart.

8.4.2.6.2 Steps to follow

1. Click an element to add it. The selected element is then displayed under Your selections.
2. To remove an element, clear its check box in the table under Your selections (clearing the
check box in the header removes all elements).

3. The analysis results will present the elements in the same order as they appear in the table.
You can change this by dragging and dropping them to the desired position.
4. Each element will display the results according to your choices in step 1 and step 2 of the
Wizard. You can modify both the year and variable, and can further customise the display of
each element by clicking the corresponding Display options link:

• Display options for a distribution table

• Display options for a distribution chart

5. Click the Finish button to generate and view the results of the distribution analysis.

TIP: You can add as many elements of the same type as you want in the same analysis. Use
the Display options to customise each element so you can view the results from different
perspectives.

202
 Analyses

8.4.3 Working with the results of a distribution analysis

8.4.3.1 Overview
After having loaded a predefined analysis, loaded a previously saved analysis or built a new
analysis with the Distribution Wizard, the results of the analysis are displayed.
Distribution analysis results page

The distribution analysis is composed of elements that can be of two types:

• The distribution table

• The distribution chart

An analysis can be composed of more than one element of the same type. The display of each
individual element may be customised allowing you to have a different perspective on the same set
of data.
For example you may include two tables analysing the distribution of two variables among one
same group of companies or two tables analysing the distribution of one variable among two
groups of companies or one same group of companies for two years.
To customise the display options of an element click the Options link from the upper right of the
element.
Use the scrollbar to navigate between the elements included in your analysis.
8.4.3.2 Analysis results toolbar
The following icons are available in the toolbar displayed at the top right of the analysis:

203
Amadeus - User Guide

Icon Function
Add or remove elements (tables or graphs) from the distribution analysis.
Export the results of the distribution analysis to an external document of a
specified format (Excel or PDF).
Export and send the results of the distribution analysis by email to a
selection of recipients.
Print out the results of the distribution analysis.

Notes:
• You can modify the settings defined at any step of the Distribution Wizard by clicking the
step number from the icons displayed at the top left of the aggregation analysis.

Modifying a step in the Wizard only determines the variable and year that will be used in
elements that you subsequently add to the analysis and not the elements already included
in the analysis.
• Each individual element can be hidden ( ), deleted ( ) or maximised ( ).

8.4.3.3 Distribution table

8.4.3.3.1 Overview

The distribution table displays:

• All the companies for which the selected variable is available for the selected year

• The year to which the value of the variable corresponds

• The quartile in which each company is included

• The decile in which each company is included

• The value of the variable for each company

• The rank of each company..

Distribution table

204
 Analyses

The median, standard deviation and average are also displayed within the table.
Underneath the table are displayed the value of the limits of each quartile and decile.

8.4.3.3.2 Working with a distribution table

8.4.3.3.2.1 Sorting the table

You can sort the table according to two columns:

• The value of the selected variable (default)

• The company name

To sort the table by a column, click within the column header ( : indicates an ascending sort; :
indicates a descending).

8.4.3.3.2.2 Working with the columns

• You can modify the width of each column by clicking its border and dragging it to the desired
width.

• You can delete a column by clicking the icon in the header of the column you want to
remove.

Note: You can restore a deleted column from the table's general display options.

8.4.3.3.2.3 Removing a company from the table

To remove a company from the distribution table, click the corresponding to the company you
want to remove. You can restore the deleted companies from the table's display options.

205
Amadeus - User Guide

Note: You can also delete a line corresponding to a summary statistic such as the average or
the standard deviation in the same way. You can restore these lines from the table's general
display options.

8.4.3.3.3 Distribution table toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the table's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the table.
Hide (collapse) the table (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the table in a new window. You can also double-click in the
section to maximise it.
Remove the table from the analysis.

8.4.3.4 Distribution chart

8.4.3.4.1 Overview

The distribution chart displays a graphical representation of the distribution of a variable within a
group of companies for a specific year and allows you to position a company within this
distribution.

Distribution chart

Each cylinder represents a quartile. The height of each cylinder is determined by difference
between the higher and lower limit of each quartile.
The blue horizontal line represents the position within the distribution of the company selected in
the left menu (see below for more details).

Underneath the table are displayed the relative interquartile interval, the number of observations,
the standard deviation and the name of the company currently positioned in the chart.

8.4.3.4.2 Working with a distribution chart

8.4.3.4.2.1 Displaying the position of a company in the chart

206
 Analyses

Each company included in the analysis can be plotted in the distribution chart by selecting a
company name from the menu displayed to the left of the chart.
Within the chart a horizontal line is displayed allowing you to see how the company is positioned in
the distribution. The name of the selected company is displayed in the legend underneath the
chart.

8.4.3.4.2.2 Changing the variable

From the left menu you can modify the variable on which the distribution is based by clicking the
name of the variable. You can only select a variable that has previously been included in a
distribution table.

Note: You can also change the variable from the chart's display options.

8.4.3.4.2.3 Changing the year

The left menu includes a drop-down menu labelled Available years allowing you to change the
year on which the chart is based. You can only select a year that has previously been selected in a
distribution table.

Note: You can also change the year from the chart's display options.

8.4.3.4.2.4 Including/removing the first and last deciles

Due to the fact that the set on which the analysis is based might contain extreme values and
therefore skew your analysis, an option is available to remove the first and last deciles.
Clear the Include the first and last deciles check box to remove extreme values. When you
remove these values, the first and last quartile contain respectively 15% (= 25% - 10%) of the
observations.

Note: You can also remove these deciles from the chart's display options.

8.4.3.4.3 Distribution chart toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the chart's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the chart.
Hide (collapse) the chart (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the chart in a new window. You can also double-click in the
section to maximise it.
Remove the chart from the analysis.

Note: You can hide the left menu by clicking Hide.

8.4.4 Display options

8.4.4.1 Display options for a distribution table

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Distribution Wizard and click the Display options link in the
corresponding table.
• From the table's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Distribution table display options dialog

207
Amadeus - User Guide

Use the tabs to navigate between categories. By default you are presented with the General tab.
General

The general display options allow you to modify the table's name and select the distribution
parameters you want to display in the lines and columns.

• Name:
The table's current name is displayed in this text box. You can modify it by typing in
a new name.

• Select the items you want to display:

 Lines:
By default the median, standard deviation and average are all displayed at the
top of the table.
Select/clear the check box(es) corresponding to the parameter(s) you want to
include/remove in the table.
Each parameter may be displayed at the top or the bottom of the table.
 Columns:
By default the table includes columns displaying the year, the quartile, decile
and rank of each company.
Select/clear the check box(es) corresponding to the column(s) you want to
include/remove from the table.
Variable

208
 Analyses

Use the Variable tab to modify the variable selected in the distribution table.

Under Options, are listed all the financial items you can select for the analysis.
To select a different variable, either:

• Use the tree-like structure and click the financial item you want to select.

• Use the search feature by typing in a keyword in the text box, clicking the
button and selecting the item from the list of matches.

Notes:
• If you have other tables included in the results of the distribution analysis, your
changes will not modify the variable selected for the other tables.
• If you have one or more charts included in your analysis based on the initial variable
and the table you are customising is the only table with this initial variable, your
changes will modify the variable for those charts as well.

Year
Use the Year tab to change the year on which the table is based.

1. Select the Relative years or Absolute years tab at the top of the wizard.
2. Select the option button corresponding to the year you want to consider for your
analysis.

Notes:
• If you have other tables included in the results of the distribution analysis, your
changes will not modify the year selected for the other tables.
• If you have one or more charts included in your analysis based on the initial year
and the table you are customising is the only table with this initial year, your
changes will modify the year used for those charts as well.
Currency
Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.

209
Amadeus - User Guide

Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis
Companies
The Currencies tab lists all the companies that were selected from the list of results for
inclusion in the analysis.
You may exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis by clearing/selecting the
corresponding check box(es).
You can also as save the list of selected companies by clicking the Save the company list
link.

Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.
When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.4.4.2 Display options for a distribution chart

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Distribution Wizard and click the Display options link in the
corresponding chart..
• From the chart's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Distribution chart display options dialog

210
 Analyses

Use the tabs to navigate between categories. By default you are presented with the General tab.
General

The general display options allow you to modify the chart's name and to choose if you
want to include the first and tenth decile in the chart..

• Name:
The chart's current name is displayed in this text box. You can modify it by typing
in a new name.

• Include 1 and 10 deciles:

Clear/select this option remove/include the first and tenth deciles in the chart.

Note: This modification can be made directly from the chart's side menu.
Variable
Use the Variable tab to modify the variable selected in the distribution chart.

211
Amadeus - User Guide

Only the items currently included in a table are available.

To add another variable, you must either modify an existing table with the variable you
want to display in the chart or create a new table with the required variable.

Notes:
• If you have other charts included in the results of the distribution analysis, your
changes will not modify the variable selected for the other charts.
• The variable may be modified directly from the chart's side menu.
Year

Use the Year tab to change the year on which the chart is based.

1. Select the Relative years or Absolute years tab at the top of the wizard.
2. Select the option button corresponding to the year you want to consider for your
analysis.

Note:
• If you have other charts included in the results of the distribution analysis, your
changes will not modify the year selected for the other charts.
• If you have only included one table in your analysis or have selected the same
year in several tables, you cannot change the year.
• If you have two or more concentration tables included in your analysis for which
you have selected different years, these years are listed in the left pane.
• The year may be modified directly from the chart's side menu.
Currency

212
 Analyses

Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.

Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.
Companies
The Currencies tab lists all the companies that were selected from the list of results for
inclusion in the analysis.
You can exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis by clearing/selecting the
corresponding check box(es).
You can also as save the list of selected companies by clicking the Save the company
list link.

Any change under this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.
When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.5 Concentration analysis

The concentration analysis enables you to determine the share (or weight) of any additive financial
variable for each company included in a group of companies selected from the list of results.
The results of the analysis may be viewed in a tabular form as well as illustrated with the following
types of graphs:

• Pie chart

• Lorenz curve

Note: The analysis can be performed on a group of companies ranging from 2 to 5,000.

213
Amadeus - User Guide

8.5.1 Accessing the concentration analyses

1. You can access the concentration analysis using the side menu from Amadeus's Home page or
List page by expanding the Concentration analysis submenu:

2. Choose one of the following options:

New analysis

Select this option to build your own customised concentration analysis. When you select
this option, you are presented with the Concentration Wizard.
Predefined analyses
Choose one of the predefined analyses available to access the results of the concentration
analysis according to the variable displayed in the selected option.
When you select a predefined analysis, you bypass the Concentration Wizard and are
immediately presented with the results of the concentration analysis.

Saved analyses
Choose one of your previously saved concentration analyses. When you click a previously
saved concentration analysis, you are directly presented with the results of the analysis.

Notes:
• If you do not select companies from the list before accessing the concentration analysis, all
companies included in your results are considered for the analysis.
• The analysis is only available if a maximum of 5,000 companies are selected for the
analysis.
• The side menu shown above may be displayed on the other side of the screen.
• The category Saved analysis is not displayed if you have not previously saved a
concentration analysis.

Tip: If you want to run a concentration analysis that closely resembles one that already exists
(saved or predefined), select that analysis and then customise it by adding or removing elements,
modifying the variable, year or the display options of the elements included in the analysis.

214
 Analyses

8.5.2 Concentration wizard

8.5.2.1 Overview
As with the other available analyses, the concentration analysis has a built-in Wizard allowing you
to construct and customise your analysis using an easy step-by-step procedure.
The Concentration Wizard is composed of three distinct steps:

1. Step 1: select the financial variable you want to analyse.

2. Step 2: select the year of accounting data you want to consider.

3. Step 3: select the elements (tables and charts) to include in the concentration analysis
results.
8.5.2.2 Navigation between steps
Several buttons and links are displayed at the bottom of each step allowing you to navigate
between the steps of the Wizard:

Icon / Link Function

Previous Navigate to the previous step of the wizard
Next Navigate to the next step of the wizard.
Go to the results of the concentration analysis.
This button is only active if you have completed each step of the wizard.

At the upper left of the wizard is a set of numbered icons, which you can click to jump directly to
the corresponding step.

The number highlighted in orange is the current step. Clicking the last icon allows you to view the
results of the concentration analysis and is only active if each step of the wizard has been
completed.
8.5.2.3 Loading/saving/modifying/deleting a concentration analysis
8.5.2.3.1 Saving your concentration analysis

At each step you have the option to save your analysis to either the application server or to a
local or networked drive.

Icon Function
Save the analysis to the application server
Save the analysis to a local or network drive (.conc file
extension)

Note: These icons are only active if you have completed each step of the wizard.

8.5.2.3.2 Loading a pre-existing analysis

At any step of the wizard, you can decide to load and view a pre-existing analysis. There are
two types of pre-existing analyses:

• Predefined analyses:
Under the heading Predefined analyses are listed all the predefined analyses delivered
with Amadeus. Just click the name of the predefined analysis you want to load and
view.

• Previously saved analyses:

Under the heading Saved analysis are listed all the analyses that you previously saved
on the application server. Just click the name of the saved analysis you want to load
and view.

215
Amadeus - User Guide

To load an analysis that you saved on a local hard drive, click the link Load from disk
and browse for the relevant file where you saved (with .conc extension).

Note: You can load a predefined analysis or an analysis saved on the application server
from the side menu. See Accessing the concentration analysis for more details.

8.5.2.3.3 Modifying a pre-existing analysis

Each pre-existing analysis (saved on server or predefined) can be modified by clicking the
icon of the analysis you want to modify. After clicking this icon, you presented with the first
step of the wizard.

Note: If you are modifying a saved analysis, you can save the analysis with the same
name after having modified it. You must choose a different name if you are modifying a
predefined analysis.

8.5.2.3.4 Deleting a previously saved analysis

To delete an analysis that you previously saved on the application server, click the
corresponding icon.
8.5.2.4 Concentration Wizard: Step 1
8.5.2.4.1 Overview

Upon creating a new concentration analysis, you are presented with the first step of the
Concentration Wizard. This first step allows you to select the variable you want to consider for the
analysis.
Step 1 dialog

8.5.2.4.2 Steps to follow

1. In the left pane are listed all the financial items you can select for the analysis. To select a
variable, either:

• Use the tree-like structure and click the financial item you want to select.

216
 Analyses

• Use the search feature by typing in a keyword in the text box, clicking the
button and selecting the item from the list of matches.

2. The selected variable is displayed under Your selection.

3. Click the Next link to move to the next step of the wizard.

Note:
• Although you can only select one variable from the wizard, the results of the concentration
analysis may include several tables or charts, each displaying a different variable. For more
details, see Working with the results of a concentration analysis.
• If you are modifying an analysis that already has some elements included, the variable that
you select in this step will not modify the variable used in the elements that have already
been included. Changing the variable here only determines the variable that will be used in
elements that you add subsequently.
To change the variable of an element modify the element's display options.

8.5.2.5 Concentration Wizard: Step 2

8.5.2.5.1 Overview

The second step of the Concentration Wizard allows you to select the year of accounting data you
want to consider.
Step 2 dialog

8.5.2.5.2 Steps to follow

1. Select the Relative years or Absolute years tab at the top of the wizard.
2. Select the check box(es) corresponding to the year(s) you want to consider for your
analysis.

3. Click the Next link to move to the next step of the wizard.

Notes:

217
Amadeus - User Guide

• Although you can only select one year from the wizard, the results of the concentration
analysis can include several tables or charts, each displaying values for a different year. For
more details, see Working with the results of a concentration analysis.
• If you are modifying an analysis that already has some elements included, the year that
you select in this step will not modify the year used in the elements that have already been
included. Changing the year here only determines the year that will be considered in
elements that you add subsequently.
To change the year of an element modify the element's display options.

8.5.2.6 Concentration Wizard: Step 3

8.5.2.6.1 Overview

The third and final step of the Concentration Wizard allows you to select the elements you want to
include in the results of the concentration analysis.
Step 3 dialog

Three types of presentation element can be selected, which are listed under Options:

• Table

• Pie chart

• Lorenz curve

8.5.2.6.2 Steps to follow

1. Click an element to add it. The selected element is then displayed under Your selections.
2. To remove an element, clear its check box in the table under Your selections (clearing the
check box in the header removes all elements).
3. The analysis results will present the elements in the same order as they appear in the table.
You can change this by dragging and dropping them to the desired position.
4. Each element will display the results according to your choices in step 1 and step 2 of the
wizard. You can modify both the year and variable as well further customise the display of
each element by clicking the corresponding Display options link:

218
 Analyses

5.

6. Click the Finish button to generate and view the results of the concentration analysis.

TIP: You can add as many elements of the same type as you want in the same analysis. Use
the Display options to customise each element so you can view the results from different
perspectives.

8.5.3 Working with the results of a concentration analysis

8.5.3.1 Overview
After having loaded a predefined analysis, loaded a previously saved analysis or built a new
analysis with the Concentration Wizard, the results of the analysis are displayed.
The concentration analysis is composed of elements that can be of three types:

• Concentration table

• Pie chart

• Lorenz curve
An analysis can be composed of more than one element of the same type. The display of each
element can be customised allowing you to have different perspectives on the same set of data.
For example you can include two tables analysing the concentration of two variables among the
same group of companies, or two tables analysing the concentration of one variable among two
groups of companies or one same group of companies for two years.

To customise the display options of an element click the Options link from the upper right of the
element.

Use the scrollbar to navigate between the elements included in your analysis.
8.5.3.2 Analysis results toolbar

The following icons are available in the toolbar displayed at the top the results of the analysis:

Icon Function
Modify the settings defined at any step of the Concentration Wizard by
clicking the corresponding step number
Add or remove elements (tables or graphs) from the concentration
analysis
Export the results of the concentration analysis to an external document
of a specified format (Excel or PDF)
Export and send the results of the concentration analysis by email to a
selection of recipients
Print out the results of the concentration analysis.

Notes:
• Modifying a step in the Wizard only determines the variable and year that will be used in
elements that you subsequently add to the analysis and not the elements already included
in the analysis.
• Each individual element may be hidden ( ), deleted ( ) or maximised ( ).
8.5.3.3 Concentration table
8.5.3.3.1 Overview

The concentration table includes the following data items:

219
Amadeus - User Guide

• All the companies for which the selected variable is available for the selected year.

Note: Click a company name to display the company's report in a new window.

• The value of the selected variable.

• The cumulative value of the selected variable, i.e. the sum of all the values of the
variable till that point:
If xn is the value of the variable you selected for the nth company in your group, the value
of the cumulative variable corresponding to that nth observation (Xn) is given by the
following expression:

• The share or concentration of the company in terms of the selected variable inside the
group of companies expressed in %.
The concentration is obtained by dividing the value of the variable for a company by the
sum of the values of the variable for the whole group. From the equation above, for a
company i, its concentration value is given by the following expression:

• The cumulative concentration of the variable, i.e. the sum of all the concentration till
that point.
For a company n, this variable (C) is given by the following expression:

Concentration table

220
 Analyses

The data is sorted according the selected variable in a descending way. This cannot be changed.
By default, only positive values of the variable are taken into account for the analysis. If the
variable can take negative values, you can chose to execute the concentration analysis on negative
values only by selecting the appropriate option button at the top of the concentration analysis.

8.5.3.3.2 Working with a concentration table

8.5.3.3.2.1 Working with the columns

You can modify the width of each column by clicking its border and dragging it to the desired
width.

8.5.3.3.2.2 Removing a company from the table

To remove a company from the concentration table, click the icon corresponding to the
company you want to remove. You can restore the deleted companies from the table's
display options.

8.5.3.3.3 Concentration table toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the table's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the table.
Hide (collapse) the table (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the table in a new window. You can also double-click in the
section to maximise it.
Remove the table from the analysis.

8.5.3.4 Pie chart (concentration)

8.5.3.4.1 Overview

The pie chart allows you to illustrate the breakdown of an additive variable across the group of
companies for a specific year.
Pie chart

221
Amadeus - User Guide

The 360° circle represents the sum of the variable for the year selected from the left menu across
the companies included in the analysis. Each segment represents the share of a company in terms
of this variable across the group of companies.
Example: If the aggregated value of variable N is 360,000 USD and the value of variable N for
company A is 36,000 USD, then the angle of the slice representing company A is 36° [= (36,000 /
360,000) ×360°].
By default, the four companies with the largest value for the selected variable for the selected year
are plotted on the chart. The fifth slice represents the aggregated value of the rest of the group.

8.5.3.4.2 Working with a pie chart

8.5.3.4.2.1 Changing the companies plotted on the chart

You can change the companies plotted on the chart from the left menu by clearing the check
box corresponding to a company already included and selecting the check box of the
company you want to include.
To add one or more companies to the chart without having to remove a company, you first
need to change the number of slices the chart contains from the display options (see below).

8.5.3.4.2.2 Changing the variable

If you have two or more concentration tables included in your analysis for which you have
selected different variables, these variables are all listed under Select a variable in the left
menu. To change the variable, select the option button corresponding to the variable you
want to represent.
If you have only included one table in your analysis or have selected the same variable in
several tables, you cannot change the variable illustrated.

8.5.3.4.2.3 Changing the year

222
 Analyses

If you have two or more concentration tables included in your analysis for which you have
selected different years, these years are listed in the drop-down menu Available years in
the left menu. To change the year, select it from the drop-down menu.
If you have only included one table in your analysis or have selected the same year in
several tables, you cannot change the year.

8.5.3.4.2.4 Modifying the display options

From the left menu you can modify how the pie chart is displayed according to three criteria:

• Angle:
This option allows you to rotate the pie chart around the axis passing through the
centre of the circle and perpendicular to the surface in a clockwise fashion. The first
slice starts at the angle selected from the drop-down list. At 0° the first slice's left
border starts at the top of the pie chart. Move the first slice to the right by
increasing the values (0° to 180°). Decrease to the values (from 0° to -180°) to
move the first slice to the left.

• Tilt:
This option allows you to rotate the pie chart along its horizontal axis. At 0° the pie
chart is flat. At 70° the pie chart is slanted to its maximum.

• Number of slices:
This option allows you to select the maximum number of slices (companies) that the
pie chart may contain. Increase the number of slices to add more companies to the
chart.

8.5.3.4.2.5 Showing positive/negative values

Some variables accept positive and negative values, but because it is impossible to plot both
in the same pie chart, you have to choose which values you want to consider. An option
allowing you to select which ones you want to plot is available from the left menu under the
heading Show.

8.5.3.4.3 Pie chart toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the pie chart toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the pie chart
Hide (collapse) the pie chart (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the pie chart in a new window. You can also double-click
anywhere in the element to maximise it.
Remove the pie chart from the analysis.

Notes:
• You can hide the left menu by clicking Hide.
• Except for the choice of companies to display, all the options available from the left menu
are also available from the chart's display options.

8.5.3.5 Lorenz curve (concentration)

8.5.3.5.1 Overview

The Lorenz curve allows you to illustrate the analysis with a chart measuring the concentration of a
selected variable within the group of companies and positioning a company on the curve
(represented with a orange segment on the Lorenz curve itself).

223
Amadeus - User Guide

Lorenz curve

All the companies included in the analysis are positioned on the X-axis. The order in which the
companies are plotted is determined by their position in the distribution of the selected variable. If,
for example, the group is composed of 20 companies, the first 5% of the axis represents the
company with highest value for the selected variable. The following 5% of the axis represents the
company with the second highest figure of the group and so on.
The Y-axis represents the value of the selected variable as a percentage of the total of the group.
The dashed line represents a situation of perfect equality in terms of concentration of the variable
across the group (it shows a situation where the top X% of the companies represent X% of the
total of the group).

The Lorenz curve is the blue arc joining the points [0;0] and [100;100]. The more the Lorenz curve
deviates from the dashed line, the more the variable is concentrated in small number of
companies. For example if the Lorenz curve passes by the point [10;40], this indicates the 10% of
the companies account for 40% of the value of the group.
The Gini coefficient is also given under the table. The Gini coefficient is the ratio of the area
between the Lorenz curve and the 45° degree line and the area underneath the 45° degree line.
The coefficient is always comprised between 0 and 1: the closer it is to 1, the more a variable is
concentrated in a small group of companies.

8.5.3.5.2 Working with a Lorenz curve

8.5.3.5.2.1 Displaying the position of a company

The Lorenz curve enables you to position a company on the curve. The name of the
company currently plotted is displayed in the legend underneath the chart and is
represented on the Lorenz curve with an orange segment.
To change the company select the option button corresponding to the company you want to
position from the left menu.

8.5.3.5.2.2 Changing the variable

224
 Analyses

If you have two or more concentration tables included in your analysis for which you have
selected different variables, these variables are all listed under Select a variable in the left
menu. To change the variable, select the option button corresponding to the variable you
want to represent.
If you have only included one table in your analysis or have selected the same variable in
several tables, you cannot change the variable illustrated.

8.5.3.5.2.3 Changing the year

If you have two or more concentration tables included in your analysis for which you have
selected different years, these years are listed in the drop-down menu Available years in
the left menu. To change the year, select it from the drop-down menu.
If you have only included one table in your analysis or have selected the same year in
several tables, you cannot change the year.

8.5.3.5.2.4 Showing positive/negative values

Some variables accept positive and negative values, but because it is impossible to plot both
in the same chart, you have to choose which values you want to consider. An option allowing
you to select which ones you want to plot is available from the left menu under the heading
Show.

8.5.3.5.3 Lorenz curve toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the Lorenz curve's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the Lorenz curve.
Hide (collapse) the chart (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the Lorenz curve in a new window. You can also double-click
anywhere in the element to maximise it.
Remove the chart from the analysis.

Notes:
• You can hide the left menu by clicking Hide.
• Except for the choice of companies to display, all the options available from the left menu
are also available from the chart's display options.

8.5.4 Display options

8.5.4.1 Display options for a concentration table

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Concentration Wizard and click the Display options link in the
corresponding table.
• From the table's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Concentration table display options dialog

225
Amadeus - User Guide

There are five categories of display options for this element. Use the tabs to navigate between
categories. By default you presented with the General tab.
General

The general display options allow you to modify the table's name and choose to display
companies with positive or negative values only.

• Name: the table's current name is displayed in this text box. You can modify it by
typing in a new name.

• Positive values: select to only include companies with positive values of the
variable considered in the analysis.

• Negative values: select to only include companies with negative values of the
variable considered in the analysis.
Variable
Use the Variables tab to modify the variable selected in the concentration table.

226
 Analyses

Under Options, are listed all the financial items you can select for the analysis.
To select a different variable, either:

• Use the tree-like structure and click the financial item you want to select.

• Use the search feature by typing in a keyword into the text box, clicking the
button and selecting the item from the list of matches.

Notes:
• If you have other tables included in the results of the concentration analysis, your
changes will not modify the variable selected for the other tables.
• If you have one or more charts included in your analysis based on the initial variable
and the table you are customising is the only table with this initial variable, your
changes will modify the variable for those charts as well.
Year
Use the Year tab to change the year on which the table is based.

1. Select the Relative years or Absolute years tab at the top of the wizard.
2. Select the option button corresponding to the year you want to consider for your
analysis..

Notes:
• If you have other tables included in the results of the concentration analysis, your
changes will not modify the year selected for the other tables.
• If you have one or more charts included in your analysis based on the initial year
and the table you are customising is the only table with this initial year, your
changes will modify the year used for those charts as well.

Currency
Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.

227
Amadeus - User Guide

Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.
Companies
The Currencies tab lists all the companies that were selected from the list of results for
inclusion in the analysis.
You can exclude or restore companies from the analysis by clearing/selecting the
corresponding check box(es).
You can also as save the list of selected companies by clicking the Save the company list
link.

Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.
When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.5.4.2 Display options for a pie chart (concentration)

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Concentration Wizard and click the Display options link in the
corresponding pie chart.
• From the pie chart's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Pie chart display options dialog

228
 Analyses

There are five categories of display options for this element. Use the tabs to navigate between
categories. By default you presented with the General tab.
General
The general display options allow you to modify the pie chart's name, choose how you
want the pie chart to be displayed, and to select whether you want to display positive or
negative values only

• Name:
Use the text box to change the name of the pie chart.

• Angle:
Rotate the pie chart around the axis passing through its centre and perpendicular
to the surface in a clockwise fashion. The first slice starts at the angle selected
from the drop-down list. At 0° the first slice's left border starts at the top of the
pie chart. Move the first slice to the right by increasing the values (0° to 180°).
Decrease to the values (from 0° to -180°) to move the first slice to the left.

• Tilt:
Rotate the pie chart along its horizontal axis, i.e. the pie chart will rotate
vertically. At 0° the pie chart is flat. At 70° the pie chart is slanted to its
maximum.

• Number of slices:
This option allows you to select the maximum number of slices (companies) that
the pie chart can contain. Increase the number of slices to add more companies
to the chart.

229
Amadeus - User Guide

• Positive/Negative values:
Some variables may accept positive and negative values, but because it is
impossible to plot both in the same pie chart, you have to choose which values
you want to consider.

Note: Apart from the name, all these options can be modified from the pie chart in
your analysis.
Variable
Use the Variable tab to modify the variable selected for display in the chart..

If you have only included one table in your analysis or have selected the same variable in
several tables (as in example above), you cannot change the variable illustrated.

If you have two or more concentration tables included in your analysis for which you have
selected different variables, these variables are all listed. To change the variable, select
the option button corresponding to the variable you want to represent.

Note: You can modify the variable directly from the pie chart in your analysis.
Year
Use the Year tab you can change the year displayed in the pie chart.

1. Select the Relative years or Absolute years tab at the top of the wizard.
2. Select the option button corresponding to the year you want to consider for your
analysis.

Notes:

• If you have only included one table in your analysis or have selected the same
year in several tables, you cannot change the year.

• If you have two or more concentration tables included in your analysis for which
you have selected different years, these years are listed in the left frame.

230
 Analyses

• You can modify the year directly from the pie chart in your analysis.
Currency

Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

Companies
Use the Currencies tab to exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis as well as
save the companies that are selected.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.5.4.3 Display options for a Lorenz curve (concentration)

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Concentration Wizard and click the Display options link in the
corresponding Lorenz curve.
• From the Lorenz curve's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Lorenz curve display options dialog

231
Amadeus - User Guide

There are five categories of display options for this element. Use the tabs to navigate between
categories. By default you presented with the General tab.
General

The general display options allow you to modify the chart's name and choose if you want
to plot companies with positive values or negative values.

• Name:
The chart's current name is displayed in this text box. You can modify it by typing
in a new name.

• Positive/Negative values:
Some variables may accept positive and negative values, but because it is
impossible to plot both in the same Lorenz curve, you have to choose which
values you want to consider.

Note: Apart from the name, these options can be modified from the Lorenz curve in
your analysis.
Variable
Use the Variable tab to modify the variable selected for display in the chart.

232
 Analyses

If you have only included one table in your analysis or have selected the same variable in
several tables (as in example above), you cannot change the variable illustrated.

If you have two or more concentration tables included in your analysis for which you have
selected different variables, these variables are all listed. To change the variable, select
the option button corresponding to the variable you want to represent.

Note: You can modify the variable directly from the Lorenz chart in your analysis.
Year
Use the Year tab to change the year displayed in the chart.

1. Select the Relative years or Absolute years tab at the top of the wizard.
2. Select the option button corresponding to the year you want to consider for your
analysis.

Notes:

• If you have only included one table in your analysis or have selected the same
year in several tables, you cannot change the year.

• If you have two or more concentration tables included in your analysis for which
you have selected different years, these years are listed in the left pane.

• You can modify the year directly from the Lorenz curve in your analysis.
Currency

Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

233
Amadeus - User Guide

Companies
Use the Currencies tab to exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis as well as
save the companies that are selected.
Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.

When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.6 Linear regression

Linear regression is a classical statistical technique that is used to determine the relationship
between two random variables by plotting, in a two dimensional graph, all the observations and
constructing a vertical line that best fits the data.
A good way to understand how useful this technique is, is to take an example.
Let's say that the variable X measures the Turnover, and that variable Y measures the Number of
employees of a group of companies. Intuitively, one might assume that these two variables should
be correlated positively, i.e., the larger the turnover the more employees one company will have.
This technique not only allows you to verify this assumption but also allows you to measure the
correlation between the variables.
Formally, the linear regression postulates that:
Yi = a + bXi + ei, (i=1,...,N)
where:

• ei: is said to be the "residual" and is a randomly distributed variable following a

normal distribution with a zero mean.

• Yi: is said to be the endogenous or dependent variable

234
 Analyses

• Xi: is said to be the exogenous or independent variable

• a and b: are the two parameters that the model estimates by fitting a line that best
fits the data
With a company set, you can estimate these two parameters by using the Least Square Estimation
(LSE) method which simply minimises the sum of the squared residuals. The solution to the
problem gives you a unique answer for the values of a and b.
The results of the analysis may be viewed in a regression table and/or in a regression chart.

Note: The analysis may be performed on a group of companies ranging from 2 to 5,000.

8.6.1 Accessing the Linear regression analysis

1. You can access the Linear regression analysis using the side menu from Amadeus's Home page
or List page by expanding the Linear regression submenu:

2. Choose one of the following options

New analysis

Select this option to build your own customised regression analysis. When you select this
option, you are displayed with the Linear Regression Wizard.
Predefined analyses
Choose one of the predefined analyses available to access the results of the analyses
according to the variable displayed in the selected option.

When you select a predefined analysis, you bypass the Linear Regression Wizard and are
immediately presented with the results of the regression analysis.
Saved analyses
Choose one of your previously saved regression analyses. When you click a previously
saved analysis, you are directly presented with the results of the analysis.

Notes:
• If you do not select companies from the list before accessing the regression analysis, all
companies included in your results are considered for the analysis.
• The analysis is only available if a maximum of 5,000 companies are selected for the
analysis.

235
Amadeus - User Guide

• The side menu shown above may be displayed on the other side of the screen.
• The category Saved analysis is not displayed if you have not previously saved a
regression analysis.

TIP: If you want to run a regression analysis that closely resembles one that already exists (saved
or predefined), select that analysis and then customise it by adding or removing elements,
modifying the variables, years or the display options of the different elements included in the
analysis.

8.6.2 Linear regression wizard

8.6.2.1 Overview
As with the other available analyses, the regression analysis has a built-in wizard allowing you to
construct and customise your analysis using an easy step-by-step procedure.

The Linear Regression Wizard is composed of three distinct steps:

1. Step 1: select the financial variables you want to analyse.

2. Step 2: select the year of accounting data you want to consider.

3. Step 3: select the elements (tables and charts) to include in the analysis results.
8.6.2.2 Navigation between steps
Several buttons and links are displayed at the bottom of each step allowing you to navigate
between the steps of the wizard:

Icon / Link Function

Previous Navigate to the previous step of the wizard
Next Navigate to the next step of the wizard.
Go to the results of the analysis.
This button is only active if you have completed each step of the wizard.

At the upper left of the wizard is a set of numbered icons, which you can click to jump directly to
the corresponding step

The number highlighted in orange is the current step. Clicking the last icon allows you to view the
results of the analysis and is only active if each step of the wizard has been completed.
8.6.2.3 Loading/saving/modifying/deleting a regression analysis
8.6.2.3.1 Saving your regression analysis

At each step you have the possibility to save your analysis to either the application server or to
a local or networked hard drive.

Icon Function
Save the analysis to the application server
Save the analysis to a local or network drive (.linreg file extension)

Note: These icons are only active if you completed each step of the wizard.

8.6.2.3.2 Loading a pre-existing analysis

236
 Analyses

At any step of the wizard, you may decide to load and view a pre-existing analysis. There are
two types of pre-existing analyses:

• Predefined analyses:
Under the heading Predefined analyses are listed all the predefined analyses delivered
with Amadeus. Just click the name of the predefined analysis you want to load and
view.

• Previously saved analyses:

Under the heading Saved analysis are listed all the analyses that you previously saved
on the application server. Just click the name of the saved analysis you want to load
and view.
To load an analysis that you saved on a local drive, click the Load from disk link and
browse for the relevant file (with .linreg extension).

Note: You can load a predefined or an analysis saved on the application server from the
side menu. See 'Accessing the Linear regression analysis' for more details.

8.6.2.3.3 Modifying a pre-existing analysis

Each pre-existing analysis (saved on server or predefined) can be modified by clicking the
icon corresponding to the analysis you want to modify. After clicking this icon, you are
presented with the first step of the wizard.

Note: If you are modifying a saved analysis, you can save the analysis with the same
name after having modified it. You must choose a different name if you are modifying a
predefined analysis.

8.6.2.3.4 Deleting a previously saved analysis

To delete an analysis that you previously saved on the application server, click the
corresponding icon.

8.6.2.4 Linear Regression Wizard: Step 1

8.6.2.4.1 Overview

Upon creating a new regression analysis, you are presented with the first step of the Linear
Regression Wizard. This first step allows you to select the two variables you want to consider for
the analysis.
Step 1 dialog

237
Amadeus - User Guide

8.6.2.4.2 Steps to follow

1. Use the tree-like structures to find and select the Independent variable and Dependent
variable you want to select:

• The Independent variable is the variable used as the regressor i.e. the variable "X"
in the right of the equation (also known as the 'exogenous' variable).

• The Dependent variable is the variable used as the regressand i.e. the variable "Y"
on the left of the equation (also known as the 'endogenous' variable).

You can also click the icon displayed in the upper right of each selection area to open
the tree view in a pop-up window from where you can run a search to easily find the
desired variables.

2. The selected variable is displayed under Your selections.

3. Click the Next link to move to the next step of the Wizard.

Notes: If you are modifying an analysis that already has some elements included, the variable
that you select in this step will not modify the variable used in the elements that have already been
included. Changing the variable here only determines the variable that will be used in elements
that you add subsequently.
To change the variable of an element modify the element's display options.
8.6.2.5 Linear Regression Wizard: Step 2
8.6.2.5.1 Overview

The second step of the Linear Regression Wizard allows you to select the year of accounting data
you want to consider for each variable selected in step 1.
Step 2 dialog

238
 Analyses

8.6.2.5.2 Steps to follow

1. For each selected variable, select the Relative years or Absolute years tab at the top of the
wizard.

2. Select the check box(es) corresponding to the year(s) you want to consider for each
variable in your analysis.
3. Click the Next link to move to the next step of the wizard.

Notes:
• If you are modifying an analysis that already has some elements included, the year that
you select in this step will not modify the year used in the elements that have already been
included. Changing the year here only determines the year that will be considered in
elements that you add subsequently.
To change the year of an element modify the element's display options.
• Selecting different years for the two variables can be useful to determine the relationship of
variables at different times (e.g. relationship of turnover at time T and number of
employees at time T+1).

8.6.2.6 Linear Regression Wizard: Step 3

8.6.2.6.1 Overview

The third and final step of the Linear Regression Wizard allows you to select the elements you want
to include in the results of the regression analysis.
Step 3 dialog

239
Amadeus - User Guide

Two types of presentation element can be selected, which are listed under Options:

• Table

• Regression chart

8.6.2.6.2 Steps to follow

1. Click an element to add it. The selected element is then displayed under Your selections.
2. To remove an element, clear its check box in the table under Your selections (clearing the
check box in the header removes all elements).
3. The analysis results will present the elements in the same order as they appear in the table.
You can change this by dragging and dropping them to the desired position.
4. Each element will display the results according to your choices in step 1 and step 2 of the
Wizard. You can modify both the year and variable, and can further customise the display of
each element by clicking the corresponding Display options link.
5. Click the Finish button to generate and view the results of the regression analysis.

TIP: You can add as many elements of the same type as you want in one same analysis. Use
the Display options to customise each element so you can view the results from different
perspectives.

8.6.3 Working with the results of a linear regression

8.6.3.1 Overview
After having loaded a predefined analysis, loaded a previously saved analysis or built a new
analysis with the Linear Regression Wizard, the results of the analysis are displayed.
The regression analysis is composed of elements that can be of two types:

240
 Analyses

• Linear regression table

• Regression chart
An analysis can be composed of more than one element of the same type. The display of each
individual element can be customised allowing you to have a different perspective on the same set
of data.

For example you can include two tables analysing the relationship of two variables among the same
group of companies, or two tables analysing the relationship of one variable among two groups of
companies or one group of companies for two years.
To customise the display options of an element click the Options link from the upper right of the
element.
Use the scrollbar to navigate between the elements included in your analysis.
8.6.3.2 Analysis results toolbar
The following icons are available in the toolbar displayed at the top the results of the analysis:

Icon Function
Modify the settings defined at any step of the Linear Regression Wizard
by clicking the corresponding step number
Add or remove elements (tables or graphs) from the regression analysis
Export the results of the regression analysis to an external document of
a specified format (Excel or PDF)
Export and send the results of the regression analysis by email to a
selection of recipients
Print out the results of the regression analysis.

Notes:
• Modifying a step in the wizard only determines the variable and year that will be used in
elements that you subsequently add to the analysis and not the elements already included
in the analysis.
• Each individual element may be hidden ( ), deleted ( ) or maximised ( ).

8.6.3.3 Linear regression table

8.6.3.3.1 Overview

The regression table displays:

• The estimated equation (Y = aX +b) and the correlation coefficient.

• All the companies for which the selected variables are available for the selected years.

Note: Click a company name to display the company's report in a new window.

• The median, standard deviation and average of the independent variable and dependent
variable.

• The values of the independent variable

• The observed values (real values) of the dependent variable

• The value of the dependent variable calculated by the equation (fitted value). The
difference between the calculated and real value is the error. The sum of the all the errors
are always equal to zero.

Regression table

241
Amadeus - User Guide

8.6.3.3.2 Working with a regression table

8.6.3.3.2.1 Sorting the table

You can sort the table according to any of the three columns:

• The value of the independent variable (default)

• The real value of the dependent variable

• The calculated value of the dependent variable

• To sort the table by a column, click in the column header ( : indicates an

ascending sort; : indicates a descending)

8.6.3.3.2.2 Working with the columns

You can modify the width of each column by clicking its border and dragging it to the desired
width.

8.6.3.3.2.3 Swapping the dependent and independent variable

To swap the dependent and independent variable click the icon displayed at the top left
corner of the table

8.6.3.3.2.4 Removing a company from the table

To remove a company from the regression table, click the icon corresponding to the
company you want to remove. you can restore the deleted companies from the table's
display options.

Note: You can also delete a line corresponding to a summary statistic such as the
average or the standard deviation in the same way. You can restore these lines from the
table's general display options.

242
 Analyses

8.6.3.3.3 Regression table toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the table's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the table.
Hide (collapse) the table (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the table in a new window. You can also double-click in the
section to maximise it.
Remove the table from the analysis.

8.6.3.4 Regression chart

8.6.3.4.1 Overview

The regression chart plots, on a two dimensional graph, each observation (company) and the
regression line.
Regression chart

• The Y-axis plots the values of the dependent variable. The X-axis plots the values of the
independent variable.

• Each dot represents an observation (company). The orange dot represents the company
selected in the left menu (see below for more details).

• The blue line represent the regression line.

Underneath the table are displayed the estimated equation (Y = aX + b), the correlation coefficient
and the name of the company currently positioned in the chart.

8.6.3.4.2 Working with a regression chart

8.6.3.4.2.1 Displaying the position of a company in the chart

Each company included in the analysis can be plotted in the regression chart by selecting a
company name from the menu on the left of the chart, or by clicking a dot within the chart.
Within the chart, the company is represented by an orange dot. The name of the selected
company is displayed in the legend underneath the chart.

243
Amadeus - User Guide

8.6.3.4.2.2 Including/removing the median, standard deviation and/or average

Select/clear the check box corresponding to the parameter you want to show/hide in the
graph.

8.6.3.4.3 Regression chart toolbar

The icons and links displayed in the chart's toolbar are as follows:

Icon/link Function
Options Change the display options of the chart.
Hide (collapse) the chart (restore the element by clicking ).
Maximise and open the chart in a new window. You can also double-click in the
section to maximise it.
Remove the chart from the analysis.

Note: You can hide the left menu by clicking Hide.

8.6.4 Display options

8.6.4.1 Display options for a regression table

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Linear Regression Wizard and click the Display options link in the
corresponding table.
• From the table's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Regression table display options dialog

There are five categories of display options for this element. Use the tabs to navigate between
categories. By default you presented with the General tab.
General
The general display options allow you to modify the table's name and select the parameters
you want to display.

244
 Analyses

• Name:
The table's current name is displayed in this text box. You can modify it by typing in
a new name.

• Select the items you want to display:

By default the median, standard deviation and average are all displayed at the top
of the table.
Select/clear the check box(es) of the parameter(s) you want to include/remove from
the table.
Each parameter may be displayed at the top or the bottom of the table.
Variables
Use the Variables tab to modify the variables selected in the regression table.

Under Options are listed all the financial items you can select for the analysis.

Use the tree-like structures to find and select the Independent variable and the Dependent
variable you want to select:

• The Independent variable is the variable used as the regressor i.e. the variable "X"
in the right of the equation (also known as the 'exogenous' variable).

• The Dependent variable is the variable used as the regressand i.e the variable "Y"
on the left of the equation (also known as the 'endogenous' variable).

You can also click the icon displayed in the upper right of each selection area to open the
tree view in a pop-up window, from where you can search to find the desired variables

Notes:
• If you have other tables included in the results of the regression analysis, your
changes will not modify the variable selected for the other tables.
• If you have one or more regression charts included in your analysis based on the
initial variables and the table you are customising is the only table with these initial
variables, your changes will modify the variables for those charts as well.
Years
Use the Years tab to change the year of accounting data you want to consider for each
variable selected in the table.

245
Amadeus - User Guide

1. For each selected variable, select the Relative years or Absolute years tab at the top
of the wizard.
2. Select the option button corresponding to the year you want to consider for each
variable included in your analysis.

Notes:
• If you have other tables included in the results of the regression analysis, your
changes will not modify the year selected for the other tables.
• If you have one or more charts included in your analysis based on the initial years
and the table you are customising is the only table with these initial years, your
changes will modify the years used for those charts as well.
Currency
Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.

Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.
Companies
The Currencies tab lists all the companies that were selected from the list of results for
inclusion in the analysis.
You can exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis by clearing/selecting the
corresponding check box(es).
You can also save the list of selected companies by clicking the Save the company list
link.

246
 Analyses

Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.
When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

8.6.4.2 Display options for a regression chart

Access: To access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the Linear Regression Wizard and click the Display options link in the
corresponding table.
• From the regression chart's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click the Options link.

Regression chart display options dialog

There are five categories of display options for this element. Use the tabs to navigate between
categories. By default you presented with the General tab.
General
The general display options allow you to modify the chart's name and select the parameters
you want to display.

247
Amadeus - User Guide

• Name:
The chart's current name is displayed in this text box. You can modify it by typing in
a new name.

• Select the items you want to display:

By default the median, standard deviation and average are not included in the chart.
Select/clear the check box(es) corresponding to the parameter(s) you want to
include/remove from the table.
Variables
Use the Variable tab to modify the variables selected in the regression table.

If you have only included one table in your analysis or have selected the same dependent
and independent variables in several tables (as in example above), you cannot change the
variables illustrated.

If you have two or more regression tables included in your analysis for which you have
selected different dependent and independent variables, these variables are all listed. To
change the variable, select the option button corresponding to the variable you want to
represent.

Note: If you have other charts included in the results of the regression analysis, your
changes will not modify the variable selected for the other charts.
Years
Use the Years tab to change the year of accounting data you want to consider for each
variable selected in the chart.

248
 Analyses

1. For each selected variable, select the Relative years or Absolute years tabs at the
top of the wizard.
2. Select the option button corresponding to the year you want to consider for each
variable included in your analysis.

Note: If you have other tables included in the results of the regression analysis, your
changes will not modify the year selected for the other tables.
Currency
Use the Currency tab to modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.

Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.
Companies
The Currencies tab lists all the companies that were selected from the list of results for
inclusion in the analysis.
You can exclude (or restore) companies from the analysis by clearing/selecting the
corresponding check box(es).
You can also as save the list of selected companies by clicking the Save the company list
link.

249
Amadeus - User Guide

Any change in this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.
When you are finished customising the display of the element, click the OK button to confirm your
selection.

Note: Modifying the options in a category whose a tab has a dark blue background, will apply
to all the elements included in your analysis.

250
9 Maps
9.1 Working with maps

The following navigation possibilities and user actions are available in all maps provided by
Amadeus.

9.1.1 Level of display

The Level of display drop-down menu available at the top-right hand side of the map allows you
to define the borders drawn on the map (from the most aggregated to the least aggregated).

9.1.2 Zooming in/out of the map

There are three ways you may modify the level of zoom of the map:
Use the wheel of your mouse

• scroll the wheel forward to zoom in ;

• scroll the wheel backwards to zoom out.
You will zoom in where the cursor of the mouse is located on the map.

Use the cursor on the zoom gauge

• Move the cursor of the gauge up to zoom in ;

• Move the cursor of the gauge down to zoom out.

When zooming in, you will be zoomed in the center of the map.

Use the mouse button + the Ctrl key on your keyboard

Press down on the Ctrl key on your keyboard and then click and drag on the area of the
map you would like to zoom in on. The map will zoom in the area delimited by the border
that you draw.
Double click on the map
Double click anywhere in the map to zoom in and center the map where you double clicked.

9.1.3 Navigating within the map

When you zoom in to the map, you may navigate in any 360° direction in the three following ways:
Use the navigation compass

251
Amadeus - User Guide

Left-click and hold down on the area of the navigation compass you would like to move in
the map. The further you position the mouse away from the center of the compass, the
faster you will navigate within the map.

Use the arrows on your keyboard

Use the arrows on your keyboard to move in the direction indication by the arrow (e.g. the
up arrow will move you in the northern direction)
Use your mouse
You may click and drag directly on the map to navigate within the map (e.g. clicking and
dragging down will navigate North).

9.2 Cartographic analysis

The cartographic analysis allows you to illustrate the geographic distribution of a previously
selected company set according to specific variable.
The results of the analysis may presented in a:

• Table displaying a variety of statistics per zone.

• Map displaying the visual geographic of the selected variable among the different zones.

Note: you may run this analysis on maximum 500 companies .

9.2.1 Accessing the cartographic analysis

1. You may access the cartographic analysis using the side menu from Amadeus's Home page or
List page by expanding the Analysis sub-menu under the category Map:

2. Choose one of the following options

New analysis

252
 Maps

Select this option to build your own customised cartographic analysis. When you select this
option, you are displayed with the cartographic analysis wizard.
Predefined analysis
Choose one of the predefined analyses available to access the results of the cartographic
analyses according to the variable displayed in the selected option.
When you select a predefined analysis, you bypass the cartographic wizard and are
immediately displayed with the results of the cartographic analysis.

Saved analyses
Choose one of your previously saved geographic analyses. When you click on a previously
saved cartographic analysis, you are directly presented with the results of the analysis.

Notes:
• If you do not select companies from the list before accessing the cartographic analysis, all
companies included in your results are considered for the analysis.
• The analysis is only available if a maximum of 500 companies are selected for the analysis.
• The side menu shown above may be displayed on the other side of the screen.
• The category Launch a saved analysis is not displayed if you have not previously saved a
cartographic analysis.

9.2.2 Cartographic analysis wizard

9.2.2.1 Cartographic analysis wizard
9.2.2.1.1 Overview

As with the other available analyses, the cartographic analysis has a built wizard allowing you to
easily construct and customise your analysis using an easy step-by-step procedure.

The cartographic analysis wizard is composed of three distinct steps:

1. Step 1: select the additive variable you would like to analyse.

2. Step 2: select the year of accounting data you wish to consider.

3. Step 3: select the element (table or map) to include in the cartographic analysis results.

9.2.2.1.2 Navigation between steps

Several buttons and links are displayed at the bottom of each step allowing to navigate between
the different steps of the wizard:

Icon / Link Function

Previous Navigate to the previous step of the wizard
Next Navigate to the next step of the wizard.
Go to the results of the cartographic analysis.
This button is only active if you have completed each step of the wizard.

At the top-left hand side of each step you may directly jump to a specific step by clicking on the
desired step number.

The number highlighted in orange is the step you are currently at. Clicking on the last icon allows
you to view the results of the cartographic analysis and is only active if each step of the wizard has
been completed.

9.2.2.1.3 Loading/saving/modifying/deleting a cartographic analysis

9.2.2.1.3.1 Saving your cartographic analysis

At each step you have the possibility to save your analysis to either the application server or to
a local or networked hard drive.

253
Amadeus - User Guide

Icon Function
Save the analysis to the application server
Save the analysis to a local or network drive (.car extension file)

Note: These two icons are only active if you completed each step of the wizard.

9.2.2.1.3.2 Loading a pre-existing analysis

At any step of the wizard, you may decide to load and view a pre-existing analysis. There are
two types of pre-existing analyses:

• Predefined analyses:
Under the heading Predefined analyses are listed all the predefined analyses delivered
with application. Just click on the name of the predefined analysis you wish to load and
view.

• Previously saved analyses:

Under the heading Saved analysis are listed all the analyses that you previously saved
on the application server. Just click on the name of the saved analysis you wish to load
and view.
To load an analysis that you saved on a local hard drive, click on the link Load from
disk and browse for the relevant file where you saved (with .car extension).

Note: You may load a predefined or an analysis saved on the application server from the
side menu. See Accessing the cartographic analysis for more details.

9.2.2.1.3.3 Modifying a pre-existing analysis

Each pre-existing analysis (saved on server or predefined) can be modified by clicking on

corresponding to the analysis you wish to modify. After clicking on this icon, you presented
with the first step of the wizard.

Note: If you are modifying a saved analysis, you may save the analysis with the same
name after having modified it. You must choose a different name if you are modifying a
predefined analysis.

9.2.2.1.3.4 Deleting a previously saved analysis

To delete an analysis that you previously saved on the application server, click on the
corresponding .
9.2.2.2 Cartographic wizard: step 1
9.2.2.2.1 Overview

Upon creating a new cartographic analysis, you are presented with the first step of the cartographic
wizard. This first step allows you to select the variable you wish to consider for the analysis.
Step 1 dialog

254
 Maps

9.2.2.2.2 Steps to follow

1. On the left pane, are listed all the financial items you may select for the analysis. To select
a variable, either:

• Use the tree-like structure and click on the financial item you wish to select.

• Use the search feature by typing in a keyword in the provided field, clicking on the
Search button and selecting the item from the list of items matching the
characters entered.

2. The selected variable is displayed under Your selection.

3. Choose between using the aggregated (i.e. sum of selected variable across all companies
within a zone) or average (i.e. arithmetic average of selected variable across all companies
within a zone) value of the selected variable.
4. Click on Next to move to the next step of the wizard.

Note: the results of your analysis will significantly vary depending on whether you choose to
use the aggregated or average value of a variable.

9.2.2.3 Cartographic wizard: step 2

9.2.2.3.1 Overview

The second step of the wizard allows you to select the year of accounting data you wish to
consider.
Step 2 dialog

255
Amadeus - User Guide

9.2.2.3.2 Steps to follow

1. Select the radio button corresponding to the year you wish to consider for your analysis.
2. Click on Next to move to the next step of the wizard
9.2.2.4 Cartographic wizard: step 3
9.2.2.4.1 Overview

The third and final step of the cartographic wizard allows you to select the section you wish to
include in the results of the cartographic analysis.
Step 3 dialog

The two sections, listed under Section, that you may include are:

• Table

• Map

9.2.2.4.2 Steps to follow

1. Click on the radio button corresponding to the section you wish to display.
2. The selected section will display the results according to your choices in step 1 and step 2 of
the wizard. You may modify both the year and variable as well further customise the display of
each element by clicking on the corresponding Display options link

• Display options for a cartographic table

• Display options for a map

3. Click on the Finish button to generate and view the results of the cartographic analysis.

9.2.3 Working with the results of a cartographic analysis

9.2.3.1 Working with the results of a cartographic analysis
9.2.3.1.1 Overview

After having loaded a predefined analysis, loaded a previously saved analysis or built a new
analysis with the cartographic wizard, the result of the analysis is displayed.
The results cartographic analysis may either be presented as a table or a map.

• You may switch from table to map or map to table by click on the Switch to ... link in the
sections tool-bar.

256
 Maps

• To customise the display options of an element click the link Options form the upper-right
hand corner of the element.

9.2.3.1.2 Analysis results toolbar

The following icons are available in the tool-bar displayed at the top-right hand side of the
analysis :

Icon Function
Select the section to display (table or map) in the cartographic analysis
Export the results of the cartographic analysis to an external document of a
specified format (Excel or PDF)
Export and send the results of the cartographic analysis by email to a
selection of recipients
Print out the results of the cartographic analysis.

Notes:
• You may modify the settings defined at any step of the cartographic wizard by clicking on
the step number from the icons displayed at the top left of the cartographic analysis.

• Each section may be hidden ( ) or maximised ( ).

9.2.3.2 Cartographic table

9.2.3.2.1 Overview

The columns of the cartographic table display:

• All the zones in which at least one company has a value for the selected variable for the
selected year

• The value of the selected for each zone for the selected year

• The rank of each zone in terms of the selected variable

• A series of parameters such as quartile, decile, etc (you may choose the parameters to
display by modifying the display options)
Cartographic table

257
Amadeus - User Guide

The median, standard deviation and average are also displayed within the table (also selectable by
modifying the display options).
Underneath the table are displayed the value of the limits of each quartile and decile.

9.2.3.2.2 Working with a distribution table

9.2.3.2.2.1 Sorting the table

The table is only sortable according to the value of the selected variable.
To change the order of the sort click on within the column header ( : indicates an ascending
sort; : indicates a descending)

9.2.3.2.2.2 Working with the columns

• You may modify the width of each column by clicking on the border of a column and dragging
it to the desired width.

• You may change the order of the columns by dragging & dropping a column to the desired
position.

• You may delete a column by clicking on the in the header of the column you wish to
remove.

Note: you may reinclude a deleted column from the table's general display options.

9.2.3.2.2.3 Removing a zone from the table

To remove a zone from the table, click on the corresponding to zone you wish to remove. You
may reinclude the deleted zone from the table's display options.

Note: you may also delete a line corresponding to a summary statistic such as the average or
the standard deviation in the same way. You may reinclude these lines from the table's general
display options.

9.2.3.2.3 Cartographic table tool-bar

The icons and links displayed in the table's tool-bar are defined hereunder:

Icon/link Function

258
 Maps

Switch to View the map representation of the results of the analysis

map
Options Change the display options of the table.
Hide (collapse) the table (re-display the element by clicking on ).
Maximise and open the table in a new window. You may also double click in
the section to maximise it.

9.2.3.3 Map
9.2.3.3.1 Overview

The map representation of the results of a cartographic analysis displays the position of each zone
(in which at least company has a known value for the selected variable and year) in the quantiles
(quartiles or deciles) by color coding the zones according to the legend displayed at the bottom of
the map.

Map representation of the results

To the left of the map, the hierarchical list of zones are displayed.

9.2.3.3.2 Working with the map

The map offers several navigation possibilities and options to define the borders drawn on the map.
Please see Working with maps for more details on the standard navigation possibilities.

9.2.3.3.3 Map tool-bar

The icons and links displayed in the table's tool-bar are defined hereunder:

Icon/link Function
Switch to View the results of the analysis in a table.
table
Options Change the display options of the table.
Hide (collapse) the map (re-display the element by clicking on ).
Maximise and open the map in a new window. You may also double click in
the section to maximise it.

9.2.4 Display options

9.2.4.1 Display options for a cartographic table

Access: to access this dialog, either:

259
Amadeus - User Guide

• Go to step 3 of the cartographic wizard and click on the link Display options from the
corresponding table.
• From the cartographic table's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click on the Options
link

Cartographic table display options

There are five categories of display options for the table, each represented by a tab. You may
navigate from one category to another using the tabs. By default you presented with the General
tab.

General
The general display options allow you to modify the table's name and select the items you
wish to display in the lines and columns.

260
 Maps

• Name:
The current name of the table is displayed in this text box. You may modify it by
typing in a new name.

• Select the items you want to display:

 Lines:
By default the median, standard deviation and average are all displayed at the
top of the table.
Activate/deactivate the check-box(es) corresponding to the parameter(s) you
wish to include/remove from the table.
Each parameter may be displayed at the top or the bottom of the table.
 Columns:
By default the table includes columns displaying the number of companies, the
quartile in which each of the zones belong, the decile in which each of the
zones belong and rank .
Activate/deactivate the check-box(es) corresponding to the column(s) you wish
to include/remove from the table.
Variable

Under this tab you may modify the variable selected in the table.

Under Options, are listed all the financial items you may select for the analysis.
To select a different variable, either:

• Use the tree-like structure and click on the financial item you wish to select.

261
Amadeus - User Guide

• Use the search feature by typing in a keyword in the provided field, clicking on the
Search button and selecting the item from the list of items matching the characters
entered.
Once the variables is selected, choose between using the aggregated (i.e. sum of selected
variable across all companies within a zone) or average (i.e. arithmetic average of selected
variable across all companies within a zone) value of the selected variable.
Year

Under the year tab you may change the year on which the table is based.

Currency

Under the currency tab you may modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.

Any change under this tab apply to all elements included in your analysis.
Zones
Under this tab are listed all the geographical zones in which there is at least one company
included in the analysis.
You may exclude or reinclude zones from the analysis by deactivating/activating the
corresponding check-box(es).

Note: modifying the options under a category represented by a tab with a dark blue
background, will also apply to the table.

262
 Maps

9.2.4.2 Display options for a map

Access: to access this dialog, either:

• Go to step 3 of the cartographic wizard and click on the link Display options from the
corresponding map.
• From the cartographic map's toolbar in the results of your analysis, click on the Options
link

Map display options

There are five categories of display options for the map, each represented by a tab. You may
navigate from one category to another using the tabs. By default you presented with the General
tab.
General
The general display options allow you to modify the map's name, how to display the weights
associated to the zones and choose the level of display.

Variable

Under this tab you may modify the variable selected in the map.

263
Amadeus - User Guide

Under Options, are listed all the financial items you may select for the analysis.

To select a different variable, either:

• Use the tree-like structure and click on the financial item you wish to select.

• Use the search feature by typing in a keyword in the provided field, clicking on the
Search button and selecting the item from the list of items matching the characters
entered.
Once the variables is selected, choose between using the aggregated (i.e. sum of selected
variable across all companies within a zone) or average (i.e. arithmetic average of selected
variable across all companies within a zone) value of the selected variable.
Year

Under the year tab you may change the year on which the map is based.

Currency
Under the currency tab you may modify the currency and unit in which financial items are
expressed.

Zones
Under this tab are listed all the geographical zones in which there is at least one company
included in the analysis.
You may exclude or reinclude zones from the analysis by deactivating/activating the
corresponding check-box(es).

264
Maps

265
10 Alerts
10.1 Alerts - overview

Amadeus has a built-in Alert System allowing you to set up and configure scheduled alerts, which
keep you informed about any software or data updates. You can configure these alerts to be sent
to yourself or to a selection of recipients.

10.1.1 Entity specific alerts

You can place data update alerts on the following types of entities:

• Search strategies: a series of search steps linked together with Boolean operators [AND,
OR, AND NOT].
When saving a search strategy, the number of companies included in your results may vary
through time as the database gets updated. On the other hand, when saving a company
set, the number of companies remains constant through time.
You can create and configure alerts on this type of entity from the Save my search screen,
from the list of results or from the list of alerts.

• company sets: a static array of companies that are saved using a unique identifier.
A company set is said to be static because the companies included in it remain constant
through time
You can create and configure alerts on this type of entity from the Save my search screen,
from the list of results or from the list of alerts.

• Specific companies: refers to a single company record in the database.

You can create and configure alerts on this type of entity from the company report or from
the list of alerts.

For each of the above entities, you can set alert criteria for any changes in data ranging from
ownership and financial data to new deal information and news articles.
For search strategies, you can also set an alert for companies that become added to the database
and that comply with your search strategy.

10.1.2 Global alerts

Two special types of alerts are also available that do not relate to any specific entity type but to the
product as a whole:

• Database update alert: sends out an email notification when Amadeus's database has
been updated.

• Software update alert: sends out an email notification when Amadeus's software has
been updated.
These types of alerts can be activated from the alerts settings screen.

10.2 Creating and configuring alerts

Access:
• From the Save a search screen, select the option Include this file in your alerts before
saving.
• From the list of results toolbar, click the Alerts icon, save the file and then click the
Next button.
• From the report toolbar, click the Alerts icon.
• From the list of alerts, click the yes or no link in the Active alert column.

Creating and configuring alerts is a straightforward process. The available alert criteria are
organised by category:
1. Expand the categories from which you want to select alert criteria.

267
Amadeus - User Guide

2. Select the check boxes corresponding to the alert criteria you want to apply to the file.
3. Select the recipients you want to send the alert to by either:

• Typing in the email addresses separated by semicolons.

• Click the icon to select recipients stored in your address book.

4. Specify the result layout you want to apply to the Excel worksheet attached to your email
alert.
5. Click the OK button to confirm your selection and create the alert.

10.3 List of alerts

Access: From Amadeus's toolbar, click List of alerts from the Alerts menu.

10.3.1 Overview
The list of alerts allows you to manage all your alerts in the following ways:

• Control which alerts are active,

• Modify or include a file in the alert system,

• Modify the list format associated with each alert,

• Determine and update recipients assigned to each alert.

10.3.2 Working with the list of alerts

10.3.2.1 Sorting the list
You can sort the list of companies according to any column where you see in the column header.
The list is sorted according to the column displayed with in darker grey ( indicates ascending,
indicates descending).
To sort the list according to a different column or to change the sort order, click the arrows in the
corresponding column header.
10.3.2.2 Including or modifying an alert
The Active alert column indicates which files are currently included in the alert system:

• Yes:
Indicates that an alert is associated with this file. Click the link to modify the alert criteria
associated with the file.

• No:
Indicates that no alert has been set up for this file. Click the link to create and configure
the alert associated with the file.
10.3.2.3 Modifying the recipients associated to an alert file
The list of recipients assigned to each alert is displayed in the Recipients column.
You can add/remove recipients by:

• Editing the contents of the text box in the row. Use a semicolon (;) as a separator if you
include more than one recipient

268
 Alerts

• Clicking the icon to select or ignore recipients stored in your address book.

10.4 Alerts settings

Access:
• From Amadeus's toolbar, click Settings from the Alerts menu.
• Click the Settings link when creating or configuring your alert.

Amadeus allows you to set up some global settings on all the alerts in the system.

The following settings may be configured:

• Select the format of your e-mail alerts:

Select an option button to indicate whether you want your alert emails to be sent in HTML
or Text format.

• Select the frequency of your e-mail alerts:

Select an option button to indicate whether you want your alerts to be sent out Daily,
Weekly or Monthly. For weekly alerts you can then choose which day of the week the
emails should be sent.

• Place alerts on hold:

Select this check box if you want to stop alert emails being sent temporarily. Then click the
links to indicate the start and end of the required time period.

In addition to these alert configuration settings, the following global options can be selected:

• Database update: select this option to receive an email notification whenever the
database has been updated.

• Software update: select this option to receive an email notification whenever the
software has been updated.

Note: Update emails will only be sent to your address and not to addresses stored in your
address book.

10.5 Address book

Access: From Amadeus's toolbar, click Address books from the Alerts menu.

Amadeus's address book allows you to specify and store a list of email addresses for potential
recipients of your alerts.

269
Amadeus - User Guide

1. Either:

• Type as many email addresses as you want into the text box. Use a semicolon (;) as
a separator between addresses.

• Or to import a list of addresses in MS Outlook format, click the Choose File button
and browse for the required file (.pst), clicking the Import button to complete the
step.
2. Click the OK button to confirm your selection.

10.6 Place alerts on hold

Use this option to stop alert emails being sent temporarily.

To do so:

1. In the alert settings dialog, select the Place alerts on hold from check box.
2. Click the first date link and choose the date from which you want the hold to commence.

3. Click the second date link and choose the date at which you want the hold to end.
All your active alerts to all recipients will be suspended until one of the following:

• The day after the specified end date.

• You clear this option manually before the specified end date.

270
11 Exporting
11.1 Working with the export system
11.1.1 Overview
Amadeus includes an integrated and dedicated system allowing you to export, in a range of file
formats, lists, company reports, peer reports, analyses, graphs and more.
Whenever you can export data displayed on your screen you will see the following icons displayed
in the upper right of the section that includes the data:

Icon Explanation
Use this button to display the export settings dialog and export the data to a predefined
format
Use this button if, as well as exporting the data to a predefined file format, you want to
send the file to a selection of recipients by email

To avoid hindering the performance of the application, most exports are not processed on the
server hosting the application but on a dedicated, independent server. Each time you execute an
export you are sending a request to this dedicated server to begin the export process.

This means that you can continue working normally and do not have to wait for your requested
export to be processed.

11.1.2 Limitations
Because at any one time there can potentially be a large number of requests, some limitations
have been implemented in order to optimise the performance of the dedicated export servers:

• Each dedicated server can process a maximum number of simultaneous exports. This
number depends on the application you are using.

• At any one time, the application in use can only send one request per user to the dedicated
export server. Hence, if you request two consecutive exports in a short time period, your
first request will be processed immediately while the other will pend until the first one is
successfully processed. If for technical reasons, the subsequent file cannot be processed
after a specific lapse of time, a message informs you that the export is waiting and that
you will be notified by email when it is ready.
When your export is finished you can then download it to a local or network drive.
11.1.2.1 Specific limitations when exporting a list of results
1. To minimise potential performance problems on the dedicated export servers, the amount
of data that can be included in each export is limited. This limit is determined by a formula
that takes into account the number of companies, and the nature and the number of
variables you are exporting.
If your proposed export exceeds this limit, a message prompts you to refine your selection.
2. An Excel worksheet is limited to 255 columns, 65,536 lines and 32,768 characters per cell.
If your list exceeds any of these thresholds, a message is displayed recommending you to
select another export format.

11.1.2.2 Specific limitations when exporting a company report

1. When exporting the company report currently displayed on your screen, it is executed
directly by the server hosting the application. This means that you have to wait for the
export to be fully processed before continuing your work. Also these exports are not listed
under the "My Exports" in your custom settings.
2. You can include a maximum of 50 company reports in one export.
3. If you export to Excel, you are not limited to 65,536 lines. If your report exceeds this limit,
the extra lines of the report will be included in a new worksheet.

271
Amadeus - User Guide

4. Exporting the subsidiary section on several levels or the Corporate Group section is only
possible for a single company (current company).
See Downloading limitation for information on limitations linked to data restrictions.

11.2 Export formats

Amadeus offers a variety of export formats for data. Available formats depend on the module from
which you want to export the data:

Module Available export formats

Excel Text Adobe Acropbat

(*.xls, (Tab delimited) XML PDF
*.xlsx) (*.txt) (*.pdf)
List
Reports
Analyses

11.2.1 Which export format is more appropriate?

11.2.1.1 Excel (*.xls)

Advantages
Ability to contain and organise data in a structured manner
Supports graphics
Disadvantages
The main disadvantage is that you cannot export a large amount of data to an Excel worksheet
due to the inherent limitations of Excel: an Excel worksheet is limited to 255 columns, 65,536
lines and 32,768 characters per cell.
Assessment
It is an ideal format if you are exporting a medium amount of data and intend to process the
data further in order to integrate it into a larger database, or to format the data for
presentation purposes.
It is an inappropriate format if you exporting a large amount of data. If you are exporting a list
with over 253 variables and/or 65,535 companies you should consider exporting to a text file.

11.2.1.2 Text (tab delimited) (*.txt)

Advantages
No limitations in terms of the amount of data it can contain.
Disadvantages
Does not support graphics.
Data contained is unstructured and therefore needs to be further processed in order to be
usable.
Assessment
It is an ideal format if you are exporting a large amount of raw data that you intend to process
at a later stage with applications such as Excel, Access or another Database Management
System.
It is inappropriate if you are exporting the data for presentation purposes or if you want to
export to data that will be directly usable without further processing.

Note: Exports to text files are encoded in UTF-16, which means that double-byte characters
are supported (special characters, Russian characters, Chinese etc.)

272
 Exporting

11.2.1.3 Adobe Acrobat PDF (*.pdf)

Advantages
Supports graphics
Disadvantages
Supports a small amount of data
Data cannot be further processed.
Assessment
This is an ideal format if you are exporting a small amount of data and are including graphics
for presentation purposes.
It is inappropriate if you want to process the data further or to integrate the data into a larger
database.

11.3 Downloading limitations

The following limitations affect any function available on Amadeus where data can be extracted:

• Export/send to function

• Alerts (when a list format is included in the email alert)

• Web add-in

• Webservices
Printing is not considered to be an extraction and is not affected.

11.3.1 Germany
The following limitations exist for German companies not included in the Very Large and Large
categories:

• per update and per concurrent user,

• maximum 1,500 street name + number can be downloaded

11.3.2 Sweden/Denmark
The following limitations exist for Swedish/Danish companies not included in the Very Large and
Large categories:

• per update and per concurrent user,

• maximum 10,000 of any of the following data can be downloaded:

• SNI-SE code as provided by UC (Sweden only)

• Street name + number (Sweden only)

• Phone number (Sweden only)

• Partial or full P/L Accounts or Balance Sheets relating to the last available year
(Sweden + Denmark)

11.3.3 Spain and Portugal

The following limitation for Spanish/Portuguese companies not included in the Very Large and
Large categories apply:

• per update and per concurrent user,

• maximum 10,000 of any of the following data can be downloaded :

• Partial or full balance sheet or profit & loss accounts relating to the last available
year of accounts

273
Amadeus - User Guide

11.3.4 France
Downloading any data item related to companies coming from Astrée (Limited financials or no
financials available) is not included in the standard subscription to Amadeus, whatever its size
category.

Notes:
• The limitation applies on any extraction from the list, add-in or webservice modules
• On the web version of Amadeus, you may download the restricted data by using/buying
additional BvD credits. When restricted data is included in a data extract, it will cost 1
additional BvD credit per company, whatever the type of subscription (paying or pay-per-
view).
Once extracted, any future extracts of the same data will not consume credits for a period
of one year. For German companies: 1BvD credits is counted per set of 3 German
addresses, 1 Swedish company, 1 Danish company, 1 Spanish company, 1 Portuguese
company or set of 20 Astrée companies.
• On the disk version, you can download the restricted data by using a specific protected
password. The password is provided only when a specific access is invoiced and effectively
paid. Please contact your account manager for more information.

11.4 Exporting from the list of results

Accessing: Click the icon when it is available in the list toolbar.

11.4.1 Overview
The export function from the List of results page allows you to either:

• Export the information as displayed in the list companies

• Export the sections of information from the report of companies in the list.
Prior to accessing this dialog, you can mark companies by selecting their check boxes in order to
specify which companies you want to include or exclude in the export. You can then choose to
export the information of all companies, all marked/unmarked companies or a range of companies
to a range of file formats.

Export dialog

274
 Exporting

11.4.2 Procedure
1. Select the information you want to export:
a. List of companies (default option):
Keep this option selected if you want to export the information of companies as
displayed in your list (i.e. the items of each company selected in your current list
layout).

• Select the Include the search summary check box to include in the export file
the search steps that were specified to produce the list of companies.
• Select the Include the current definition of the GUO check box to include that
setting in the export.
• Choose how you want to process multi-value fields in the exported file. You can
choose to export the value of each multi-value field to a distinct cell (default
option), or to include them all in one cell (and hence keeping one line per
company). In the distinct cell option you can also choose to repeat single data
items.
Note: Keeping one line per company is only available for exports to Excel.
Repeating single data items is only available for exports to Excel and text files.
b. The companies' report:
Select this option to export sections of information contained in the report of the
selected companies for the export. If you select this option, you can only select a
maximum of 100 companies for the export and cannot export the Corporate Group or
the subsidiaries section with three levels or more.

275
Amadeus - User Guide

• Select the report format:

By default, the report(s) of company(ies) you want to export will include the
sections as defined in your Current report, i.e. the last report format you
defined. Optionally, you can select another report format (predefined or
previously created and saved) from the drop-down list. You can also directly
create a new report format by clicking the View / Modify link.

• Export each company to a separate file:

By default, all the reports will be exported to a single file. Select this option if you
want to export each company report to a distinct file.
2. Select the companies you want to export:

1.

• All companies:
Select this option to export the information of all companies currently included in the
list. If there are more than 100 companies and you chose to export the reports of the
selected companies, you need to choose one of the other available options.

• The marked companies:

Select this option to export all companies currently marked in the list. This option is
only available if you have previously marked at least one company.

• The unmarked companies:

Select this option to export all companies currently unmarked in the list. This option is
only available if you have previously marked at least one company.

• The companies from:

Select this option to export a range of companies. The numbers that you enter
correspond to the position of the companies according to how the list is sorted.

Notes:
• The options marked companies and unmarked companies are only available if you
previously marked companies.
• Some options may be unavailable due to limitations regarding the export of a list or
limitations regarding the export of reports.
2. Select the required export file format:

• If you are exporting a list you can export to an Excel worksheet, a text file or an XML
file.

• If you are exporting one or more reports, you can export to an Excel worksheet or a
PDF file.
See Export formats for more information on the available formats.
3. Choose a name for the file to be exported. A default name is suggested for each
exported file. We recommend you to give each file a distinctive name that characterises its
contents so you can easily find it in the future.
4. Click the OK button to confirm your settings and start the export process.

Tips:

• If you want to export a large number of companies, mark all those you do not want to
export before accessing this dialog and choose the 'unmarked' option. Inversely, if you
want to export a small number of companies, mark all those you want to export.
• If you want to export all companies with a certain variable's value that is above, below or
within a certain threshold, sort your list according to that variable, identify the
occurrence(s) of the companies outside your threshold and export the range.

11.5 Exporting from a report

276
 Exporting

Access:
• Click the icon when it is available in the report toolbar to export all the report
sections currently displayed and included in the report format.
• Maximise a report section and then click the icon from the new window to export
a single report section.

11.5.1 Overview
The export function from a company report allows you to export to various file formats the report
section(s) currently displayed of the current company, all companies, all marked/unmarked
companies or of a range of companies. Also note that you can export a single report section by
maximising it in a new window and exporting that section from the new window.
The options available from the export dialog depend on the report sections currently included in
your report format.
There are extra options if you have the ownership tree, M&A deals, news or the subsidiary section
included in the report.

Note: The companies that you previously marked in the list are maintained in the report.
Export dialog

11.5.2 Basic export

1. Select the companies you want to export:

• Current company:
Select this option if you want to export the report of the company currently displayed
in your screen.

• The marked companies:

Select this option to only export the companies that you previously marked from your
list or from the report.

• The unmarked companies:

Select this option to only export the companies that you did not previously mark.

• The companies from:

Select this option to export a range of companies. The numbers that you enter
correspond to the position of the companies in the sorted list.

277
Amadeus - User Guide

Notes:
• The options 'marked companies' and 'unmarked companies' are only available if
you previously marked at least one company.
• Some options may be unavailable due to limitations regarding the export of
reports.
2. Options:

• Export each company to a separate file: select this option to export each company
to a separate file, i.e. if you are exporting the report of five companies, five files will
be created.
3. Address options:

• Export the address / phone / fax of the company:

Select this option to include the address, phone number and/or fax number of the
company in your report export. If the check box is clear, the information will not be
included in the export file.

• Export the address / phone / fax of the related companies / persons.

Select this option to include the address, phone number and/or fax number of the
shareholder, subsidiaries and/or managers source VVC in your report export. If the
box is clear, the information will not be included in the export file.
4. Select the required export file format.
See Export formats for more information on the available formats.
5. Choose a name for the file to be exported. A default name is suggested for each
exported file. We recommend you to give each file a distinctive name that characterises its
contents so you can easily find it in the future.

278
12 User imported fields
12.1 User imported fields
12.1.1 Overview
In addition to being able to retrieve data items (fields) from the official statements published by
companies, Amadeus allows you to add new fields to the current database.
Types of field that you can add to the database are:

• Company identifiers: add alternative identifiers than the ones proposed in Amadeus, such
as identifiers that you use internally in a client, prospect or supplier database

• Single data field: this a free text field that can, for example, contain a description of the
status of a prospect in the sales process, contact information, client account manager etc.

• Numbers: for example the number of days since a client last renewed its contract, the
number of users licensed to use your product, etc.

• Money values: for example sales projection, actual sales, etc.

• Percentages: for example the actual sales over sales projection.

• Date: for example a date at which a recurring event occurs, such as contract renewals.

• Segment: allows you to associate user defined segments with companies by assigning a
common string to several companies (e.g. suppliers or a sales force associated with a
group of companies).

IIf the Amadeus database is composed of N company records and K data fields, the database would
look like this:

Field 1 ... Field k ... Field K

Company 1 Value11 ... Value1k ... Value1K
... ... ... ... ... ...
Company i Valuei1 ... Valueik ... ValueiK
... ... ... ... ... ...
Company N ValueN1 ... ValueNk ... ValueNK
Table 1: representation of the unmodified database

Using the imported fields feature, you can add new fields to the database:

Field .. Field .. Field My Imported Fiel .. My Imported Fiel .. My Imported Fiel

1 . k . K d K+1 . d K+m . d K+M
Compan Value .. Value .. Value MyValue1(K+1) .. MyValue1(K+m) .. MyValue1(K+M)
y1 11 . 1k . 1K . .
... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ...
. . . .
Compan Value .. Value .. Value MyValuei(K+1) .. MyValuei(K+m) .. MyValuei(K+M)
yi i1 . ik . iK . .
... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. .. ...
. . . .
Compan Value .. Value .. Value MyValueN(K+1) .. MyValueN(K+m) .. MyValueN(K+M)
yN N1 . Nk . NK . .
Table 2: representation of the database with imported fields

12.1.2 Definition
We call User imported fields any fields that have been created in the database that exclusively take
values from an external source.

12.1.3 Working with user imported fields

To import new fields and manage existing ones, go to Settings > User imported fields > My
imported fields.

279
Amadeus - User Guide

All user imported fields that you successfully create can be used as follows:

• Search on user imported field values

• Display user imported field values in the list of results

• Display user imported field values in a report

• Insert user imported fields in a customised section

• Insert user imported fields in a user defined variable formula (e.g. formula = my sales /
turnover)

• Use user imported fields in a peer report

• Use user imported fields in a statistical analysis (e.g. distribution of my sales)

• Risk analysis of my clients or suppliers portfolio, based on a segmentation analysis

(segment my clients or suppliers by score classes and use my sales or purchases as
descriptive variable)

• Launch a map analysis to represent my sales or purchases on a map and compare the
penetration indices

• Download user imported field values using web add-in and web service and generate
templates including data from BvD databases.

Notes:
• In addition to being able to create new fields and assign values of those fields to any
company in the database, Amadeus also allows you to modify the values of existing fields
and to add new companies to the database. See User edited data for more details.
• User defined variables (UDVs), while similar to user imported fields in the sense that they
allow you to create new fields that you can use in any of the ways explained above, they
are different in the sense that the value of a UDV is the result of a calculation from other
fields and does not originate exclusively from an external data source.

12.2 My imported fields

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the User imported edited data submenu item.
3. Select My imported fields.

The My imported fields dialog lists all previously created imported fields allowing you to manage
them and create new ones. For background information on imported fields, see Imported fields.
My imported fields dialog

280
 User imported fields

12.2.1 Importing new fields

12.2.1.1 Define the label and properties of the field

1. Click the grey link New label at the bottom of the Label column. A text box is displayed.
2. Type the name of the field label into the text box and press the Enter key on your
keyboard.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each field you want to import.
4. Once the label is entered, a unique code is automatically generated and associated with the
field. This code cannot be modified. You will need to use field codes in the client file
containing the values of the field.

5. For each label created, define the properties of the user imported field by clicking the
icon.
Defining the properties allows you to assign the type of value associated with the field. See
User imported fields properties for more information.

12.2.1.2 Prepare and enter the location of the file of values to import
1. In one or more Excel worksheets (.xls) or tab-delimited text files (.txt), input the values of
the fields you want to create, and save the files to a local or networked disk.
See Prepare the file containing the values of user imported fields for more information on
the rules for preparing these files.

2. Enter the complete pathname of the file you created and saved, or click the Browse button
to locate it.

Note: You can only import one file at a time.

12.2.1.3 Import values from disk
1. After ensuring that the properties of each field match the values of the fields you are going
to import, click the Import button.
2. The import in progress dialog is displayed showing the progress of your import.
3. Once complete, one of the following will happen:

Import successful
If successful, the following screen is displayed showing the results of the import:

281
Amadeus - User Guide

• On the left hand side are displayed the company IDs that have been matched on
the database and for which the values of imported fields were assigned to.

• On the right hand side are displayed the company IDs that have not been found
on the database.
Import failed
If the import file does not respect the validity rules, following screen is displayed
informing you of the nature of the error:

Close the window and either:

• Modify the properties of the field encountering the issue by clicking on the
icon.

• Open the import file and modify the cell displaying the error.

12.2.2 Manage your imported fields

12.2.2.1 Sorting your imported fields
All columns with the icon can be sorted in both ascending ( ) and descending ( ) order. By
default, fields are sorted by Code with an ascending order.
12.2.2.2 Deleting user imported fields

• To delete an imported field click the icon corresponding to the user imported field you
want to delete.

282
 User imported fields

• To delete all user imported fields, click the in the column header.

Note: When you delete an imported field, all values associated with the field are also deleted.
12.2.2.3 Define/view the properties of a user imported field

Click the icon corresponding to the user imported field whose properties you want to view or
edit. You cannot edit the properties of fields for which you already have imported data.
12.2.2.4 Change the label associated to a user imported field
Click the label of the field you want to change, then type a new name into it.
12.2.2.5 Checking import status and data associated to last import

• : Indicates that no values have yet been imported for that field

• : Indicates that values have been imported. The name of the source file, date and user
who last imported it are displayed.

12.3 User imported fields properties

Access: From My imported fields, click the icon corresponding to a user imported field.

Imported field properties dialog

User imported fields can be of seven types. Make sure that all properties that you define match the
properties of the fields in the external file you are going to import.

12.3.1 Choose the value type

The following value types are available:

Value
Explanation Examples
types
Money Fields that refer to numerical values expressed in Sales figures, outstanding
value a monetary terms debt
Percent Fields that refer to numerical values expressed as Actual sales/projected
a percentage (%) sales, sales/cost of sales
Number Fields that refer to any numerical values with no Number of days a client
particular units last renewed its contract,
number of users licensed
to use your product
Single Fields that refer to any alphanumerical values that Client account manager,
data field can only have one single value which is not email address, rating
related to the fiscal closing dates
company Fields that refer alphanumerical values Internal ID used in your
ID representing a company identification number CRM
that you use and not present in Amadeus
Segment Fields that refer to any alphanumerical values that Client specific market
can only have one single value, not related to the segments (e.g. regions or

283
Amadeus - User Guide

fiscal closing dates and that are liable to be industry specific

assigned to groups of companies groupings)
Date Fields that refers to a year, a month or a day Date at which a client
needs to renew his
contract

12.3.2 Choose the value properties

Depending on the type of value selected above, you can define the unit, the currency and number
of decimals in which the values are expressed. For example, if you define the field as a money
value item expressed in thousands of EUR, the values will be imported in thousands of EUR (i.e.
the value 30.125 in the file will be imported as 30,125 EUR)
The option My value is related to the fiscal year-end allows you to specify if the field is linked
to the fiscal year-end. If it is the field may be used in analyses and will be converted depending on
the display or layout options selected in lists, reports and analyses. For example if you choose to
display figures in millions of USD in your report and imported in thousands of EUR, the values will
be converted accordingly.

12.4 Prepare the file containing the values of imported fields

12.4.1 Valid file types
The file containing the values of your imported fields must be one of the following:

• Excel (.xls, .xlsx)

• Tab delimited (.txt)

• Zipped files (.zip)

Notes:
• If you are using a text file (.txt), make sure values are separated with tabs. If you use any
other delimiter, an error will be generate and you will not be able to import the file.
• Zipped files must contain a text file or an Excel worksheet. If several files are contained in
the zipped file, only the first file encountered is considered.

12.4.2 Valid file layouts (not applicable for segments)

The following information must be present in the file:

•User imported field code

•Company ID available in Amadeus
•Year
•User imported field value
Optionally, you can include a label column. Two layouts are possible, standard and alternative:
12.4.2.1 Standard file layout
For each column you must include a header that exactly matches the instructions below in order to
successfully import the file. The order of the columns is not important as information is identified
using the text inputted in the column header, not its position.

Notes:
• The file should not have a duplicate record with the same values for User imported field
code, Company ID and Year. If there are such duplicates, you will be trying to assign
different values for the same field, for the same company for the same year.
• If in a specific column you have consecutive repeating values (e.g. five consecutive rows
for the same year), you only need to input the first occurrence of the value and leave the
cells underneath blank until the value changes. The blank cells will be imported using the
first value identified above it (see example below).
Column containing the user imported field code
Column label: "CODE"
In this column, enter the code given to the user imported field when you created it (e.g.
CF00001).

284
 User imported fields

• Each cell in this column can contain a maximum of one code i.e. you cannot put in
CF00001 CF00002 a single cell.

• You can input different codes in different cells i.e. you can store and import the values
of more than one field in a single file.

• If you input an invalid code or a code that does not exist in Amadeus, the corresponding
value will not be imported and the following warning message will be displayed when
importing the file: Unknown field code(s).
Company ID column
Column label: label depends in the type of company ID you use.
• BvD ID numbers: label = "BVDID"
• ISIN number: label="ISIN"
• Sedol numbers: label = "SEDOL"
•

The company ID column is used to identify the company on Amadeus to which you want to
assign the value of the user imported field.

• You can use any company ID type supported by Amadeus. If you input an invalid
company ID label the following warning message is displayed when importing the file:
Unknown company ID type.

• One company ID number per cell.

• If you specify a company ID value that does not correspond to a company available in
Amadeus, the value associated with that line will not import. After the import process, a
result screen displays the company IDs that could not be matched.
If the company ID type you want to use is not listed above and you are unsure of what label to
input, please contact your account manager.
Year column
Column label: "YEAR"
The year column is used to identify the year to which the value of the user imported field
corresponds.

• Years must be entered as absolute values (e.g. 2009) and not in relative terms (N-1).

• You must enter maximum one year per cell.

• If the user imported field is related to the fiscal year end (see User imported fields
properties), then the information regarding the year is mandatory and the User
imported field value will not import if it is not entered. If the User imported field is not
related to the fiscal year end, the year will be ignored when importing the file and you
may therefore leave it blank.
User imported field value column
Column label: "VALUE"
The value column is used to capture the value of the User imported fields you want to import.
You must ensure that values you enter match the properties associated to them.

• The value that you specify must match the type of field specified in the properties of the
User imported field. For example if you input text for a User imported field that should
be expressed as a money value, as a number or as a percentage, it will not import.

• For numbers, percentages or money values, decimals will only be taken into account if
the number of decimals has been correctly defined (to 1 or 2) in the User imported field
properties.

• For User imported fields that are expressed as money values, ensure that the value you
assign matches the unit and currency defined in the properties of the field.
User imported field label column

285
Amadeus - User Guide

Column label: "LABEL"

The label column is optional and can be used to input the label of the field. The label may or
may not match the label assigned in the application.
Below is an example of a valid layout in Excel:

The following example disregards repeating values and will import the same data as above:

12.4.2.2 Alternative file layout

Alternatively, you can use a layout where the imported field codes are used in the header of the
column. If you use this layout you do not need to include the "Code" column as above:

• Column 1 needs to be the company ID column and follows the same rules as above for the
standard layout

• Each subsequent column header must be the imported field code (e.g. CF00001, CF00002),
and, if it is field representing a money value, must be suffixed with the year it refers to
(e.g. CF00001_2007, CF00002_2007).
Below is an example of a valid file using this alternative layout:

286
 User imported fields

12.4.3 Valid file layouts (for fields of type segment only)

The following information must be present in the file when creating a user imported field of type
"segment":

• User imported field code

• Company ID available in Amadeus
• Segment ID
• Segment label
Here too, two layouts are possible, standard and alternative:
12.4.3.1 Standard file layout
For each column you must include a header that exactly matches the instructions below in order to
successfully import the file. The order of the columns is not important as information is identified
using the text inputted in the column header, not its position.

Note: If in a specific column you have consecutive repeating values (e.g. five consecutive rows
for the same year), you only need to input the first occurrence of the value and leave the cells
underneath blank until the value changes. The blank cells will be imported using the first value
identified above it (see example below).

Column containing the user imported field code

Column label: "CODE"
In this column, enter the code given to the user imported field when you created it (e.g.
CF00001). The same rules apply as above for the non-segment file.
Company ID column

Column label: label depends in the type of company ID you use. See list of ID codes above.
The company ID column is used to identify the company on Amadeus to which you want to
assign the value of the user imported field. Same rules as above apply.

Segmentation ID column
Column label: "SEGID"
The segmentation ID column is used to uniquely identify a specific segment in your user
imported field and define the companies belonging to a specific segment.
The ID you assign to each segment may be numbers (1, 2, 3, etc), letters (A, B, C, etc) or a
combination of both (A1, A2, B1, B2, B3, etc).

A segmentation ID:

• can be associated with more than one company

• for one same imported field, can only be associated with one segmentation label (see
below)
Segmentation label column
Column label: "SEGLABEL"

287
Amadeus - User Guide

The segmentation label column is used to associate a label with a specific segment of your
imported field.

• Segment label is free text and should indicate what the segment refers to.

• For each imported field, the Segmentation label and ID association must be unique: you
cannot have a segment associated with two different labels or one label associated with
two different IDs.
Below is an example of a valid layout in Excel:

12.4.3.2 Alternative file layout

Alternatively, you can use a different layout where the imported field codes are used in the header
of the column. If you use this layout you do not need to include the "Code" column as above:

• Column 1 needs to be the company ID column and follows the same rules as above

• Each subsequent column header must be the imported field code (e.g. CF00001, CF00002),
and must be suffixed SEGID for the segment ID column and SEGLABEL for the segment
label column.
Below is an example of a valid file using this alternative layout:

288
13 User edited data
13.1 User edited data
13.1.1 Overview
In addition to being able to retrieve official statements and figures published by companies,
Amadeus allows you to modify data present in the database, to create new companies, and to save
all this information for future re-use.
If the Amadeus database is composed of N company records and K data fields, the database want
this:

Field 1 ... Field k ... Field K

Company 1 Value11 ... Value1k ... Value1K
... ... ... ... ... ...
Company i Valuei1 ... Valueik ... ValueiK
... ... ... ... ... ...
Company N ValueN1 ... ValueNk ... ValueNK
Table 1: representation of the unmodified database

Using the user edited data feature, you can add new companies to the database or modify the
values of existing fields:

Field 1 ... Field k ... Field K

Company 1 Value11 ... MyValue1k ... Value1K
... ... ... ... ... ...
Company i Valuei1 ... Valueik ... MyValueiK
... ... ... ... ...
Company N ValueN1 ... ValueNk ... ValueNK
New company MyValue(N+1)1 ... MyValue(N+1)k ... MyValue(N+1)K
N+1
... ... ... ... ... ...
New company MyValue(N+j)1 ... MyValue(N+j)k ... MyValue(N+j)K
N+j
... ... ... ... ... ...
New company MyValue(N+J)1 ... MyValue(N+J)k ... MyValue(N+J)K
N+J
Table 2: representation of the database with own data, orange cells representing
modified or added data

This user edited data is then available for display in company reports and can be used in searches,
lists, analyses or any other module involving financial data.

13.1.2 Definition
We call User edited data any data available on the Amadeus database that has been modified by a
user as well as all data that a user has inputted to existing fields when adding a new company to
the database.

13.1.3 Report modes

In order to allow users to input data, two modes are available for a company report:

• Read only mode: this is the default mode when accessing viewing a company's report. As
the name suggests, in this mode you can read data but cannot modify it.

• Editable mode: in editable mode, you are able to modify or add data company as well as
create a new company in the database.

To go to editable mode either:

289
Amadeus - User Guide

• Click the New company link from Settings > User edited data > Companies with edited
data.
This allows you to add a new company to the database.

• Click the name of a previously created or modified company from Settings > User edited
data > Companies with edited data.
This will allow you to modify the data of a company.

• Click the Edit icon in the toolbar of the report when viewing a company report. This allows
you to modify the data of the company currently displayed.

Note: In addition to being able to modify the values of existing fields and adding new
companies to the database, Amadeus also allows you to create new fields and assign values to
those fields to any company in the database (user created or not). See User imported fields for
more details.

13.2 Create a new company

Access: From Settings > User edited data > Companies with edited data, click the New company
button.

When you create a new company on Amadeus you are presented with the editable Header section.

All the values of the fields comprising the Header are given default values that you can edit. Fields
marked with an asterisk (*) are compulsory fields.
1. To edit a field either:

• Click the value of a field end edit the value as needed (free-text fields).

• Select a value for the field from a predetermined drop-down list.

290
 User edited data

• Click the icon to select a value from a hierarchical table (displayed in a layered
pop-up).
2. To successfully create the company, you must fill-in at least the following compulsory
fields:

• The company name

• The company identification number: the company identification number is a special

and crucial field as it acts as the primary key used to identify a company in the
database. The value that you enter is therefore of utmost importance and should
not be the same number as any other company already present on the database. If
you enter an identification number already assigned to another company, you will
be prompted to change the specified number.

3. Click the button to save your data.

4. Once the data is saved, you can edit the other editable sections using the side menu. See
Modify data of a company for more information.

13.3 Modify data of a company

Access:
• From a company report click the Edit icon of the report toolbar.
• From Settings > User edited data > Companies with edited data, click the name of the
company you want to edit (supposes that you have already created User edited data).

Once you enter the company report's in editable mode, the side menu refreshes allowing you to
choose a section to edit, or to update data from the database.

13.3.1 Edit a specific section

From the side menu, click the section you want to edit. The section is displayed in editable mode.
13.3.1.1 Editing a non-financial section
To edit a field within a report section either:

• For free-text fields, click a field and edit the value as required.

• For fields that accept a limited range of values, select the required value from the drop-
down list.

• Where available, click the icon to select a value from a table (displayed in a layered
pop-up).

When you are finished editing, click the icon to save your modifications.
13.3.1.2 Editing a financial section

291
Amadeus - User Guide

• You can edit the value of any figure available by simply clicking the value of a field and
typing as needed.

• You can delete a year by clicking the icon corresponding to the year you want to
delete.

• You can change the characteristics of a year (type of statement, closing date, number of
months, currency and units) by clicking the header of the column.

• You can add a new column of data by clicking the Add a year link. The following dialog
is displayed, which you can use to define the type of statement
(consolidated/unconsolidated), closing date, number of months, currency and units.

Note: If you choose a different type of statement than the ones existing all previous
financial values will be lost.

• When you are finished editing click to save your modifications.

Notes:

• All fields that depend on other fields (by sum, difference, products, etc.) are
automatically updated once all fields on which it depends on are completed. You can still
override the automatic computation of these fields by typing in values as you see fit.

• For all fields that you enter, you can enter values as formulae using standard arithmetic
operators (=, +, -, *, /) instead of the value. If you type for example "=1+1", the cell
will save 2.

• The Check validity of accounts link allows you to check that the different formulae are
valid as well verifying that the Total Assets and Liabilities equal one another and are
non-negative. When you click the link, a message informs you of any inconsistencies

292
 User edited data

and their origin.

Click the Finish button when you have finished your editing and view the report.

13.3.2 Update data

Click the application server from which you want to update the data. A screen is displayed showing
you which sections, if any, are different between your version and the data available on the
selected server.

If you have previously created "My Data" for the selected sections, this data will be overwritten
with the data from the database on the server.

293
14 User defined variables
Access:
• From the dialog allowing you to create or modify a customised section:
o Click the icon of a financial item or variable already included in a customised
section, or
o Click the icon displayed alongside the formula text box when editing the formula
of an item, or
o Double-click in the formula text box of a financial item or formula.
• Click the name of a previously saved user defined variable or click the New UDV button
from Settings > User Defined Variables > My User Defined Variables.
• From the Home page, go to the grouped view of search criteria, expand User Defined
Variables and select Create a new UDV.

14.1 Overview

The financial formulae wizard allows you to quickly and easily define formulas to create financial
variables that you can use in::

• Searches

• The list of results

• Company reports

• Customised sections

• Peer reports

• Analyses (segmentation, distribution, etc.)

• Spreadsheets or PowerPoint presentations, by downloading values using the Web add-in

Each item included in a financial formula is defined by a field code and a relative year using the
following syntax: FieldCode[N-i]. If no relative year is specified, the last available year is used [N].

The financial formulae wizard includes tabs allowing you to:

• Define the formula of the variable (Formula tab)

• Define the properties of the variable (Properties tab)

295
Amadeus - User Guide

14.2 Define the formula

14.2.1 Creating simple variables
Financial variables may be constructed from any existing financial field or previously created
financial variables using the usual arithmetic operators (+, -, *, /, ^), parentheses, and constants
(always preceded by '#').
You can type the formula directly in the Your formula text box, or use the following procedure:
1. From the drop-down list below the orange display area, select a relative year (N, N-1, N-2,
etc.) for the financial variable you want to include in your expression.
2. Select the financial item from the tree-like structure on the left of the dialog or use the
search feature below that to find and select the item to display the field code in the Your
formula text box.

3. In the keypad below the orange display area, click the operator you want to use to link this
item with the subsequent one.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until your expression is built. Wherever necessary, include
parentheses in order to specify the correct execution order for terms in the expression. To
insert a constant click the # button and then click the number buttons.
5. Click the Test button in the top right corner of the dialog to validate the formula on the
test company (shown in the orange box at the lower right). If you want to change the test
company click the Modify link. If the formula is invalid, an error message is displayed
informing you on the source of the error.

14.2.2 Creating variables based on averages

Using the same steps as above you can create variables based on averages using the following
syntax:
FieldCode(Mi)
Where:

• FieldCode: is the code of the field you want to retrieve the average

• M: is the indicator you want to calculate the average

• i: is the number of years (in relative terms to the last available year) for which you want to
calculate the average
Please note that averages are only calculated using available data. In other words, if, for a specific
year included in the average, a value is not available, it will be omitted from the calculation.
Example:

Value for = 100

LY
Value for = n.a.
LY-1
Value for = 120
LY-2
Value[M3] = (100 + 120) / 2 = 110
(i.e. the value for LY-1 is omitted from the calculation and we
divide by 2, instead of 3

14.2.3 Creating conditional variables

You can create more complex formulas using the:

• IF statement,

• EXIST statement

296
 User defined variables

• Comparison operator (<, >, <=, >=, <>, ==)

• Boolean operators (AND, OR, NOT).

The classic structure of a conditional expression is:
IF(A, B, C), with:

• A: condition

• B: value to display if the condition is true

• C: value to display if the condition is false

Notes:
• B or C could themselves be nested conditional expressions (see example below).
• Use the following syntax to assign the result 'n.a.' to a condition: #N/A
• You are not limited to using numeric values when creating a conditional user defined
variable (UDV). You can build conditional UDVs using variables that take values of type
string (such as industry codes, legal forms, status, dates, durations etc.) and can assign a
text value to the result of a condition. All values of type string must be placed between
double quotation marks. Also note that all results of a condition must be of the same type
(i.e. you cannot have the result of a condition if it is true to be of type string and of type
numeric if it is false).
• For conditional variables based on dates or durations (see below), comparisons are only
possible if you compare dates to dates and durations to durations

Examples:
In the following examples, text in orange refers to a field code. The field codes referenced below
are generic and are used for example purposes only. Refer to the valid field codes displayed in
parentheses next to the field label in the tree-like structure displayed in the left side of the screen.

• IF(FieldCode1<>#N/A, FieldCode1, #0)

Interpretation: if a value for Field1 is available then the UDV is assigned the value of field1
else display it is assigned the constant 0.

• IF((FieldCode2<#100000) OR (FieldCode3==#0), #N/A, FieldCode2/FieldCode3)

Interpretation: if Field2 is less than 100000 or Field3 is equal to the constant 0, then value
of the UDV is "n.a."; if Field2 is equal or superior to 100000 or Field3 is different to the
constant 0, then the value of the UDV is equal to the ratio of Field2 divided by Field3.

• IF((FieldCode4>=#50) AND (FieldCode5<>FieldCode6), #0, FieldCode4+#50)

Interpretation: if Field4 is superior or equal to 50 and Field5 is different than Field6, then
value of the UDV is equal to the constant 0; if Field4 is less than 50 and Field5 is equal to
Field6, then value of the UDV is equal to field4+50.

• IF(EXIST(FieldCode7), FieldCode7, #0)

Interpretation: if Field7 exists, then the value of the UDV is the value the Fied7, else, the
UDV is equal to 0.

• IF(FieldCode8<#5000, #1, IF((FieldCode8<#10000), #2, #3))

Interpretation: if Field8 is less the 5000 then the value of the UDV is 1; if Field8 is superior
or equal to 5000 but less then 10000, then the value of the UDV is equal to 2; if Field 8 is
superior or equal to 10000 then the value of the UDV is equal to 3.

• IF(FieldCode9/FieldCode10<#50000), "Small Company",

IF((FieldCode9/FieldCode10<#500000), "Medium Company", "Large Company"))
Interpretation: if the ratio Field9 divided by Field10 is less the 50000 then the UDV is
assigned the string "Small company"; if the ratio Field9 divided by Field10 is superior or
equal to 50000 but less then 500000, then the UDV is assigned the string "Medium
company"; if the ratio Field9 divided by Field10 is superior or equal to 500000 then the
UDV is assigned the string "Large company".

• IF(FieldCode11=="ABC", "My Market", "Not My Market")

Interpretation: field11 is of type string; if the value of Field11 is 'ABC' then the UDV will be
assigned the string 'My Market'; if it is not, then it will be assigned the value 'Not My
Market'.

297
Amadeus - User Guide

14.2.4 Creating time based variables

Some fields included on Amadeus return a value of type date (e.g. date of incorporation, account
date, etc.). With items of this type, you can build UDVs that return a date or a duration (by, for
example, subtracting dates). Moreover, you can build conditional variables by comparing two dates
or durations and returning a value of your choice (e.g. a string).
For these types of variables, the following constants are supported:

• #TODAY: returns today's date.

• #xYxxMxxxD: returns a duration of x years, xx months and xxx days

Examples:
- #1Y = 1 year
- #2M = 2 months
- #20D = 20 days
- #2M20D = 2 months, 20 days
- #1Y2M20D = 1 year, 2 months, 20 days

• #1000: Non-monetary constant, returns the value 1,000 regardless of layout and currency

• $1000: Monetary constant, returns the value 1,000 CUR or equivalent, where CUR is the
currency in which the formula is expressed (see Properties below). The "$" symbol is used
to express a monetary constant, but the chosen currency does not need to be USD. The
relevant exchange rate used is taken at the closing date.
In addition to these constants, you can use the following functions within your formula:

• Date(#dd,#mm,#yyyy): returns a constant date

Example: Date(#31,#12,#2010) returns 31/12/2010

• Day(<date>): returns the day of date

Examples:
- Day(FieldCode1) returns the day associated to field1
- Day(#TODAY) returns 1 if we were the first of the month

• Month(<date>): returns the day of date

Examples:
- Month(FieldCode1) returns the month associated to field1
- Month(#TODAY) returns 1 if we were in January

• Year(<date>): returns the day of date

Examples:
- Year(FieldCode1) returns the Year associated to field1
- Year(#TODAY) returns 2011 if we were in 2011
14.2.4.1 Relative year

• OPRE[N]
Interpretation: this variable displays the operating revenue of year N, where N is selected
in a list format or a Catalyst's report financial widget.

• OPRE[N-1]
Interpretation: displays the operating revenue in year N-1. If the company has not filed
accounts in year N-1 the value 0 is displayed.

• OPRE[0]
Interpretation: year 0 is the year corresponding to the LAY of the subject company,
displays the operating revenue for the LAY.

• OPRE[1]
Interpretation: year 1 is the year corresponding to the LAY-1 of the subject company.
14.2.4.2 Absolute year

• OPRE[2012]
Interpretation: the displayed value will always be the operating revenue of 2012,
regardless of the layout.

298
 User defined variables

• OPRE[2011]
Interpretation: the displayed value will always be the operating revenue of 2011,
regardless of the layout.
Et cetera.
14.2.4.3 Current year

• OPRE[Y]
Interpretation: the displayed value will be the operating revenue for the current calendar
year, regardless of the layout. 0 is displayed if current year is not available.

• OPRE[Y-1]
Interpretation: the displayed value will be the operating revenue for the year before the
current calendar year, regardless of the layout. 0 is displayed if relevant year is not
available.

• OPRE[Y-2]
Interpretation: the displayed value will be the operating revenue for two years before the
current calendar year, regardless of the layout (for 2012 if the current year is 2014). 0 is
displayed if relevant year is not available.
14.2.4.4 Age of company

• AGE_COMPANY: Returns a number of years, calculated from"the current year - the year
of incorporation".
14.2.4.5 Round function

• ROUND(UDV CODE,number of digits preceded by #): Allows rounding of numerical

values in a user defined formula. For instance, where UDV00001 = 40.17, then it can be
assigned the following effective values:

ROUND(UDV00001,#0) = 40 (if display precision = 0 in Properties)

ROUND(UDV00001,#1) = 40.2 (if display precision = 1 in Properties)
ROUND(UDV00001,#2) = 40.17 (if display precision = 2 in Properties)

Examples:
(Examples below use the item "dateinc" which refers to a company's date of incorporation)

• Year(dateinc)
Interpretation: this variable will return the year when company was incorporated.

• if(Year(#TODAY)-Year(dateinc)>#10, "More than 10 years ago", "Less than 10 years ago")

Interpretation: this variable will return the string "More than 10 years ago" if the company
was incorporated more than 10 years or "Less than 10 years ago" if it was incorporated
less than 10 years ago.

14.2.5 Concatenating variables

• CONCATENATE(A,B,C)
Interpretation: Concatenates A, B and C, where A, B and C can be Orbis items, UDVs or
strings of free text placed between double quotation marks. For example, you can create a
single field that concatenates all address fields (addr," ",city," ",country) or (addr,"-",city,"-
",country).

14.3 Define the properties of a variable

In the Properties tab, you can:

• Define the units in which you want to express the variable

• Define value limits that the variable may take and the value to display if these limits are
reached

• Define how to treat values that are returned as non-available (n.a.) or non-significant
(n.s.);

299
Amadeus - User Guide

• Treat "n.a." as zero: If not selected, any item in the calculation being "n.a." will
lead to the whole variable being "n.a.". If selected, then the value "0" will be used
for the calculation.

• Treat "n.s." as zero: if not selected, any item in the calculation being "n.s." will lead
to the whole variable being "n.s.". If selected, then the value "0" will be used for
the calculation.

300
15 Own classifications
15.1 Own classifications

Own classifications give you the possibility to integrate into Amadeus your own hierarchical market
segmentation structures based on geography, industrial activity, and company ID numbers. Once
created, you can use these classifications in searches, lists, reports and analyses.
You can reference your segmentation structures to ID numbers, industry codes or geographical
items. This allows you to use your own marketing and sales structure on Amadeus in order to
analyse the market you have specified internally.
See also:

• My own classifications

• Create a new own classification

15.2 Create a new own classification

Access:
1. Hover over the Settings menu in the product toolbar to unfold the setting categories.
2. Hover over the Own classifications submenu item.
3. Select My classifications.
4. Click the button labelled New own classification.

This dialog allows you to upload a previously created own classification, to specify a name for the
table and for each level.
New own classification dialog

15.2.1 Preparing the own classification table

Prior to uploading the own classification, use your favourite text editor (e.g. Notepad) to prepare
the external file to be uploaded, which must be tab delimited.
Three types of own classification tables are possible:

• Own industry classifications

• Own geographic classifications

• Own ID classifications

301
Amadeus - User Guide

The layout of each type of own classification is the same:

• Column 1:
The column header indicates whether the table is based on an industry, a company or a
geographical parameter. Each value in this column must correspond to a value that exists
on Amadeus (e.g. if you are building an own industry classification, the classification must
exist on Amadeus and the codes specified must exist).

• Column 2:
The column header must be "REF". This column defines the table hierarchy and how each
segment in the first column maps to the own classification.
The values in this column must be numeric, each digit referring to a level. Amadeus allows
a hierarchy in a maximum of 10 levels.

• Column 3:
The column header must be "LABEL". This column defines the label associated with each
level of your own classification.
Example: The following table shows an own industry classification based on UK SIC codes

SUK REF LABEL

1 Classifications
11 Consumer Products
132 111 Tobacco
133 112 Sugarcane & Sugar Beets
181 113 Ornamental Floriculture & Nursery Products
12 Mining
121 Mining
1011 12101 Iron Ores
1021 12102 Copper Ores
1031 12103 Lead & Zinc Ores
1041 12104 Gold Ores
1044 12105 Silver Ores
1061 12106 Ferroalloy Ores, Except Vanadium
1081 12107 Metal Mining Services
1094 12108 Uranium-Radium-Vanadium Ores
1099 12109 Miscellaneous Metal Ores, nec
1221 12110 Bituminous Coal & Lignite Surface Mining
1222 12111 Bituminous Coal Underground Mining
1231 12112 Anthracite Mining
1241 12113 Coal Mining Services
13 Energy & Utils
131 Energy & Utils
1311 13101 Crude Petroleum & Natural Gas
1321 13102 Natural Gas Liquids
1381 13103 Drilling Oil & Gas Wells
1382 13104 Oil & Gas Field Exploration Services
1389 13105 Oil & Gas Field Services, nec
14 Technology
141 Technology
3661 14101 Telephone & Telegraph Apparatus
3663 14102 Radio & Television Broadcasting and
3669 14103 Communications Equipment, nec
3671 14104 Electron Tubes
3672 14105 Printed Circuit Boards

302
 Own classifications

3674 14106 Semiconductors & Related Devices

3675 14107 Electronic Capacitors
3676 14108 Electronic Resistors
3677 14109 Electronic Coils, Transformers, & Other
3678 14110 Electronic Connectors
3679 14111 Electronic Components, nec

15.2.2 Uploading the own classification

After having created and saved your own classification table:

1. Click the Choose File button and browse to locate and select the previously created file.
2. Click the Load button to upload the file.

3. Give a name to your own classification table and to each of its hierarchical levels.

4. Click the OK button to confirm and create the own classification table.

303
16 Additional modules
16.1 Industry research

Access: Click the Industry research button displayed at the upper left of any screen you are
working from.

16.1.1 Overview
In addition to providing detailed information on companies, Amadeus also provides access to
various company and industry profiles in a separate module called Industry research.

The Industry research module is composed of two sub-modules:

• Document library: allows you to search, download and view full company profiles (provided
by MarketLine, Morningstar, GLobalData and Fitch Research) and industry profiles
(provided by MarketLine and Fitch Research).

• Market values and trends analysis: allows you to conduct more specific searches on and
view the Market Value and Market forecasts sections extracted from MarketLine industry
profiles.

Industry research home page

To access one of the sub-modules, click on the box corresponding to the module you wish to
access and search:

• Documents library home page

• Market values and trends home page

16.1.1.1 Document library
The Document library sub-module is composed of company and industry profiles. Each profile
constitutes a record in the underlying database (in contrast to the company database, in which
each company constitutes a record). In other words, this module searches, retrieves and displays
profiles, not companies.
You can freely access this module with your base subscription. However, you must subscribe to the
Market research module to be able to download and view profiles. The following subscriptions are
available:

• Access to MarketLine industry profiles:

Add-on subscription to the base Amadeus subscription.

• Access to MarketLine company profiles:

Add-on subscription to the base Amadeus subscription.

305
Amadeus - User Guide

• Access to Morningstar company profiles:

Available for all users for set amount of reports per year. Additional reports are available
for a fee.

• Access to GlobalData company profiles:

Add-on subscription to the base Amadeus subscription.

• Access to Fitch Reasearch company and industry profiles:

Add-on subscription to the base Amadeus subscription.
Please contact your account manager for more information on how to subscribe to this module.

Note: If no specific subscription is made, you are automatically switched to credit invoicing,
when opening a MarketLine (previously Datamonitor) profile. Unit for calculation is based on profile
code and publication date. Credits are deducted when profiles are displayed. Credits cannot be
used for Morningstar profiles.
16.1.1.2 Market values and trends analysis
The Market value and trends analysis sub-module is composed of market value data extracted from
MarketLine (previously Datamonitor) industry profiles. Each MarketLine (previously Datamonitor)
industry profile is associated with a set of market value data that Bureau van Dijk indexes in order
to make the data fully searchable independently of the industry profile they are extracted from in a
dedicated module managed by experts at the Bureau van Dijk.
Since this data is extracted from MarketLine (previously Datamonitor) industry profiles, you may
access to this module if you have access to MarketLine (previously Datamonitor) industry profiles.

Note: This data is also accessible from the Document library module by clicking on the
icon from the list of results as well as from a company report.

16.1.2 Coverage
The coverage of the Industry research module is worldwide. Moreover it is not linked to the
coverage of Amadeus or the specific limitations associated with your subscription. You therefore
have access to profiles independently of the location or size of the associated company or
companies (see below).

16.1.3 Database cross-referencing

The Amadeus database and Industry research database are independent from one another.
However, Bureau van Dijk cross-references profiles and company records as follows:

• For company profiles, each record is linked to a record in the company database based on
a set of matching criteria.

• For industry profiles, a company record is associated to an industry profile if:

• The company is explicitly mentioned as a leading company in the industry profile

• The company is a subsidiary of a leading company explicitly mentioned in the

industry profile

• The company is a shareholder of a leading company explicitly mentioned in the

industry profile

• The company is active in the same activity sector(s) covered by the profile.
This cross-referencing ensures consistency between the two databases and enables users to
download profiles and view market values and trends from company reports.

16.1.4 Database update process

Each industry profile is updated once year. Each month we receive an update for about 1/12 of the
total profile available in the database.

16.1.5 Documents library

16.1.5.1 Documents library home page

Access:

306
 Index

1. Click the Industry research button displayed at the upper left of any screen you are
working from to access the Industry research module.
2. Click Go in the Documents library box.

The Documents library home page provides access to a variety of search options to query the
database or load previously saved searches.

Document library home page

At the top of screen is the toolbar, which is not specific to any screen or module and is always
available. It allows you to run a quick one-step search and access a variety of core functions.
The home page is composed of two main elements, each on its own tab:

• The advanced search

• Saved searches
16.1.5.2 Search
16.1.5.2.1 Documents library quick search

The quick search allows you to search company and industry profiles in one easy step according to
company name or profile title.

1. Click to expand the available search criteria.

2. Select Company name or Profile title.

3. Type one or more keywords into the text box:

• The search is matched on the beginning of words (e.g. sun finds suntan, Sunday,
etc.)

• You can use the Boolean operators AND, OR, AND NOT between the strings of
characters you enter. The default operator used when you include a space between
two strings of characters is AND. If you include a comma, it is considered as an OR.
To include the operator AND NOT, you need to type it in.

• To retrieve profiles matching exactly the text you enter, put the text in between
quotation marks.
4. Click the icon to perform the search and view the list of profiles complying with the
criteria.

Note: The quick search finds both company and industry profiles and list of results may
therefore include both types of profiles.

307
Amadeus - User Guide

16.1.5.2.2 Documents library advanced searches

Access:
1. Click the Industry research button displayed at the upper left of any screen you are
working from to access the Industry research module.
2. Click Go in the Documents library box.
3. Select the Search tab.

16.1.5.2.2.1 Overview

The Documents library advanced search presents all search possibilities in one screen.
The search screen is composed of two main options:

• Search on company profiles

• Search on industry profiles

Each option is mutually exclusive, meaning that you can search for either company or industry
profiles, but not both at the same time.
After choosing the type of profile you want to search on, you can specify any number of search
options. Each search option is linked with one another using the Boolean operator "AND" meaning
that the profile must comply with all criteria simultaneously to be included in the results.
Document library advanced searches screen

Once you have specified all necessary search criteria click the View list of results button to view
the list of associated results.

16.1.5.2.2.2 Search on company profiles

The search on company profiles provides three search options.

Search by company name

The search by company name is a text search allowing you to search for company profiles by
entering a word, part of word, several words, or several parts of words and matching these with
the beginning of the words included in the name of all companies linked to a company profile.

1. Type one or more strings of characters into the text box.

2. You can use the Boolean operators AND, OR, AND NOT between the strings of characters
you enter. The default operator used when you include a space between two strings of
characters is AND. If you include a comma, it is considered as an OR. To include the
operator AND NOT, you need to type it in.

308
 Index

3. A company is linked to a profile if it is the subject of the profile, or if it is mentioned as a

competitor in the profile. By default, searches are limited to profiles where the company is
the subject of the profile.
4. If you want to directly monitor that the string of characters that you intend to enter
corresponds to the intended company, click the Look up button next to the Company
name text box before entering anything
More on the look up option

a. Type in one or more string of characters

b. Activate one or more of the following options:

• Match on whole words only:

Activate this option to only select companies that have words in their name
that corresponds exactly to the words you entered ( and in the same
sequence). This option is restrictive, you should therefore expect less
companies in your results than if it were not activated.

• Match on first words only:

Activate this option to only select companies whose name starts with the
chain of characters that you enter. This option is restrictive, you should
therefore expect less companies in your results than if it were not activated.

• Include previous names:

Activate this option to not only run the search on companies' current name
but also on their previous names. This option expands the number of
results.

• Also match with name(s) as reported in the profile:

Because profiles are matched with companies according to a variety of
criteria, the names of companies reported in a profile does not always
exactly match the official company name. When activated, this option
activated the number of results
c. Click on the Search button to display the results of the search in the table
underneath. A number of columns are displayed in order to help you decide the
company to select and indicate if a company profile exists for the companies
identified.
d. Individually select a company by activating the check box next to the company
line. The selected company is displayed underneath. You may select all
companies present in the table by activating the check-box in the header of the
table. To un-select a company, deactivate the check-box of the selected
company. Note that if more than 20 companies are identified, the results will be

309
Amadeus - User Guide

displayed on several pages. Use the links available at the top of the table to
navigate from one page to the other.
e. After having selected all the desired companies, you may start a new search
from the same window. The previously selected companies are saved and
displayed in the second table.

f. When you are finished, click on OK to validate the selection and return to the
previous page.
Search by location
The search by location is a text search allowing you to find company profiles according to the world
region, subregion, country, country region or city where the subject company is located.
The search compares the string of characters that you type ino the text box with the string of
characters at the beginning of a word included in the region, subregion, country, country region,
US State or Canadian province in which a subject company is located.
For example, if you type North America you will retrieve all company profiles where the subject
companies are located in the US or Canada (because the US and Canada are included in the world
region North America):

• If the characters entered do not correspond with the beginning of a region or country in the
hierarchical table, it is assumed that a city or town is entered (i.e. the selection via a city
or town is conditional upon the fact that no region or country is found). When searching on
cities or towns, the search is no longer matched on beginning of words but on whole words
only (e.g. 'Seat' will not find 'Seattle').

• You can type in more than one string of characters. By default, the logical operator 'AND' is
used to combine the different words. You can also use 'OR' by separating the strings of
characters with a comma. You can also use the Boolean operator 'AND NOT'.
For example if you type North, America you will not just retrieve, as before, profiles
associated with companies located in the US and Canada, but also those located in country
regions such South America, Northern Ireland, North Poland, or North Sweden.

• Use quotation marks to match on whole words only (e.g. specifying "Brit Colum" will not
select companies associated with profiles located in British Columbia).

• You can also type two-digit country ISO codes. For example typing MX selects all company
profiles associated with companies located in Mexico.
Click the Look up button to access the geographic hierarchical table and alphabetical list of
countries.
Source
Select check boxes as required to include those data sources.

16.1.5.2.2.3 Search on industry profiles

The search on industry profiles provides four search options.

Search by company name
The search for industry profiles by company name follows the same logic as the search for
company profiles by company name. The difference is that you retrieve industry profiles associated
with the company or companies you specify. As such, the different options underneath the text box
allow you to define how you want to consider this association:

• The company is a leading company mentioned in the profile(s)

• The company is a subsidiary of a leading company mentioned in the profile(s)

• The company is a shareholder of a leading company mentioned in the profile(s)

Search by industry

This search by industry is a text search allowing you to search for industry profiles by matching the
criteria you entered to the industry to which it refers.

310
 Index

The text search compares the string of characters that you type into the text box to the string of
characters at the beginning of each word of the industry associated with the industry profile:

• You can type more than one string of characters. By default, the logical operator "AND" is
used to combine the words. You can also use "OR" and "AND NOT" by simply typing them
between the strings of characters. Amadeus automatically recognizes them as Boolean
operators and not as search criteria.

• If you want to exactly match the text you entered, put it between quotation marks. If there
are two words or more, putting all the words between one pair of quotation marks will
retrieve companies whose title or industrial reference contain all the strings of characters
entered in the same order.

Click the Look up button to access the industry classification search where you can select
industries from a hierarchical table and/or text search on industry code labels.
Search by geographical scope
The search by geographic scope is a text search allowing you to find industry profiles according to
the region or country covered in the profile.
Click the Look up button to display a list of regions and countries where you can individually select
the countries or regions you want the industry profile to cover.
Source
Select check boxes as required to include those data sources.

16.1.5.2.3 Working with your saved searches

Access: From the Home page click the Saved searches tab.

The Saved searches tab/My search dialog lists all your previously saved searches. From this screen
you can load a previously saved search, delete a previously saved search or add/remove a saved
search to your favourites.
Saved searches

Your saved searches are presented with the following columns of information:

• Name - this is the name you gave when saving the search.

• Date - this is the date and time when you saved your search.

• Type - two type of saved searches are available: Search strategy and Identifiers.

16.1.5.2.3.1 Load a saved search

To load a search, click the name of the saved search. The search will be launched immediately and
you will be presented with the list of results.
You can also load a search saved on a local or networked disk by clicking the Load from disk
button. The following dialog is displayed allowing you to choose a file to load:

311
Amadeus - User Guide

16.1.5.2.3.2 Delete a saved search

• To delete a previously saved search click the icon corresponding to the search you want
to delete.

• To delete all your previously saved searches click the icon displayed in the column
header.

16.1.5.2.3.3 Add/remove a saved search to your favourites

• To add a saved search to your favourites, click the corresponding to the search you
want to add.

• To remove a saved search previously added to your favourites, click the corresponding
to the search you want to remove.

16.1.5.2.3.4 Sorting the list of saved searches

By default, your saved searches are sorted by name in alphabetical order (from A to Z). The arrows
displayed in the columns headers indicate how the list is sorted:

• : indicates the list is sorted according to that column in ascending order

• : indicates the list is sorted according to that column in descending order

To sort the list of saved searches according to a different column or change the sort order, click an
arrow in the corresponding column header.
16.1.5.3 List of results from Document library profiles

Accessing:
• Execute a search (quick search or advanced search) and click the View list of results
button, or
• Load a search from your saved searches

16.1.5.3.1 Overview

The result screen displays a list of all the company and/or industry profiles that comply with the
criteria you specified in Document library search module. Each line of the list represents a report
and is displayed with a series of columns qualifying the report including publication date, available
file format of profile (PDF and/or HTML), file size of profile, source, etc.
List of results screen

312
 Index

• To download and view a profile, click the hyperlink in the relevant format column (PDF or
HTML) of the record you are interested in. The profile opens in a new window in the
requested format.

• For each record, you can view the previous version of the profile by clicking the icon.
Once expanded, you can download previous versions in the same way as explained above.

• You can sort the list according to any column where you see in the header. The list is
sorted according to the column displayed in darker grey ( indicates ascending, indicates
descending).

• To the left of a profile in the list are displayed:

• The occurrence of the profile according to how the list is sorted. The occurrence
number is used to specify the profiles you want to consider when exporting,
printing, deleting, etc.

• A check box you use to mark the profile. Marking profiles is very useful to indicate
which profile you delete or keep, export or not export, etc.

• allowing you to view associated of market value data. Only available for
MarketLine (previously Datamonitor) industry profiles.

16.1.5.3.2 Working with the list toolbar

At the top of the list is a toolbar with controls and icons that as follows.

Icon /
Action
Control:
Jump to first page.
Go to previous page.
1 of xx Type a page number in the text box and press the Enter key on your keyboard
pages to jump to that page.
Go to next page.
Jump to last page.
Save Save the list of profiles included in the list of results
Alert me Set up scheduled email alerts for some or all of the profiles included in the list.

313
Amadeus - User Guide

Export Export the information displayed in the list of results for all profiles, all
marked/unmarked profiles or a range of profiles to an external file (Excel, PDF,
Word, etc.)
Send Export and send by email the information displayed in the list of results for all
profiles, all marked/unmarked profiles or a range of profiles.
Print Print out the information displayed in the list of results for all profiles all
marked/unmarked profiles or a range of profiles.

16.1.5.3.3 List side-menu

The list side menu contains links allowing you to modify the current search or start a new search.

16.1.6 Market values and trends analysis

16.1.6.1 Market values and trends home page

Access:
1. Click the Industry research button displayed at the upper left of any screen you are
working from to access the Industry research module.
2. Click Go in the Market values and trends analysis box.

16.1.6.1.1 Overview

The market values and trends analysis home page allows access to a variety of search options to
query the database or load previously saved or unsaved searches.

Home page

At the top of screen is displayed the toolbar, which is not specific to any screen or module and is
always available. It allows you to run quick one-step search and access a variety of core functions.
The home page is composed of three main elements:

• The advanced search toolbox

• The search side menu

• The search strategy toolbox

16.1.6.1.2 Advanced search toolbox

The advanced search options provide you with multiple search criteria to accurately retrieve market
values and trend profiles.
Advanced search

314
 Index

The advanced search is composed of tabs and subtabs.

16.1.6.1.2.1 Search tab

In the Search tab you can access all the available search criteria. The Search tab has two
subtabs:

• Grouped view: unless you specify otherwise you are presented with the Grouped
view of search criteria, which organises the available search criteria by logical
category. See Working with the grouped view of search criteria for more details.

• Alphabetical list: this subtab presents all the available search criteria in an
alphabetical list. See Working with the alphabetical list of search criteria for more
details.

In addition to these two subtabs is the Find a criterion text box:

1. Type into the text box. one or more words that are included in the name of the
search criterion you want to use.

2. As you type, a look-up menu is displayed underneath with all the criteria matching
the text you type.
3. Click in the menu to select the criterion you want.

16.1.6.1.2.2 Saved searches tab

The Saved searches tab lists all your previously saved searches. From this tab you can load
a previously saved search, delete a previously saved search or add/remove a saved search
to your favourites.
See Working with your saved searches for more details.

16.1.6.1.2.3 Favourites tab

The Favourites tab lists all the saved searches that you added as favourites. You can create
directories and subdirectories in which to organise and the favourite searches.
See Working with your favourite searches for more details.

16.1.6.1.2.4 History tab

The History tab lists all the searches you ran regardless of whether or not you saved them.
Your history is organised by time period so you can easily find and access a search according
to whether you ran it today, yesterday, two days ago, etc. You can load an unsaved search
by clicking it in this screen.
See Working with your search history for more details.

16.1.6.1.3 Search side menu

315
Amadeus - User Guide

The search side menu contains links allowing you to create a new search or modify the current
search.

16.1.6.1.4 Search strategy toolbox

The search strategy toolbox lists all the search steps that you specified and allows you to: modify a
search step, save a search, delete one or all search steps, ignore a search step and more
importantly, if you have more than one search step, build complex search strategies using Boolean
operators. It is only displayed if you have completed at least one search step.
See Search strategy toolbox for more details.

Note: This topic refers to the company database, but the principles are the same.
16.1.6.2 Search
16.1.6.2.1 Market values and trends analysis - quick search

The quick search allows you to search profiles in one easy step according to profile title or
country/region.

1. Click to expand the available search criteria.

2. Select Profile title or Country/region.

3. Type one or more keywords in the text box:

• The search is matched on the beginning of words (e.g. sun finds suntan, Sunday,
etc.)

• You can use the Boolean operators AND, OR, AND NOT between the strings of
characters you enter. The default operator used when you include a space between
two strings of characters is AND. If you include a comma, it is considered as an OR.
To include the operator AND NOT, you need to type it in.

• To retrieve profiles exactly matching the text you enter, put the text between
quotation marks.
4. Click the icon to perform the search and view the list of profiles complying with the
criteria.

16.1.6.2.2 Working with the grouped view of search criteria

Access: From the Market values and trends home page,

1. Click the Search tab.
2. Click the Grouped view subtab.

The grouped view of search criteria organises the available search criteria by logical category for
easy access.
Grouped view of search criteria

1. To access a search screen and specify a search step, either:

• If there are no subcriteria, click the search criterion.

• If a is displayed to the right of a criterion, hover over it to expand the criterion and
click a subcriterion.
2. After you complete a search step, return to the home page and your search step is
displayed in the search strategy toolbox.
3. When you return to the home page, you can:

• Add another search step from the grouped view or the alphabetical list

316
 Index

• View your list of search results by clicking the View list of results button in the
search strategy toolbox or the menu item Go to list of results from the search
side menu.

• Save your search by clicking the Save button in the search strategy toolbox

16.1.6.2.3 Working with the alphabetical list of search criteria

Access: From the Market values and trends home page,

1. Click the Search tab.
2. Click the Alphabetical list subtab.

The Alphabetical list subtab presents all the search criteria in an alphabetical list.
Alphabetical list of criteria

1. Scroll down the list or use the shortcuts above the list to find the search criterion by which
you want to search.
2. Click the search criterion to access the search screen and specify your search step.
3. After you complete a search step, return to the home page, where your search step is
displayed in the search strategy toolbox.
4. From there, you can:

• Add another search step from the grouped view or the alphabetical list

• View your list of search results by clicking the View list of results button from the
search strategy toolbox or the Go to list of results item from the search side
menu.

• Save your search by clicking the Save button from the search strategy toolbox.

16.1.6.2.4 Working with your saved searches

Access: From the Home page click the Saved searches tab.

The Saved searches tab/My search dialog lists all your previously saved searches. From this screen
you can load a previously saved search, delete a previously saved search or add/remove a saved
search to your favourites.

317
Amadeus - User Guide

Saved searches

Your saved searches are presented with the following columns of information:

• Name - this is the name you gave when saving the search.

• Date - this is the date and time when you saved your search.

• Type - two type of saved searches are available: Search strategy and Identifiers.

16.1.6.2.4.1 Load a saved search

To load a search, click the name of the saved search. The search will be launched immediately and
you will be presented with the list of results.
You can also load a search saved on a local or networked disk by clicking the Load from disk
button. The following dialog is displayed allowing you to choose a file to load:

16.1.6.2.4.2 Delete a saved search

• To delete a previously saved search click the icon corresponding to the search you want
to delete.

• To delete all your previously saved searches click the icon displayed in the column
header.

16.1.6.2.4.3 Add/remove a saved search to your favourites

• To add a saved search to your favourites, click the corresponding to the search you
want to add.

• To remove a saved search previously added to your favourites, click the corresponding
to the search you want to remove.

16.1.6.2.4.4 Sorting the list of saved searches

By default, your saved searches are sorted by name in alphabetical order (from A to Z). The arrows
displayed in the columns headers indicate how the list is sorted:

318
 Index

• : indicates the list is sorted according to that column in ascending order

• : indicates the list is sorted according to that column in descending order

To sort the list of saved searches according to a different column or change the sort order, click an
arrow in the corresponding column header.

16.1.6.2.5 Working with your favourite searches

Access: From the Market values and trends home page, click the Favourites tab

The Favourites tab lists all the saved searches that you added as favourites. You can load a
search, create directories in which to organise your favourites as well as remove a favourite search
or directory.
Favourites

16.1.6.2.5.1 Loading a search

To load a search that you added in your favourites, simply click its name. You will be presented
with the list of results.

16.1.6.2.5.2 Organising your favourites

Organising your favourites is easy and intuitive. You can create directories with custom labels and
place your favourites into them by dragging and dropping. You can also reorder your favourites by
dragging and dropping into position in the list.
To create a new directory:

1. Click the New directory button. The screen refreshes with a newly created directory.
2. In the text box, type the label you want to give to the directory and press Enter on your
keyboard.
At any time you can rename a directory by clicking the label and typing the new label in the text
box.

16.1.6.2.5.3 Removing a favourite search or directory

• To remove a favourite search, click the icon corresponding to the search you want to
remove. Note that removing a favourite search does not delete the search from your saved
searches. You can restore the search in your favourites from your list of saved searches.

• To remove a directory,

1. Click the icon corresponding to the directory you wish to delete.

2. A pop-up dialog prompts you to choose whether to remove the directory and all
favourite searches within it, or just the directory.

319
Amadeus - User Guide

3. Click the required option button and click the OK button.

You can also remove the full list of favourites and all directories in one operation by clicking the
Remove all favourites from the list button.

16.1.6.2.6 Working with your search history

Access: From the Market values and trends home page, click the History tab.

The History tab lists all the searches you ran regardless of whether or not you saved them,
organised by time period so you can easily find the search you ran today, yesterday, two days ago,
etc. You can load an unsaved search by clicking it in this screen.
Search history

• You can save a search by clicking the icon corresponding to the item you want to save.

• You can delete an item in your history by clicking the icon corresponding to the item you
want to delete. To delete your full search history click the Delete all history button.
16.1.6.3 List of results
16.1.6.3.1 List of results from market value and trends analysis

Access:
• Execute a quick search, or
• Execute a search step from the grouped view or alphabetical list of criteria and click the
View list of results button, or Go to list of results, or
• Load a search from your saved searches, favourites or search history and click the View
list of results button, or Go to list of results.

16.1.6.3.1.1 Overview

The list module is composed of the following main elements:

• The list of profiles selected by your search

320
 Index

• The list toolbar

• The list side menu

List of results screen

16.1.6.3.1.2 Working with a list of profiles

The list of results displays all the profiles that comply with the criteria you specified in the search
module in a list format.

Each line contains the profile title along with a number of columns containing the value of a
variable. If this is the first time you access a list of results or have not specified otherwise you are
presented with the Standard list. See List formats for more information on how to change the list
format.
To access the market value and trend report, click the title of the profile you want to view.
To the left of each profile title, are displayed:

• The occurrence of the profile according to how the list is sorted. The occurrence number is
used to specify the company or companies you want to consider when exporting, printing
etc.

• A check box allowing to mark the profile.

• A icon allowing you download the full MarketLine (previously Datamonitor) profile in
PDF format.
Working with the columns of a list
You can work on the columns displayed directly from the list:

• Change the order of the columns by clicking a header and dragging it to the desired
position

• Resize the width of a column by clicking a border and dragging it to the desired width

• Delete a column by clicking the icon in the corresponding column header

• You can sort the list of profiles according to any variable where you see in the column
header. The list is sorted by the column displayed in darker grey ( indicates ascending,
indicates descending).

• To change the columns that are displayed in the list, go to the List formats page by clicking
the Add link or the icon in the header of the last column.

321
Amadeus - User Guide

16.1.6.3.1.3 List toolbar

The list toolbar, displayed at the top of the list of results, includes icons and controls as follows:

Icon /
Action
Control:
Columns Add or remove columns from the list.
Alert me Set up scheduled email alerts for all or some of the companies included in the
list.
Export Export the information as displayed in the list of all profiles, all
marked/unmarked profiles or range of profiles to an external file (Excel, PDF,
Word, etc.).
Send Export and send by email the information as displayed in the list or the report
of all profiles, all marked/unmarked profiles or range of profiles to an external
file (Excel, PDF, Word, etc.).
Print Print out the information as displayed in the list of all profiles, all
marked/unmarked profiles or range of profiles.
Jump to first page.
Go to previous page.
1 of xx Type a page number in the text box and press the Enter key on your keyboard
pages to jump to that page.
Go to next page.
Jump to last page.

16.1.6.3.1.4 List side menu

The list side menu contains links and menus allowing you to go back to the search module, trash
and create a new search as well as format the list.

You can hide the side menu to maximize your working space by clicking the Hide button.
The other options are as follows:

Option: Action:
Back to search Return to the home page.
Discard your current search and start a new search from the home
New search
page.
Modify current Return to the home page to add search steps or to modify a current
search search step.
Create a new list format from scratch or load a predefined or previously
List format
saved list format.

16.1.6.3.2 List formats

Access:
• From the list of results side menu, expand the List format menu item and select New
format, or
• Click Columns from the list toolbar, or
• Click the Add link displayed in the last column of your list, or
• From My lists click the name of a previously saved list format or the New list button.

16.1.6.3.2.1 Overview

The Format the list dialog allows you to:

• Create a new list format

322
 Index

• Modify a list format

• Save a list format

• Load a previously saved or predefined list format

• Delete a previously saved list format

• Define the default list format

Format the list dialog

Note: if you selected the option Add/remove section, the columns currently selected for
display in the list are listed under 'Your selection'.

16.1.6.3.2.2 Create a new list format

In the left pane are listed all the variables that you can add the columns of your list. These
variables are organised by category.

1. Adding variables:

• To add a single variable:

1. Click to expand the category that contains the variable.
2. Click the variable name or select the corresponding check box to add the variable
to the list format. The variable is then displayed under Your selection.

• To add a group of variables:

1. Select the check box of the category you want to add.
2. All the variables contained in that category are then displayed under Your
selection.

• If you cannot easily find a variable in the tree-like structure, use the search feature to
find and select variables:
1. Type in one or more strings of characters in the text box and click the Search
button.

2. The variables whose labels include any part of the entered text are displayed (e.g.
subs name will find Subsidiary Name)
3. Select the check box corresponding to the variables you want to add.

323
Amadeus - User Guide

2. After having added all the desired variables, you can:

• Remove a previously selected variable by clearing its the check box in Your selection.

• Change the order of the columns in which the variables will be listed by clicking a
variable's name in Your selection and dragging it to the desired position.

• Modify the number of displayed values for items that have more than one recorded value.
3. Click the OK button to view the list of results.

Note: List formats will not be saved by default, which means that when you start a new
session of Amadeus your modifications will be lost. See Save a list format below.

16.1.6.3.2.3 Modify a list format

To modify a previously saved list format or a predefined list, click the icon corresponding to the
list you want to modify.
Follow the instructions above to add/remove sections or reorder them.

16.1.6.3.2.4 Save a list format

1. Type the name you want to give to the list format into the Give a name text box. Note that
you cannot specify the name of a predefined list (e.g. Standard list).
2. Click one of the following icons:

Icon Function
Save the list format to the application server. The name of the saved list will be
listed in your saved lists. If a list with that name already exists, a warning message
is displayed prompting you to indicate whether you want to replace it or save the list
under a new name.
Save the list format to a local or network drive (.list extension file).

16.1.6.3.2.5 Load a previously saved or predefined list

• To load a list that you have previously saved on the application server or a predefined list click
its name on the left side of the Format the list dialog.

• To load a list saved on a local or networked disk click the link Load from disk. The Load a file
from disk dialog is displayed allowing you to choose a file to load.

After having successfully loaded a list, you are presented with the list of results.

16.1.6.3.2.6 Delete a previously saved list format

To delete a list format that you previously saved on the application server, click the corresponding
icon.

16.1.6.3.2.7 Define the default list format

324
 Index

The default list format is the format used by default when viewing the results of a search at each
new session of Amadeus. Unless you specify otherwise it is the Standard list that is considered as
the default list.
You can change this default behaviour by selecting the check box of the format (predefined or
previously saved) you want to use by default. Then the chosen format will be used by default when
viewing a list of results at each new session.

Note: The list that is displayed by default in an open session is the last list format that was
displayed (also known as the current list).

16.1.6.3.2.8 List formats

Access:
• From the list of results side menu, expand the List format menu item and select New
format, or
• Click Columns from the list toolbar, or
• Click the Add link displayed in the last column of your list.

Overview
The Customise the list dialog allows you to:

• Create a new list format

• Modify a list format

• Save a list format

• Load a previously saved or predefined list format

• Delete a previously saved list format

• Define the default list format

Format the list dialog

Note: if you selected the option Add/remove section, the columns currently selected for
display in the list are listed under 'Your selection'
Create a new list format
In the left pane are listed all the variables that you can add as columns of your list. These variables
are organised by category.

1. Adding variables:

325
Amadeus - User Guide

• To add a single variable:

1. Click the category in which the variable is included to expand it.

2. Click the variable name or corresponding check box to add it to the list format.
The variable is then displayed under Your selection.

• To add a group of variables:

1. Select the check box corresponding to the category you want to add.
2. All the variables contained in that category are then displayed under Your
selection.

• If you cannot easily find a variable in the tree-like structure, use the search feature to
find and select variables:
1. Type one or more strings of characters into the text box and click the Search
button.
2. Variables that include a word in their label starting with the text string are
displayed (e.g. subs name will find Subsidiary Name)
3. Select the check box corresponding to each variable you want to add.
2. After having added all the desired variables, you can:

• Remove a previously selected variable by clearing the check box corresponding to that
section in Your selection.

• Change the order of the columns that will appear in the list by clicking a variable's name
under Your selection and dragging it to the desired position.

3. Click the OK button to view the list of results.

Note: By default, list formats will not be saved, which means that when you start a new
session of Amadeus your modifications will be lost. See Save a list format below.

Modify a list format

To modify a previously saved list format or a predefined list, click the icon corresponding to the
list you want to modify.

Follow the instructions above to add/remove sections or reorder them.

Save a list format

1. Type in the name you want to give to the list format in the Enter name text box. Note that
you cannot specify the same as a predefined list (e.g. Standard list).
2. Click one of the following icons:

Icon Function
Save the list format to the application server. The name of the saved list will be
listed under you saved lists. If a list with that name already exists, a warning
message asking you if you want to replace it or save the list under a new name is
indicated.
Save the list format to a local or network drive (.list extension file).

Load a previously saved or predefined list

• To load a list previously saved on the application server or a predefined list click the list format
you want to load from the left side of the screen.

• To load a list saved on a local or networked disk click the Load from disk link. The following
dialog is displayed allowing you to browse for the file:

326
 Index

After having successfully loaded a list, you are presented with the list of results.
Delete a previously saved list format
To delete a list format that you previously saved on the application server, click the corresponding
icon.
Define the default list format
The default list is the format used when viewing the results of a search at each new session of
Amadeus. Unless you specify otherwise it is the Standard list that is considered as the default list.
You can change this default behaviour by selecting the check box corresponding to the list format
(predefined or previously saved) that you want to use by default. The chosen list format will always
be used by default when viewing a list of results at each new session.

Note: The list displayed by default in an open session is the last list format that was displayed
(also known as the current list).
16.1.6.4 Report

Access: To access a company report, click a company name in the list of results after having
specified some search criteria or loaded a search.

16.1.6.4.1 Overview

The market value and trends report is composed of three main elements:

• The report is composed of report sections

• The report toolbar

• The report lateral menu

Report example

327
Amadeus - User Guide

16.1.6.4.2 Report sections

A report is composed of the following information sections:

• Header: displays the profile title and publication date (this section cannot be removed or
customised)

• Data: displays market values and forecasts as a table

• Chart: displays market values and forecasts as a chart

Report sections included in a report, and how they appear, is entirely up to you. You can display a
single report section or create a new report format by selecting any number of sections you want
to include in the report (as well as decide the order in which you want them to appear). Such
report formats can be saved and loaded for future re-use.

16.1.6.4.2.1 Report section toolbar

At the top right of each section the following icons are available:

Icon/link Action Notes

Options Modify the display options of the section
After the section is collapsed,
Collapse the section to hide the contents of the you may expand it by clicking
section. on .
Double-clicking in the
Open/maximise the section in a new browser
heading of a section also
window. From this new window, you can then
opens the section in a new
export, send or print the section individually.
window.
Remove the section from report.

16.1.6.4.3 Report toolbar

The report toolbar, displayed at the top of each report, includes buttons and links allowing you to
navigate from one report to another, format the report, export, etc.

328
 Index

Icon /
Action
Link
Sections Format the report.
Export Export one or more reports.
Send Export and send one or more reports to a selection of recipients by email.
Print Print out the report of one or more reports.
Display the report of the first profile (according to how the list is sorted).
Previous Display the previous profile report (according to how the list is sorted).
1 of xx Type the occurrence number of the profile into the text box and press the
Enter key on your keyboard to jump to that report.
Next View next report (according to how the list is sorted).
Display the report of the first profile (according to how the list is sorted).

16.1.6.4.4 Report lateral menu

To the left or right of the report is displayed the following menu:

16.1.6.4.4.1 Back to the list of results

Use this link to return to the list of results.

16.1.6.4.4.2 Search

Use the menu items to either start a New search (you will lose your current search results) or
Modify current search.

16.1.6.4.4.3 Define the format

A report format is defined by a collection of sections selected for the report (and the sequence in
which they appear).
Hover over the Report format menu item to expand the following menu of options:

329
Amadeus - User Guide

• Create/modify a format:
The items under this heading allow you to create a new report format (New format) or
modify the current report format (Add/remove sections)

• Display a predefined format:

Click one of the predefined report formats to display it.

• Display a saved format:

Click one of your previously saved format to display it. Note that this category is empty if
you have not previously saved a report format.

16.1.6.4.4.4 Display a specific section

The menu items under this section of the side menu allow you to display a single section of the
report.

16.1.6.4.4.5 Download

The menu item under this section allows you download the full MarketLine (previously
Datamonitor) industry profile associated with the market value and trends information currently
displayed.

Note: This lateral menu may be hidden by clicking Hide.

16.1.6.4.5 Report formats

16.1.6.4.5.1 Report formats

Access:
• From the report lateral menu, expand the Report format menu item and select New
report or Add/remove section, or
• Click Add/remove sections from the report toolbar.

Overview
The Report format dialog allows you to:

• Create a new report format

• Modify a report format

• Save a report format

• Load a previously saved or predefined report format

• Delete a previously saved report format

• Define the default report

Format the report dialog

330
 Index

Note : if you selected the option Add/remove section, the report sections currently
selected for display in the report are listed under 'Your selection'
Create a new report format
In the left pane are listed all the report sections that you can add the report format.

• To add a section, click its name to add it to the report. The report section is then displayed
under Your selection.

• After having added all the desired sections, you can:

• Remove a previously selected section by clearing its check box in Your selection.

• Change the order in which the sections will appear in the report by clicking a section's
name under Your selection and dragging it to the desired position.

• Each sections offer a variety of display options. Click the link Display options corresponding
to the section you want to edit.

• Click the OK button to view the report.

Note: By default report formats will not be saved meaning that when you start a new session
of Amadeus your modifications will be lost. See Save a report format below.

Modify a report format

To modify a previously saved report format or predefined report, click the icon corresponding to
the report you want to modify.
Follow the instructions above to add/remove sections or reorder them.
Save a report format

• Type the name you want to give to the report format into the Enter name text box. Note that
you cannot specify the same as a predefined report (e.g. Standard report).

• Click one of the following icons:

Icon Function
Save the report format to the application server. The name of the saved report will
be listed under your saved reports. If a report with that name already exists, a
message prompts you to decide whether to replace it or save the report under a new
name is displayed.
Save the report format to a local or network drive (.report extension file).

331
Amadeus - User Guide

Load a previously saved or predefined report

c. To load a report previously saved on the application server or a predefined report click the
report you want to load from the left side of the screen.
d. To load a report saved on a local or networked disk click the Load from disk link. The
following dialog is displayed allowing you to browse for the file:

After having successfully loaded a report, you are presented with the report.

Delete a previously saved report format

To delete a customised report that you previously saved on the application server, click the
corresponding icon.

Define the default report

The default report is used by default when viewing a company report at each new session of
Amadeus. Unless you specify otherwise it is the Standard report that is considered as the default
report.
You can change this default behaviour by selecting the check box corresponding to the report
format (predefined or previously saved) that you want to use by default. The chosen report will
then be used by default when viewing a company report at each new session.

Note: The report that is displayed by default in an open session is the last report that was
displayed (also known as the current report).

16.2 Patents Database

16.2.1 Introduction
16.2.1.1 Introduction
A patent is a form of intellectual property. It’s a set of exclusive rights granted by a sovereign state
to an inventor, or their assignee, for a limited period of time in exchange for the public disclosure
of an invention.
The information source is the PATSTAT database, established and maintained by the European
Patent Office (EPO). PATSTAT is a worldwide database containing bibliographical data on the
majority of patents currently in force.

In order to display patents as clearly as possible throughout our products we select the most
relevant document - the “referent” or “priority” document - for each invention, so as to group all
documents and applications related to the same invention under one item.

16.2.1.1.1 Data matching

To integrate the patents data from PATSTAT into Amadeus, it is matched to BvD IDs. Part of this
matching is carried out under mutual agreement by the OECD (Organisation for Economic
Cooperation and Development) and the rest is carried out by BvD.
This matching process is currently not exhaustive, for several reasons:

• Not all applicants for patents are reported through the PATSTAT database

332
 Index

• Not all patents have company applicants, and individuals are not included in the matching
process

• The PATSTAT database aggregates many sources with various coding policies. This makes
the matching process more complex, and it may not always allow for the inclusion of all
patents.

16.2.1.2 Access
To be able to access the Patents database you must have a subscription.

If you require further information on subscriptions to the Patents Database, please contact your
local BvD office.
You can access the database from:

• A product homepage: click the Patents tab at the top of the BvD product home
page.Patents access from homepage

• A company report: in the Patents section, click the Select all patents link.

16.2.1.3 Home page

16.2.1.3.1 Overview

The Patents database home page is the first screen that is displayed when you access the
database. From the home page you can query the database, and load previously saved or unsaved
searches.
Patent Homepage

333
Amadeus - User Guide

At the top of screen is the toolbar, which is not specific to any screen or module and is always
available. It allows you to run a quick one-step search and to access a variety of core functions.
The home page is composed of three main elements:

• The advanced search screen

• The search side menu

• The search strategy toolbox

16.2.1.3.2 Advanced search screen

Use the multiple search criteria of the advanced search screen to find and retrieve patents
accurately.
Advanced search

The advanced search is composed of tabs and subtabs.

16.2.1.3.2.1 Search tab

In the Search tab you can access all the available search criteria. The Search tab has two
subtabs:

• Grouped view: unless you specify otherwise you are presented with the Grouped
view of search criteria by default. See Working with the grouped view of search
criteria for more details.

• Alphabetical list: the Alphabetical list subtab presents all the available search
criteria in an alphabetical list. See Working with the alphabetical list of search
criteria for more details.
In addition to these subtabs, the find a criterion text box is available:

• Type into the text box one or more words that are included in the name of the
search criterion you want to use.

• As you type, a look-up menu is displayed underneath with all the criteria matching
the text you enter.

• Click in the menu to select the criterion you want to use.

16.2.1.3.2.2 Saved searches tab

The saved searches tab lists all your previously saved search strategies and patents. From
this tab you can load a previously saved search, delete a previously saved search or
add/remove a saved search to your favourites.

16.2.1.3.2.3 Favourites tab

The favourites tab lists all the saved searches that you added as favourites. You can create
directories and subdirectories in order to organise and place favourite searches.

334
 Index

16.2.1.3.2.4 History tab

The history tab lists all the searches you ran regardless of whether you saved them or not.
Your history is organised by time period so you can easily find the searches you ran today,
yesterday, two days ago, etc. You can load an unsaved search by clicking it in this screen.

16.2.1.3.3 Search side menu

The search side menu contains links and menus to view the list of results, clear and create a new
search, and run a series of analyses on the currently selected patents.
Search side menu

You can hide the side menu to maximize your working space by clicking the Hide button.
The options available from the side menu are the following:

Option Action
New search Clear your current search and start a new search
Modify current search Nothing

16.2.1.3.4 Search strategy toolbox

The search strategy toolbox lists all the search steps that you specified and allows you to: modify a
search step, save a search, delete one or all search steps, ignore a search step and, more
importantly, if you have more than one search step, build complex search strategies using Boolean
operators.

16.2.2 Search
16.2.2.1 Working with the grouped view of search criteria

Access: From the Patents database Home page, click the Search tab and then click the Grouped
view subtab.

The grouped view of search criteria organises the available search criteria by logical category for
easy access.
Grouped view of search criteria

• To access a search screen and specify a search step, either:

• If there are no subcriteria, click the search criterion.

335
Amadeus - User Guide

• If you see a displayed, hover over it to expand to the category, and then click the
criterion.

• After you complete a search step, you return to the home page and your search step is
displayed in the search strategy toolbox.

• When you return to the home page, you can:

• Add another search step from the grouped view or the alphabetical list

• View your list of search results by clicking the View list of results button from the
search strategy toolbox, or the menu item Go to list of results from the search side
menu.

• Save your search by clicking the Save button from the search strategy toolbox

• Run some analyses on the selected companies from the search side menu

16.2.2.2 Working with the alphabetical list of search criteria

Access: From the Patents database Home page click the Search tab and then the Alphabetical
list subtab

The alphabetical list tab presents all the available search criteria in an alphabetical list.

Alphabetical list of criteria

4. Scroll down the list or use the shortcuts displayed above the list to find the search criterion
you want to use.
5. Click the search criterion to access the search screen and specify your search step.
6. After you complete a search step, you return to the home page and your search step is
displayed in the search strategy toolbox..

7. From there on, you can:

1. Add another search step from the grouped view or the alphabetical list
2. View your list of search results by clicking the View list of results button from the
toolbox, or selecting the menu item Go to list of results from the search side
menu.
3. Save your search by clicking the Save button from the search strategy toolbox
4. Run some analyses on the selected companies from the search side menu
16.2.2.3 Saving a search

336
 Index

Access: From search strategy or List toolbar click the icon

Save a search window

16.2.2.3.1 How to save a search

• You have the following options to save a search:

• Save the search strategy (default option): if you select this option you are not
saving the actual patents selected by your search strategy, but the search steps that
you specified and the Boolean expression used to combine them. When you select this
option, each time you load this search, the number of patents may change as the
database is updated.

• Save Patent IDs based on: if you select this option you are saving the list of
identification numbers that uniquely identify each patent currently included in your list
of results. When you next load this search, the same patents will always be included.
Note that if you marked patents in your list of results, only those will be saved.

• You can save the companies that currently own the patents in your list of results. First
select the companies and when saving your search, select the option Add selected
companies to saved identifiers.

• Enter a name for your search in the text box (or keep the default one).

• Click one of the following icons:

Icon Function
Save the search to the application server. The name of the saved search will be
listed under you saved searches. If a search with that name already exists, a
warning message prompts you to choose whether to replace it or save the report
under a new name.
Save the search to a local or network drive.

16.2.2.3.2 Other functions

16.2.2.3.2.1 Load or delete a previously saved search

If you have previously saved a search to the application server, your previously saved searches are
displayed at the top if the search window:

• Click the name of a search to load it

337
Amadeus - User Guide

• Click the icon to delete the search.

16.2.2.4 Working with your saved searches

Access: From the Patents database Home page click the Saved searches tab.

The Saved searches tab lists all your previously saved searches.
From this screen you can load a previously saved search, delete a previously saved search or
add/remove a saved search to your favourites.
Saved searches screen

Your saved searches are presented with the following columns of information:

• Automatic reload - shows whether a search is set to be automatically loaded when you log
in to the database. The icon indicates that the search is set for automatic reload, indicates
searches that will not reload automatically.

• Name - this is the name you entered when saving the search.

• Date - this is the date and time when you saved your search.

• Type - two type of saved searches are available: Search strategy and Identifiers.

16.2.2.4.1 Load a saved search

To load a search, click the name of the saved search. The search will be launched immediately and
you will be displayed in the list of results.
You can also load a search saved on a local or network disk by clicking the Load from disk button.
The following dialog is displayed allowing you to browse for the file:

• A previously saved search strategy file has the extension .strategy

• The file extension of a previously saved search based on ID number depends in the ID
number used.

16.2.2.4.2 Delete a saved search

• To delete a previously saved search click the icon of the search you want to delete.

• To delete all your previously saved searches click the icon in the column header.

16.2.2.4.3 Add/remove a saved search to your favourites

• To add a saved search to your favourites, click the icon of the search you want to add.

• To remove a saved search previously added to your favourites, click the corresponding to
the search you want to remove.

16.2.2.4.4 Sorting the list of saved searches

By default, your saved searches are sorted by name in alphabetical order. The arrows displayed in
the columns headers indicate how the list is sorted:
e. : indicates the list is sorted according to that column in ascending order
f. : indicates the list is sorted according to that column in descending order

338
 Index

To sort the list of saved searches according to a different column or change the sort order, click the
arrows in the corresponding column header.
A dark grey header indicates the list is sorted by values in that column.
16.2.2.5 Working with your favourite searches

Access: From the Patents database Home page click the Favourites tab.

The Favourites tab lists all the saved searches that you added as favourites.
You can load a search, create directories in which to organise your favourites, or remove a
favourite search or directory.
Favourites screen

16.2.2.5.1 Loading a search

To load a search that you added in your favourites, click its name. The search will be loaded and
the list of results displayed.

16.2.2.5.2 Organising your favourites

Organising your favourites is easy and intuitive. You can create directories with custom labels and
place your favourites in them by dragging and dropping them onto the directory.
You can change the order of your favourites by dragging and dropping into the position you
want.
To create a new directory:

• Click the New directory button. The screen refreshes with a newly created directory.

• Type the label you want to give to this directory into the text box and press Enter on your
keyboard.
At any time you can rename a directory by clicking the label and typing a new label into the text
box.

16.2.2.5.3 Removing a favourite search or directory

• To remove a favourite search, click the icon of the search you want to remove. Removing
a favourite search does not delete it from your saved searches, you can restore it to your
favourites from your list of saved searches later.

• To remove a directory:

• Click the icon corresponding to the directory you want to delete.

• A pop-up dialog prompts you to indicate whether you want to remove the directory
and all the favourite searches included in it, or just the directory.

• Select the required option button and click the OK button.

You can also remove the full list of favourites and all directories in one operation by clicking the
Remove all favourites from the list button.
16.2.2.6 Working with your search history

Access: From the Patents database Home page click the History tab.

All the searches you have carried out are listed under the History tab, regardless of whether you
saved them or not.
They are organised by time period so you can easily find the searches you ran today, yesterday,
two days ago, etc..

339
Amadeus - User Guide

Search history screen

16.2.2.6.1 Working with the searches in your History

• You can load an unsaved search by clicking it from this screen.

• You can save a search by clicking the icon corresponding to the item you want to save.

• You can delete an item in your history by clicking the icon corresponding to the item you
want to delete. To delete your full search history click the Delete all history button.
16.2.2.7 Search screens
16.2.2.7.1 Search by current owner

Access: Click Current owner from the grouped view or the alphabetical list of search criteria.

16.2.2.7.1.1 Overview

The search by current owner allows you to find a patent using the name of the company that
currently owns it.

You must carry out a text search on the name of the patent's current owner. You can use a word,
part of a word, several words or several parts of words that will be matched with the beginning of
the words included in the name of all current patent owners in the database.
Additional filters and options are available allowing you to modify the default behaviour:
Match on whole words only
This option allows you to only select companies that have words in their name that corresponds
exactly to the words you entered ( and in the same sequence). This option is restrictive, you
should therefore expect less results than if it were not activated.
Match on first words only

This option allows you to only select companies whose name starts with the chain of characters
that you enter. This option is restrictive, you should therefore expect less companies in your
results than if it were not activated.

16.2.2.7.1.2 Selecting the current owner

• Type one or more strings of characters into the text box. You can use the Boolean
operators AND, OR, AND NOT between the strings of characters you enter. The default
operator used when you include a space between two strings of characters is AND. If you
include a comma, it is considered to be an OR. To include the operator AND NOT, you need
to type it in.Search by current owner screen

• Select the check boxes for the options you want to include (see above) and click Search.

• The results of the search are displayed underneath. Columns of data are displayed to help
you decide the company to select.

• Identify a company in the list by selecting its check box. The selected company is displayed
underneath. You can select all companies present in the table by selecting the check box in
the header. To deselect a company, clear its check box. Depending on the number of
companies found, the results may be displayed on several pages. Use the links available at
the top of the table to navigate from one page to the other.

Notes:

• You can change the order of the columns by clicking a column header and dragging
it to the desired position

340
 Index

• Resize the width of a column by clicking a column border and dragging it to the
desired width.

• You can sort the list of companies according to any variable where you see
column header. The list is sorted according to the column displayed with a dark
grey header ( indicates ascending, indicates descending). Click these icons to
change the sorting.

• After having selected all the desired current owners, you can start a new search from the
same window. The previously selected companies are saved and displayed in the second
table. You can also click the Add a company link to clear the results and start a new
search (previously selected companies are also saved and displayed in the selected
companies table).

• When you are finished, click OK to validate the selection or Cancel to close the window
and ignore the selection.

16.2.2.7.2 Search by BvD ID number

Access: Click BvD ID Number from the grouped view or the alphabetical list of search criteria.

16.2.2.7.2.1 Overview

This search allows you to find patents by the BvD ID number of their current owner.

Search by BvD ID number screen

16.2.2.7.2.2 How to select a BvD ID number

• In the text box, type the full or beginning of a valid BvD ID number. Click the Search
button.

• All BvD ID numbers beginning with the character sequence you entered will be displayed in
the pane on the right. The number of selected patents will be displayed in the top of the
pane.

• Deselect the numbers of any companies you do not want to include in your results.

• Click OK to confirm your selection and view the list of results.

16.2.2.7.3 Search by identifiers

Access: Click Identifiers from the grouped view or the alphabetical list of search criteria, and
select one of the subcriteria from the pop-up menu.

16.2.2.7.3.1 Overview

341
Amadeus - User Guide

This search allows you to find a patent by its identifiers: Publication number, Application
number or Priority number.
When you hover the cursor over Identifiers the three options will unfold. Choose the identifier you
want to use as a criterion. Once you are in the search screen, you can use the tabs at the top to
access the other identifiers.

16.2.2.7.3.2 Selecting the identifier

Search by Publication number screen

• Type a number or part of a number into the text box. If you type more one number, use
the comma as a separator. Click the Search button.

• The results matching the search term you entered are displayed in the pane on the right.
All numbers listed will be selected by default, but you can deselect any you do not want to
include in your results.

• Click OK to confirm your selection and go to the list of results.

16.2.2.7.4 Search by Office of Publication

Access: Click Office of Publication from the grouped view or the alphabetical list of search
criteria.

This search allows you to find patents according to the country's Office of Publication where the
patent is published.

16.2.2.7.4.1 Selecting the Publications Office

Office of Publication search screen

342
 Index

8. To find the Office of Publication you want to use as a search criterion you can type its
name or code into the text box. When you click the icon, the matching country names
and codes will be listed below. Select from this list the offices you want use as criteria.
9. You can also use the list of offices in the pane on the left side of the screen to select the
offices you want to use as criteria.
1. Your selection will be displayed in the pane on the right.
10. Once you have made your selection, click OK to confirm the criteria and display the list of
results.

16.2.2.7.5 Search by keyword in title or abstract

Access: Click Keyword in title or abstract from the grouped view or the alphabetical list of
search criteria.

16.2.2.7.5.1 Overview

This search allows you to find patents by a keyword in the publication title or abstract.

16.2.2.7.5.2 Defining a keyword search

Keyword search screen

• Select check boxes at the top of the screen to run your search on keywords in patent titles
only, or in abstracts, or both.

• Enter the required keyword(s) into the text box that provides the best search strategy for
your search:

• Any of these words: will select titles or abstracts including any of the keywords
you have typed in.

• All of these words: will select titles or abstracts including all of the keywords
simultaneously.

• The exact phrase: will select titles or abstracts that contain the exact phrase as
you have typed it.

• None of these words: will select titles or abstracts that do not contain any of the
keywords you have typed in.

• As you type your keyword search, it will be displayed in the Boolean expression area,
with the operators inserted automatically. You can change the Boolean operators by
clicking the Modify button, deleting and typing in a new operator.

• Once you have defined your keyword(s) and search criteria, click OK to display the list of
results.

16.2.2.7.6 Search by International Patent Classification

Access: Click International Patent Classification from the grouped view or the alphabetical list
of search criteria.

16.2.2.7.6.1 Overview

343
Amadeus - User Guide

This search allows you to find patents using their International Patent Classification (IPC).

16.2.2.7.6.2 Selecting the IPC for your search

International Patent Classification screen

• To find the IPCs you want to use as search criteria you can type their names or codes into
the text box. When you click the icon, the matching IPC names and codes will be listed
below. Select the check boxes of IPCs you want use as criteria.

• You can also use the list of IPCs in the pane on the left to select the offices you want to use
as criteria. Click the arrows to unfold the directories and view the classifications.

• Your selection will be displayed in the pane on the right, under the summary of
result.

• Once you have made your selection, click OK to confirm the criteria and display the list of
results.

16.2.2.7.7 Search by inventors

Access: Click Inventors from the grouped view or the alphabetical list of search criteria.

16.2.2.7.7.1 Overview

This search option allows you to find a patent by its inventor(s).

Inventors search screen

16.2.2.7.7.2 How to select an inventor

• In the text box at the top of the screen, type the surname or part of the surname of the
inventor you want to use to find a patent. If you want to narrow down your results, select
the option to Match on whole words only.

• Click Search to preview the inventors matching your criteria. The list of inventors will be
displayed in the pane on the left.

• Select the inventor(s) you want use as search criteria. Your selection will be displayed in
the pane on the right.

• Click OK to confirm your selection and display the list of results.

344
 Index

16.2.2.7.8 Search by publication date

Access: Click Publication date from the grouped view or the alphabetical list of search criteria.

This search allows you to find a patent by its publication date.

16.2.2.7.8.1 Select the publication date

Search by publication date screen

• Use the text boxes On and after and Up to and including to define the range of
publication dates you want to use as search criteria.

• Either:

• Type the dates directly into the text boxes in the format dd/mm/yyyy, or

• Click the icons to select the dates you want to use to define the range from the
calendar

• Click OK to confirm the criteria and display the list of results.

16.2.2.7.9 Search by words in notes

Access: Click Notes from the grouped view or the alphabetical list of search criteria, and then
select Word(s) in notes from the subcriteria.

16.2.2.7.9.1 Overview

This search option allows you to find patents by the words in their attached notes.
Searching by word(s) in notes screen

16.2.2.7.9.2 Defining the criteria

1. Type one or more words (or the beginning of words) into the text box.

2. You can use the Boolean operators AND, OR, AND NOT between the strings of characters
you enter. The default operator used when you include a space between two strings of
characters is AND. If you include a comma, it is considered to be an OR. To include the
operator AND NOT, you need to type it in.
3. Click OK to confirm your criteria and display the list of results.

345
17 Index
18
A Concentration table ............................... 219

Accessing the aggregation analysis ......... 175 Concentration wizard............................. 215

Accessing the cartographic analysis ........ 252 step 1 ............................................... 216

Accessing the concentration analyses...... 214 step 2 ............................................... 217

Accessing the distribution analysis .......... 198 step 3 ............................................... 218

Accessing the Linear regression analysis . 235 Create a new company .......................... 290

Accessing the peer analysis ................... 140 Create a new own classification ........ 41, 301

Accessing the segmentation analysis 119, 120 Create/manage custom fields ........... 32, 280

Account information.................................. 9 Create/modify a customised section ........ 105

Address book ....................................... 269 Creating and configuring alerts ............... 267

Aggregation ......................................... 175 Custom fields .......................... 34, 279, 283

Aggregation table ................................. 182 Custom fields properties .................. 34, 283

Aggregation Wizard .............................. 176 Customised sections settings .................... 26

Step 1 .............................................. 177 D

Step 2 .............................................. 178 Define the default peer group ............. 66, 76

Step 3 .............................................. 179 Defining your default home page ............... 8

Alerts - overview .................................. 267 Display option for a regression table ....... 244

Alerts settings ...................................... 269 Display option for the evolution of several
variables in indices (aggregation)......... 195
Analysis settings .................................... 24
Display options for a bar chart (aggregation)
B ....................................................... 193
Bar chart (aggregation)......................... 184 Display options for a bar chart (peer analysis)
Bar chart (peer analysis) ....................... 147 ....................................................... 160

Batch search .......................................... 51 Display options for a bar chart (peer report)
......................................................... 88
Boolean operators .................................. 59
Display options for a bar chart
Boolean search priority ........................... 61 (segmentation) .................................. 135
Boolean Searching .................................. 59 Display options for a cartographic table ... 259
C Display options for a concentration table . 225
Cartographic analysis ............................ 252 Display options for a distribution chart .... 210
Cartographic analysis wizard .................. 253 Display options for a distribution chart (peer
analysis) ........................................... 168
Cartographic table ................................ 257
Display options for a distribution chart (peer
Cartographic wizard
report)................................................ 95
step 1 .............................................. 254
Display options for a distribution table ..... 207
step 2 .............................................. 255
Display options for a indices chart (peer
step 3 .............................................. 256 analysis) ........................................... 170

Company reports.................................... 73 Display options for a indices chart (peer

report)................................................ 98
Concentration analysis .......................... 213

347
Amadeus - User Guide

Display options for a Lorenz curve Downloading limitations ......................... 273

(concentration) ................................. 231
E
Display options for a Lorenz curve (peer
Evolution of several variables in indices
analysis) .......................................... 165
(aggregation) .................................... 185
Display options for a Lorenz curve (peer
Export formats ..................................... 272
report) ............................................... 92
Display options for a map ...................... 263 Export settings ....................................... 17
Exporting from a company report ........... 276
Display options for a peer table .............. 157
Display options for a pie chart Exporting from the list of results ............. 274
(concentration) ................................. 228 F
Display options for a pie chart (peer analysis) Financial variables ......................... 109, 295
....................................................... 163
Frequently asked questions ....................... 2
Display options for a pie chart (peer report)
......................................................... 89 H

Display options for a pie chart Home page ............................................. 5

(segmentation) ................................. 137 I
Display options for a quantiles chart (peer Indices chart (peer analysis) .................. 154
analysis) .......................................... 173
Industry research ................................. 305
Display options for a quantiles chart (peer
report) ............................................. 102 L

Display options for a regression chart ..... 247 Layout options for tabular data ................. 80

Display options for a segmentation table . 131 Linear regression .................................. 234

Display options for an aggregation table.. 186 Linear regression table .......................... 241

Display options for elements of a peer report Linear regression wizard ........................ 236
......................................................... 84
step 1 ............................................... 237
Display options for graphs ....................... 83
step 2 ............................................... 238
Display options for options for stock data
step 3 ............................................... 239
sections.............................................. 82
List formats.................................... 68, 322
Display options for ownership sections ...... 83
List of alerts ......................................... 268
Display options for the Peer report table.... 84
List of results ......................................... 63
Display options for the structure of the
balance sheet (aggregation) ............... 189 List of results from Document library profiles
....................................................... 312
Display options for the structure of the P&L
account (aggregation) ........................ 191 List of results from market value and trends
analysis ............................................ 320
Distribution chart ................................. 206
List settings ........................................... 22
Distribution chart (peer analysis) ........... 153
Lorenz curve (concentration) .................. 223
Distribution table.................................. 204
Lorenz curve (peer analysis) .................. 151
Distribution wizard ............................... 198
M
Step 1 .............................................. 200
Managing customised sections settings ...... 25
Step 2 .............................................. 201
Managing list formats and list settings ....... 21
Step 3 .............................................. 201
Managing own data settings ..................... 28
Documents library advanced searches..... 308
Managing ownership settings ................... 24
Documents library home page................ 306
Managing report formats and report settings
Documents library quick search .............. 307
......................................................... 22

348
 Index

Managing the application settings ............... 9 Prepare the file containing the values of
custom fields ............................... 35, 284
Managing user defined variables settings... 27
Printer Settings ...................................... 14
Managing your account settings ................. 9
Product toolbar ........................................ 8
Managing your exports............................ 17
Q
Managing your search settings ................. 18
Quantiles chart (peer analysis) ............... 156
Map .................................................... 259
Quick search .......................................... 47
Market values and trends analysis - quick
search .............................................. 316 R

Market values and trends home page ...... 314 Regional settings .................................... 13

Market values and trends reports ........... 327 Regression chart ................................... 243

Marking companies from the list of results . 67 Report formats ....................................... 77

Modify data of a company .............. 114, 291 Report section display options .................. 80

Multiple data items ............................... 114 Report settings ....................................... 23

My customised sections ........................... 26 S

My exports ............................................ 17 Save a search ........................................ 58

My lists ................................................. 21 Search settings....................................... 19

My own classifications ............................. 41 Search strategy tool-box ................... 57, 65

My own data .......................................... 28 Segmentation ................................. 24, 119

My own exchange rates ........................... 44 Segmentation analysis........................... 120

My own peer groups ............................... 24 Accessing .......................................... 120

My reports ............................................. 22 Segmentation bar chart ......................... 129

My user defined variable ......................... 27 Segmentation pie chart ......................... 130

My username & password .................... 9, 10 Segmentation table ............................... 128

N Segmentation Wizard ............................ 120

Navigating ............................................... 8 Step 1 .............................................. 121

O Step 2 .............................................. 122

Own classifications ............................... 301 Step 3 .............................................. 124

Own data ............................................ 289 Step 4 .............................................. 125

Own data settings .................................. 30 Step 5 .............................................. 126

P Step 6 .............................................. 126

Peer analysis ....................................... 139 Select the default language ...................... 11

Peer analysis wizard ............................. 140 Send settings ......................................... 15

Step 1 .............................................. 142 Software overview ................................... 2

Step 2 .............................................. 143 Statistical distribution ............................ 197

Step 3 .............................................. 143 Structure of the balance sheet ................ 183

Pie chart (concentration) ....................... 221 Structure of the P&L account .................. 184

Pie chart (peer analysis)........................ 149 System Requirements .............................. 2

Place alerts on hold .............................. 270 T

Predefined reports .................................. 79 Table (peer analysis) ............................. 145

349
Amadeus - User Guide

Time consistency settings ........................ 15 Working with the export system ............. 271
U Working with the grouped view of search
criteria................................................ 47
User defined variable settings .................. 28
Working with the results of a cartographic
User preferences .................................... 12
analysis ............................................ 256
V
Working with the results of a concentration
Viewing a distribution analysis ............... 203 analysis ............................................ 219

Viewing a peer analysis ......................... 145 Working with the results of a linear
regression ......................................... 240
Viewing a segmentation analysis ............ 127
Working with your favourite searches ........ 49
Viewing an aggregation analysis ............. 180
Working with your saved searches ...... 18, 48
W
Working with your search history .............. 50
Working with maps ............................... 251
Working with the alphabetical list of search
criteria ............................................... 48

350